Home

78K0 Build - Renesas Electronics

Contents

1. Description format dmacro name definition name macro name definition name two or more types can be specified Interpretation when omitted Only the macro definitions in the C source file are valid Function The d option specifies the same macro definition as the define statement in the C source file Application Use the d option to replace all the specified constants with the macro names Description Up to 30 macro definitions can be specified at once by separating them with A space cannot be entered before or after and If the definition name is omitted the compiler presumes that Mmacro name 1 was defined If the same macro name Is specified in both the d and u options the option specified last is valid Example of use The following codes are defined in the C source file prime c define TEST 1 define TIME 10 C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c dTEST TIME 10 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 347 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE U Description format umacro name macro name two or more macro names can be specified Interpretation when omitted A macro definition specified with d is valid Function The u option disables macro definitions similar to the undef statement in the C source file Application Use the u option to invalidate the macro name de
2. Description format l input file name Interpretation when omitted lassemble list file name mf Function The I option specifies the input of a load module file Application Use the I option when the primary name of a load module file is different from the primary name of the assemble list file or if its file type is not Imf Description When a fatal error occurs the absolute assemble list file cannot be output If only the primary name of the input file name is specified the list converter will add Imf to the file name as the file type and input the file Example of use If the primary name is different between an assemble list file kKOmain prn and a load module file Sample Imf describe as follows so as to specify the input of a load module file Sample Imf C gt lenv78k0 kOmain prn lsample 1mf R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 545 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Absolute assemble list file output specification The absolute assemble list file output specification option is as follows O Description format o output file name Interpretation when omitted oassemble list file name p Function The o option specifies the output of an absolute assemble list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application Use the o option to specify th
3. Example To output a hex file Sample hex describe as C gt o0c78k0 k0 lmf osamle hex b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the object converter will not fit on the command line or when the same object convert option is specified repeatedly each time object conversion is performed To start up the object converter from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the object converter from a parameter file as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 495 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE X gt 0c78k0 Aload module file A fparameter file Parameter file specification option parameter file name A file which includes the data required to start up the object converter Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows A option Aoption If the load module file name is omitted from the command line only 1 load module file name can be specified in the parameter file The load module file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all object convert options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file k0 poc using an editor and then start up the object converter parameter file k0 lmf osample hex ssample sym r
4. Perform optimization Yes Code size qxu3 Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Perform optimization property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 2 Perform optimization with the execution speed precedence Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To perform optimization with the execution speed precedence select Yes Speed precedence qx1 on the Perform optimization property in the Optimization category No is selected by default Figure 2 28 Perform optimization Property Execution Speed Precedence Perform optimization Yes Speed precedence q 1 Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Perform optimization property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 3 Add an include path Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel The include path setting is made with the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 29 Additional include paths Property Macro detinition Macro detinition 0 Macro undetinitian Macro undetinitian 0 If you click the button the Path Edit dialog box will open R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 34 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS F
5. Figure A 43 Save As Dialog Box Save As 1 Save in Of gt amp 4 My Recent O sample ib Documents My Documents My Computer 3 gt File name Output Build Tool tet we 4 ity het save as type Test Files tet w Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select Save file name As from the File menu Focus the Output panel and then select Save tab name As from the File menu Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder to save the panel contents in the file The following folders are selected by default a In the Editor panel The folder that currently editing file is saved b In the Output panel The project folder is selected when the file is save for the first time The previously selected file is selected after the second time 2 File list area File list that matches the selections in the Save in area and Save as type area is shown R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 302 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Specify the file name to save 4 Save as type area a In the Editor panel The following file types are displayed depend on the file type of the currently editing file Variable information file vfi Variable information file Fu
6. When n 5 In addition to 4 places common code in subroutines and uses the library for the stack access Note When the qc option is specified in the CC78KO the types of constants and character constants are handled as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 341 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE O to 127 0x00 to Ox7F 00 to 0177 char type 128 to 255 0x80 to OxXFF 0200 to 0377 unsigned char type OU to 255U unsigned char type O to 377 char type However when the qu option is specified character constants in the range from 200 to 377 are handled as unsigned char type constants and have the values from 128 to 255 The constant added minus is handled as follows char type int type If the result of constant or variable calculation is overflow cast either the constant or variable to a type capable of representing the calculation result By casting changing the data type can be avoided When the qc1 option is specified constant calculation is sign extended Multiple optimization types can be specified If the q option or optimization types are omitted the optimization is identical to when the qcjlvw option is specified To delete a portion of the default options specify the options other than the options you want to delete example qr is specified gt Deletes qcjlvw If both the object module file and assembler source mod
7. b Vacant area detection The variables functions information file generator detects the start address and size of vacant area in the callt area after normal allocation c Determining priority The value calculated via the expression below determines the priority higher values mean higher priority number of references reference type t R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 553 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Note Reference Type normal 1 changing from the normal area to the callt area reduces code by 2 byte callt O functions already allocated to the callt area are not targets for allocation Example 10 times Function funcs is not eligible for allocation since it has already been allocated to the callt area Remark The following functions are excluded from prioritization Function in the flash area Functions in the flash area are not eligible for allocation because they cannot be registered in the callt area However that references to them are counted and output to the file as comments Allocation is also not possible if one is in the boot area and referenced from the flash area these will be output to the file as comments callt function These are not eligible for allocation because they have already been registered in the callt table However that references to them are counted and output to the file as comments static function static f
8. Macro definition 2 oy M 2 To change the macro definitions you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Macro definition property in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 40 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 Set Link Options To set options for the linker select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various link options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for library projects Figure 2 45 Property Panel Link Options Tab Property A CA aERO Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information El Input File El Output File Output folder 2B UildModeN amex Output file name 4Projecth ame Imt Force linking against error No Library Using libraries Using libraries O System libraries System libranes O Additional library paths Additional library paths 0 System library paths System library paths 0 Device Message Stack Link List Error List Others Add debug informabon Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g option El Common A Variables Memory Rem
9. Use the k option to delete comments and reference definition expansions when the preprocess list file is output Description The process types that can be specified by the k option are shown below eooo i peee Performs conditional compilations of if ifdef and ifndef Expands include rc Performs line processing Performs line number and paging processing Remark Two or more process types can be specified If the p option is not specified the k option is invalid If two or more k options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To delete comments and perform line number and paging processing when the preprocess list file prime ppl is output C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c p kcn Output example is shown below R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 345 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO C Compiler Vx xx Preprocess List Date XxX XXX XXXKX Page 1 Command CF051144 prime c p kcn In file prime c PPL file prime ppl Para file t7 define TRUE 1 define FALSE 0 define SIZE 200 mark SIZE 1 Target chip uPD78F0511_44 Device file VxX xx R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 346 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Preprocess specification The preprocess specification options are as follows d
10. e Loutput file name ne Interpretation when omitted ne Function The e option specifies the output of an error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The ne option disables the e option Application Use the e option to specify the location to which an error list file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the e option is specified the output file name will be nput file name eoc If the drive name is omitted when the e option is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive If both the e and ne options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To create an error list file KO eoc describe as C gt 0c78k0 k0 lmf ek0 eoc R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 506 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Parameter file specification The parameter file specification option is as follows f Description format Interpretation when omitted Options or input file names can only be input from the command line Function The f option inputs options and input file names from a specified file Application Use the f option when the information required to start up the object converter will not fit on the command line When specifying options repeatedly every tim
11. h Interrupt handler Describe the part that calls an interrupt handler in the area where the address of the interrupt handler exists In the following case an interrupt handler function name must also be specified by the pragma interrupt directive Interrupt handler address is in the boot area Interrupt handler body is in the flash area R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 480 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 4 Object Converter The object converter inputs the load module file all reference address data must be determined at this point output by the CA78KO linker It then converts this data into hexadecimal format and outputs it as an object module file The object converter also outputs the symbol information used for symbolic debugging as a symbol table file If an object converter error occurs an error message appears on the display to clarify the cause of the error Figure B 26 I O Files of Object Converter Load module file Temporary file Symbol table file Hex file Error list file B 4 1 I O files The I O files of the object converter are shown below Table B 11 I O Files of Object Converter Input files Load module file Binary image file of the object codes output as a result of linking File output by the linker file File containing the parameters for the executed Poc commands user created file hex Output files inn file File create
12. 1 1 4 Shae sub1 1 D iproji STK 2 subii Ly subize amp DAprot STEN E subii El sample c D projisTkh subiz A subi4 DA proj STK E b21 Reading completed E sample c subi3 Stack size specification of sub11 canceled 5 subl4 Pzize specification of subl adjusted Additional margin is set to 8 Recursion depth is set to 3 Stack size specication of subl2 adjusted Additional margin is set to 3 For Help press Fl The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Caution How to open From the Tool menu select Startup Stack Usage Tracer Description of each area 1 Menu bar This area consists of the following menu items a File menu Save Call Chain with Maximum Stack from Selected Function Save All Call Chains from Selected Function Save Call Chain with Maximum Stack from Every Root R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the call chain with the greatest total stack size including the stack size of callee functions of the function selected in the tree display area list display area to an output result file Functions in the same manner as the gq button Opens the Save As dialog box for saving all call chains of the function selected in the tree display area list display area to an output result file Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the call chain o
13. 4 Files of type area Select the type of file to open Stack Size Specification File txt Text format Function buttons Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 318 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE This appendix describes the detailed specifications of each command included in the build tool B 1 C Compiler The C compiler inputs the C source files written in the C language converts them into machine language and output as an object module file After compiling the assembler source files are output so that the user can check and revise the contents at the assembly language level Based on the compile options the list files such as the preprocess list cross reference list and error list are output If there is a compiler error the error message is output to the console and the error list file If errors occur various files other than an error list file cannot be output Figure B 1 I O Files of C Compiler Parameter file C source file Variables information file Function information file Include file GTO OU Of Temporary file Preprocess list file Le OE HE Cross reference list file Assembler source file Object module file Error list file If there are compiling errors a variety of files other than the error list and cross reference files cannot be Remark output A temporary fi
14. Application Use the x option to output the cross reference list file and specify the location to which a cross reference list file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the x option is specified the output file name will be input file name xrt If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the x option is specified the output file name will be output file name xrt Even if an internal error other than C0101 or a compilation error with the number F0024 or a number starting from E occurs a cross reference list file is created However the contents of the file are not guaranteed Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To output the cross reference list file prime xrf describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c x Output example is shown below R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 359 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO C Compiler Vx xx Cross reference List Date xXxX XXX XXXX Page Command CF0O51144 prime x In file prime c Xref file prime xrf Para file ATTRIB MODIFY SYMBOL DEFIN REFERENCE EXTERN EXTERN REG1 AUTOL int AUTO1 int AUTO1 int EXTERN func EXTERN func REG1 pointer PARAM REG1 PARAM AUTO1 int AUTO1 pointer REG1 char PARAM AUTOL1 char d define TRUE define FALSE
15. Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to FFFFFFFFFF hexadecimal number Set flash start address Select whether to set the flash start address for the built in flash ROM product This corresponds to the zb option of the linker Do not set this property for a device that does not have a flash ROM area self programming function This property is changed to No when Yes zf in the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category from the Compile Options tab is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zb Sets the flash start address for the built in flash ROM product No Does not set the flash start address for the built in flash ROM product Flash start address Specify the start address for the built in flash ROM product in hexadecimal without Ox This corresponds to the zb option of the linker Do not set this property for a device that does not have a flash ROM area self programming function This property is not displayed when No in the Set flash start address property is selected How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to FFFF hexadecimal number R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 209 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Boot area load module Specify the boot area load module file name when the load module file for the flash are
16. Description When the option is specified all other options are invalid To read the next part of the help message press the return key To quit the help display press any key other than the return key and then press the return key Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Example of use To output a help message on the display describe as C gt 1k78k0 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 466 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Linker Vx xx XX XXX xx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation usage 1k78k0O option input file option The option is as follows means omissible ffile Input option or input file name from specified file dfile Read directive file from specified file bfile Read library file from specified file idirectory directory Set library file search path o file no Create load module file with specified name Not p file np Create link map file with specified name Not e file ne Create error list file with specified name Not tdirectory Set temporary directory km nkm Output map list to link map file Not kd nkd Output directive file image to link map file Not kp nkp Output public symbol list to link map file Not k1 nkl Output local symbol list to link map file Not ll page length Specify link map file lines per page
17. Hdefine SIZE Target chip uPD78F0511 44 Device file VxX xx R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 360 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE List format specification The list format specification options are as follows Iw Description format w number of characters Interpretation when omitted lw132 80 characters in the case of console output Function The Iw option specifies the number of characters per line in each type of list file Application Use the Iw option to change the number of characters per line in each type of list file Description The range of number of characters that can be specified with the Iw option is 72 to 132 and does not include terminators CR LF If the number of characters is omitted the number of characters per line is 132 characters 80 characters in the case of console output If the list file is not specified the lw option is invalid Example of use To specify 72 as the number of characters per line in the cross reference list file prime xrf describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c x lw72 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 361 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format 11 number of lines Interpretation when omitted II66 65535 characters in the case of console output Function
18. Iw CC78KO0 361 ns OC78K0 502 Iw LB78KO 520 nu OC78K0 504 Iw RA78K0O 401 nv CC78K0 367 nz CC78K0 370 M ma CC78K0 377 O Main window 141 o CC78K0 333 Map list 111 O0 LCNV78KO 546 mf CC78KO0 378 o LK78KO 432 o OC78K0 500 N o RA78KO0 388 ne LONV78K0 547 Object converter 481 ne LK78K0 450 Open with Program dialog box ne OC78K0 506 Option dialog box 2 ne RA78KO 411 General Build Debug category 292 ng CC78K0 343 Output an assemble list ng LK78KO 434 Output map information ng RA78KO 390 Output panel 265 nga RA78K0 392 Output symbol information nj LK78KO 433 nj RA78KO 389 P nka RA78K0O 396 p CC78K0 344 nkd LK78KO 441 p LK78KO 438 nkl LK78KO 445 p RA78K0 395 nkm LK78KO 439 Parameter file 380 424 481 495 538 nkp LK78KO 443 Path Edit dialog box 2 nks RA78KO 398 pick 532 nkx RA78KO 399 Preprocess list file nlf LB78K0 522 Progress Status dialog box nlf LK78KO 449 Project Tree panel nlf RA78KO 410 Property panel 158 no CC78KO0 333 Assemble Options tab 1 no LK78KO 432 Build Settings tab 232 no OC78K0 500 Category Information tab 2 no RA78KO0 388 Comm
19. Output hex file Output folder for hes file Hex file name Hex file format Device Build Method Yersion Select Hotes Others Build mode Yeg BuildhiodeName FrojectN amez hex Intel expanded hes formatl kie 3 Selects the build mode name to be used during build The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Context menu R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 158 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node file or category node and then select Property from the View menu or Property from the context menu Remark When either one of the Build tool node file or category node on the Project Tree panel while the Property panel is opened the detailed information of the selected node is displayed Description of each area 1 Selected node area Display the name of the selected node on the Project Tree panel When multiple nodes are selected this area is blank 2 Detailed information display change area In this area the detailed information on the Build tool node file or category node that is selected on the Project Tree panel is displayed by every category in the list And the settings of the information can be changed directly Mark E indicates that all the items in the category ar
20. Set the type of the file to be output as the product of the build Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select the file type on the Output file type property in the Output File Type and Path category Figure 2 18 Output file type Property Execute Module Load Module File uld ode ame 1 When Execute Module Load Module File is selected default A load module file is created The file set in the Output File category on the Link Options tab is the debug target 2 When Execute Module Hex File is selected A hex file is also created The file set in the Hex File category on the Object Convert Options tab is the debug target Caution For library projects this property is always Library and cannot be changed 2 4 1 Change the output file name The names of the load module file hex file and library file output by the build tool are set to the following names by default ProjectName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the project name Load module file name ProjectName Imf Hex file name ProjectName hex Library file name ProjectName lib The method to change these file names is shown below 1 When changing the load module file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Output file name property in the Output File
21. Specify the start address of the address area for filling to be performed as start address The range that can be specified for the value is OH to the largest address in program space other than SFR area It can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified If the start address is omitted it is assumed that 0 has been specified Specify the size of the address area for filling to be performed as size The range that can be specified for the value is 1H to the largest address in program space other than SFR area 1H It can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified When start address has been specified size cannot be omitted If start address nor size is specified the object converter performs processing assuming that the range of the internal ROM is specified If both the u and nu options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the no option is specified the u and nu option are invalid Two or more address ranges cannot be specified by using the u option Specification formats for start address and size by the u option and their interpretation are as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 504 of 570 Apr 01 2
22. a Button Duplicate Duplicates the selected build mode The Character String Inout dialog box opens and the build mode is duplicated with the name entered and added to the main project and all the subprojects in the currently open ing project When the build mode with mark does not exist in the main project or subproject and duplicate the build mode DefaultBuild is duplicated Up to 20 build modes can be added Delete Deletes the selected build mode Note that DefaultBuild cannot be deleted Rename Renames the selected build mode Rename the build mode with entered name in the opening the Character String Input dia log box Caution When duplicating or renaming the build mode the existing build mode name cannot be used Remarks 1 Up to 127 characters can be used as a build mode name When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip A build mode with the same name already exists The entered build mode name already exists More than 127 characters cannot be specified Build mode name is too long more than 128 charac ters The build mode name is invalid The following charac Invalid build mode name is entered The characters ters cannot be used lt gt lt gt cannot be used as the name is used for the folder name 2 Upto 20 build modes can be added When the input violates any restriction the following mes sages ar
23. sample Inf map sample map hex sample hex sym sample sym sx Startup ej main c Figure A 1 Main Window ESIE E gt RAL DD 91 Oy sacs Bai ey Property ie Code Generator PE Code Generator Preview Fes Device Pin List e Device Top View a CA78KO Property Build Mode Build mode E Output File Type andPath Output file type Intermediate file output folder E Frequently Used Options for Compie Perform optimization Additional include paths E System include paths Macro definition E Frequently Used Options for Assemble Additional include paths E System include paths Macro definition E Frequently Used Options for Link Using libraries Additional library paths Output folder Output file name E Frequently Used Options for Object Convert Output hex file Output folder for hex file Hex file name Hex file format Device Build Method V1 Atarniam C nlant DefaultBuild Execute Module Load Module File BuildModeN ame Yes Standard qx2 Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Using libraries 0 Additional library paths 0 BuildModeN ame ProjectN ame Im Yes BuildM odeN ame ProjectN ame hex Intel expanded hex format kie Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build Common Options Compile Options Assemble Options
24. vf Library file lib Object file rel 1 Text file txt 2 Subtolder level to search Function butors The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it on the Project Tree panel Description of each area 1 File type area Select the file types to add to the project You can select multiple types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected The file types displayed are shown below C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vfi R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 270 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function information file fin Nt Library file lib Object file rel Text file txt Note Only devices with a memory bank installed 2 Subfolder level to search area Directly enter the number of subfolder levels to add to the project The default number is 1 Remark Decimal numbers of up to 10 are allowed When the input violates any restriction the following mes sages are shown in the tooltip Fewer than 0 or more than 10 values cannot be More than 10 subfolder levels have been specified specified Specify
25. 3 3 2 Map list The map list outputs data on the location of segments To configure the map list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Link Options tab Select Yes on the Output with map list property in the Link List category exe Memory map 1 SPACE REGULAR MEMORY 2 ROM BASE ADDRESS 3 0000H SIZE 4 2000H 6 OUTPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 BASE 10 SIZE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS CODE 0000H 11 CSEG AT 11 CSEG 5 gap MEMORY RAM BASE ADDRESS 3 FEOOH SIZE 4 0200H 6 OUTPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 BASE 10 SIZE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS 5 gap FEOOH DATA FE20H 11 DSEG AT R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 111 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 5 Gap 5 gap Not Free Area Target chip 12 uPD78xxx Device File 13 Vx xx Item Description Format Number PE Memory space name Displays the memory space name CES Memory area name Displays the memory area name Memory area start address Displays the start address of the memory area It is displayed in hexadecimal format left padded with zeroes Memory area size Displays the size of the memory area It is displayed in hexadecimal format left padded with zeroes Output group Displays gap for areas where nothing is located Segment names output to Displa
26. 5 6 7 8 9 10 Debug Information Input File Output File Library Device Message Stack Link List Error List Others Caution This tab is not displayed for library projects Figure A 7 Property Panel Link Options Tab Property A CASE Property El El El El H E 4 Debug Informabon Add debug information Input File Output File Output folder Output fle name Force linking against error Library Using libraries System libraries Additional library paths System library paths Device Message Stack Link Lust Error List Others Add debug informabon Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g option y common 4 ZB UildModeN ame FrojectN ame Imf Ho Using libraries Q System libranes O Additional library paths O System library paths 0 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 205 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information Select whether to enable source level debugging by adding debug information to the module being generated This corresponds to the g option of the linker How to change Select from the d
27. 7 SPROCESSOR 8 F051144 9 SDEBUG 10 SNODEBUGA 11 SKANJICODE SJIS 12 STOL INF 13 SDGS line line line 14 main 17 SDGL R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 FIL NAM EXTRN IS L 4 15 2 15 3 4 O3FH 0330H 02H 020H OOH file 034H OFFFEH 03FH 067H 01H OOH _ RTARGO 16 define TRUE 1 16 define FALSE 0 16 define SIZE 200 CENESAS Page 93 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 14 push hl 21 INF 1 4 14 push ax 21 INF 1 4 14 push ax 21 INF 1 4 14 push ax 21 INF 1 4 18 bf_main 22 Code Information 1 23 FILE C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78K0 Vx xx smp78k0 CC78K0 p 24 SFUNC z 25 z 26 27 SCALL 27 CALL 27 SCALL 24 SFUNC 24 SFUNC 25 z 26 Target chi Device fil rime c main 8 bc void CODE SIZE 218 bytes printf 18 be pointer ax putchar 20 bce int ax printf 25 be pointer printf 31 bc pointer S 1 ax ax CODE SIZE 30 bytes putchar 41 be char c CODE SIZE 14 bytes p 19 uPD78F0511_44 e 20 VX XX Item Description Number orn System date Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format 1 1 CLOCK SIZE 678 clocks STACK SIZE 14 bytes int
28. Adjusted Function Lists dialog box select a function and then click the Adjust Size button R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 315 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Function Name Display the function name of the selected function Remarks 1 If the selected function is written in assembly language or it is a system library function then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe selected function is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name 3 Ifthe selected function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe selected function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name 2 Frame Size Display the frame size not including the stack size of callee functions in bytes of the selected function Remark Ifthe frame size is not known then a question mark 7 is displayed if it is over the maximum limit then SIZEOVER is displayed 3 Additional Margin Specify the value to forcibly add to the selected function in bytes either as a decimal number or as a hexadeci mal number starting with Ox or OX 4 Recursion Depth Specif
29. C gt ra78k0 fk0main pra 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the object converter is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78K0 Object Converter Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation b Execution end message If it detects no object conversion errors resulting from the object conversion the object converter outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the host operating system Target chip uPD78xxx Device file VxX xx Object Conversion Complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found If it detects an object conversion errors resulting from the object conversion the object converter outputs the number of errors and warnings to the display and returns control to the host operating system R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 496 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Target chip uPD78xxx Device file VxX xx Object Conversion Complete 3 error s and 0 warning s found If the object converter detects a fatal error during object conversion which makes it unable to continue object convert processing the object converter outputs a message to the display cancels object conversion and returns control to the host operating system Examples 1 A non existent load module file is specified C gt 0c78k0 sample lmf 78K0 Object Converter Vx xx
30. C OD D me o lt S C D CubeSuite V1 00 00 Integrated Development Environment User s Manual 78KO Build Target Device 78KO Microcontroller All information contained in these materials including products and product specifications represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corp without notice Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corp through various means including the Renesas Electronics Corp website http www renesas com Renesas Electronics www renesas com Rev 1 00 Apr 2011 8 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is granted he
31. CSEG 21 CODE CSEG CODE 18 CONVAH H E EXT 12 29 DATA DSEG DATA 14 HDTSA FE20H ADDR DATA 15 26 MAIN OH ADDR PUB CODE 11 19 SAMPM MOD 2 START OH R ADDR PUB CSEG 11 19 22 STASC FE21H ADDR DATA 16 31 Defined symbol name Displays the defined symbol name left aligned If the symbol name exceeds 16 characters that name is output as it is Items 2 4 5 6 7 and 8 are output from the next line Symbol value Displays a value with a symbol Outputs a right aligned hexadecimal number with zeros suppressed Relocation attributes Displays the relocation attributes R Relocatable symbol E External symbol Blank Absolute symbol Undefined symbol R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 107 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number Symbol attributes Displays the symbol attributes left aligned CSEG Code segment name DSEG Data segment name BSEG Bit segment name MAC Macro name MOD Module name SET Symbol defined by SET directive NUM NUMBER attribute symbol ADDR ADDRESS attribute symbol BIT BIT attribute symbol addr bit SABIT BIT attribute symbol saddr bit SFBIT BIT attribute symbol sfr bit RBIT BIT attribute symbol A bit X bit SFR Names defined as SFRs by EQU directive SFRP Names defined as SFRPs by EQU directive Blank External reference symbol declared by EX
32. D aaa backup 5 boot 9 Default Flash 2 sample 4 DefaulkBuild sample ib i sample O samplez 3 src Project _2 Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Add File dialog box click the button in the File location area In Path Edit dialog box click button in the path edit area On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Intermediate file output folder in the Output File Type and Path category Output folder in the Frequently Used Options for Link category Output folder for hex file in the Frequently Used Options for Object Convert category and Temporary folder in the Others category From the Link Options tab Output folder in the Others category From the Object Convert Options tab Output folder for hex file in the Hex File category From the Create Library Options tab Output folder in the Output File category From the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab Output folder for function information file Output folder for replacement information file Output folder for object information file and Output folder for reference infor mation file in the Output File category R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 296 of 570 Apr 01 2011 Cu
33. Function information return Outputs the definition function s return value register and argument information value argument of definition register or stack position function Function information Outputs the size clock and maximum consumption stacks calculated statically for definition function s size the definition function clock stack The value for the total number of clocks is the cumulative value for the number of clocks displayed For this reason the number of clocks will differ from the actual measurement if there is a branch Function information call Outputs the function name and function call line number as decimal code function Information starting with 6CALL Function information Call Outputs return value register and argument information during function call function s return value register or stack position argument 3 1 2 Error list file An error list file contains messages regarding any errors and warnings that occurred during compilation The C source can be added to the error list by specifying a compile option An error list file that contains a C source can be used as aC source file by revising the C source and deleting comments such as the list header To configure the error list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Compile Options tab In the List File category set the Output error list fi
34. On the Project Tree panel select a file and then select Open with Selected Application from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the application to open the file is stored Program folder for Windows XP C Program Files is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown 3 File name area Specify the executable file name of the application to open the file 4 Files of type area Specify the executable file type of the application to open the file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 304 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Program exe Executable format default All Files All the formats Function buttons Button Function Opens the file with the specified application R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 305 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Stack Usage Tracer window This ts the first window to open when the stack usage tracer is launched Use this window to check or modify the amount of stack used on a per function basis Figure A 45 Stack Usage Tracer Window el sample Stack Usage Tracer E mfx 1 Be wiew Option Help 2 P main 9 H stabi E main 576 4 DsiprajtSTki sub Ch stabi 4 4 DsiprajtSTkh E TA m E subi Ds orajiSTE SL
35. Restriction Yes Automatic variables Assigns auto variables and norec arguments to and norec argument registers and assigns them also to the saddr qr area Yes Automatic and Assigns auto variables register variables and register variables and norec arguments to registers and assigns them norec argument qr2 also to the saddr area Does not specify assigning register variables to the saddr area R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 238 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Not use sign extended Select whether to perform char related calculations without pan integral extension calculation for char This corresponds to the qc option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qc Performs char related calculations without pan integral extension Note No Performs char related calculations with pan integral extension Interpret char to Select whether to interpret the char without qualifier as a unsigned char unsigned char This corresponds to the qu option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qu Interprets the char without qualifier as a unsigned char No Does not specify interpreting the char without qualifier as a unsigned char Optimize branch Select whether to optimize branch instructions instr
36. Select from the drop down list Restriction Output object using HL B instruction Yes Do not replace ql1 Yes Replace only process before after function ql2 Yes Replace load store and indirect referencing instruction and equivalent of ql2 ql3 Yes Replace whole instructions ql4 Yes subroutinize same codes use stack access libraries ql5 Does not replace the fixed code with the library Performs optimization with the module size precedence Replaces only the processing routines before and after the function with a library Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code with a library Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code in one instruction unit with a library Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code in one instruction unit with a library In addition common code is placed in subroutines and the library for the stack access is used Under the Memory Model category setting the Use static model property to Yes has the same effect as selecting Yes Replace whole instructions ql4 Does not specify replacing the fixed code with the library Performs optimization with the execution speed precedence Select whether to generate the co
37. Start build all Thureday April 2 010 3 13 01 FH Start buildtsample DefaultBuild YSrey Main c gt DefaultBuild sample luf gt DefaultBuild sample hex Build endedtError 0 Warning 0 Endedt Success 1 Projects Failed 0 Projects Thursday April 224 2010 3 13 03 Rapid Build A Build Tool R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 78 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 108 Build Execution Results Rapid Build YSEC1MaLH c gt DefaultBuild sample lmuf DefaultEuildi sample hex EOF Remarks 1 The text in the Rapid Build tab becomes dimmed 2 When a file name or line number can be obtained from the output messages if you double click on the message you can jump to the relevant line in the file 3 Ifyou press the F1 key when the cursor is on a line displaying the warning or error message you can display the help related to that line s message Files generated by the build tool appear on the Project Tree panel under the Build tool generated files node Figure 2 109 Build Tool Generated Files Project Tree FS Code Generator Design Tool A CASK Build Tool che FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Build tool generated files im Sample Inf map Sample rap 4 l het sample hex i SYM sample sym j c_ main c Remark Files displayed under the Build tool generated files node are as f
38. Table B 14 Extended Tektronix Header Field ltem Number of ASCII Description Characters The percent symbol specifies that the block is in extended tektronix format Block length 2 This is a 2 digit hexadecimal which indicates the number of characters in the block This number of characters does not include the start character and end of line Block type 1 6 Data block 3 Symbol block 8 Termination block Check sum 2 This is a 2 digit hexadecimal which indicates the remainder produced when the total value of the characters in the block except the start character the check sum and end of line is divided by 256 Note Character Values for Check Sum Evaluation R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 486 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE a e Data block The format for the data block is shown below Table B 15 Data Block Format for Extended Tektronix Field Number of ASCII Description Characters Header Standard header field Block type 6 Load address 2to17 Address from which the object code is loaded Number of characters is variable Object code 2n Number of bytes n displayed as a 2 digit hexadecimal Number of bytes n displayed as a 2 digit hexadecimal of bytes n displayed as a 2 digit hexadecimal Caution In extended Tektronix the number of characters in a specific field is variable within 2 to 17 1 to 16 characters of actual data The first charac
39. func rec2 i void func_rec2 int i EJ 4 func _ recl i 1 void funcl void Pane rect 2 void func2 4 void func rec2 2 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 312 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box This dialog box is used to display a list of functions for which the stack usage tracer could not obtain stack information functions for which information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions was changed intentionally and functions for which the stack usage tracer forcibly set an additional margin Figure A 46 Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Dialog Box Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Unknown Functions Adjusted Functions subl 1 4 4 sub 26 amp 4 System Library Functions The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Function buttons On the Stack Usage Tracer window select the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists from the Option menu Description of each area 1 Unknown Functions Display a list of Unknown functions functions for which the stack usage tracer could not obtain stack informa tion This area generally displays unknown functions in the following format function name total stack size frame s
40. however within the scope of the ANSI C specification because it does not define evaluation order with the exception of some operators According to the ANSI C standard this is not a problem ina properly written source The scope differs depending on the value of nas follows If nis omitted it is interpreted as n 1 When n 1 Changes the execution order in an expression When n 2 In addition to 1 changes the execution order in an expression and performs address calculation without a carry while assuming that the size of the array does not exceed 256 bytes when a char short unsigned short int or unsigned int array that is allocated to the saddr area is referenced with an unsigned char variable Adds an automatic variable to a register or the saddr area Performs optimization based on the precedence of code size and replaces the standard code pattern with a library If this type is not specified the code is optimized based on the precedence of speed The scope replacing with a library differs depending on the value of nas follows If nis omitted it is interpreted as n 1 When n 1 Nothing is replaced with the library When n 2 Replaces only function pre and post processing with the library When n 3 In addition to 2 replaces a long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code with the library When n 4 In addition to 3 replaces the constant code pattern in one instruction unit with the library
41. property is displayed When using a standard library which supports the multiplier and divider select Yes default when not using one select No Figure 2 37 Use standard library and Use multiplier and divider Property Lih Use standard library Yes Mot use multiply and divide instructor Mo Use multiplier and divider Using standard libraries R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 37 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 Set Assemble Options To set options for the assembler select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various assemble options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 38 Property Panel Assemble Options Tab Property A CATOKO Property El Debug Informaton Add debug information fes Local symbols info and assembler debugging into El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths U Sistem mclude paths System mclude pathe O Macro definition Macro detinition 0 El Output File Output common object fle for various devices Mo Output error list file No Assemble List Others Add debug informabon Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option comesponds to the g and ga options a Common 4 HA Link Opti Object Co Yariables A Memory Remark Often used option
42. series neem R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 227 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output function informa Select whether to output the function information file tion file This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Output folder for func Specify the folder for saving the function information file tion information file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is not displayed when No in the Output function information file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Specify the function information file name Function information file name Use the extension fin If the extension is omitted fin is automatically added The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project n
43. 2 digits A value is input subtracting in order from 0 which counts down the data from the code number to the code Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number Fixed at 00 3 Fixed at 0000 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 483 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ltem Description Number 4 Record type Fixed at 01 5 Check sum Fixed at FF b Intel extended hex file format Figure B 28 Intel Extended Format Start address record Extended address record Data record Note End record Note The extended address record and the data record are repeated here Extended address record ltem Description Number 1 Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number Fixed at 02 Fixed at 0000 Paragraph value of the segment The paragraph value of the segment is shown as a 4 digit hexadecimal Check sum 2 digits A value is input subtracting in order from 0 which counts down the data from the code number to the higher 8 bit value of the address 4 Record type Fixed at 02 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 484 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Data record Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number 2 digits Number of bytes in the code stored in the record A maximum of 16 bytes can be stored Location address offse
44. ADDR ADDRESS attribute symbol BIT BIT attribute symbol addr bit SABIT BIT attribute symbol saddr bit SFBIT BIT attribute symbol sfr bit RBIT BIT attribute symbol A bit X bit PSW bit SFR Names defined as SFRs by EQU directive SFRP Names defined as SFRPs by EQU directive Blank External reference symbol declared by EXTRN or EXTBIT Undefined symbol Symbol reference format Displays the symbol reference format left aligned EXT External reference symbol declared by EXTRN SADDR attribute EXTB External reference symbol declared by EXTBIT saddr bit PUB External reference symbol declared by PUBLIC Blank Local symbol segment name macro name module name Undefined symbol Defined symbol name Displays the defined symbol name left aligned R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 106 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 2 4 Cross reference list A cross reference list outputs data indicating where on what line symbols are defined in a source To configure the cross reference list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Assemble Options tab Select Yes kx on the Output with cross reference list property in the Assemble List category Cross Reference List 1 NAME 2 VALUE 3 R 4 ATTR 5 RTYP 6 SEGNAME 7 XREFS CSEG CSEG
45. CENESAS Page 124 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number File name code size Outputs the file name and code size allocated to the bunk area A file to which is appended the end of the file name is one for which the relocation destination is specified in the Property panel Total code size Outputs the total code size of the files to be relocated to the bank area Vacant area size Outputs the size of the vacant area in the bank area The code size output to the replacement information file does not include libraries and the like For this reason the vacant area may be less than the size of the bunk area minus the code size If the size of the vacant area is negative it indicates that the amount of the area is lacking Information after relocation Outputs the information after relocation start Outputs information at the area level 14 Total code size Outputs the total code size of the files that could not be relocated 3 8 3 Object information file The object information file is an auxiliary information file with details about object files and library files To configure the object information file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab Select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output Fil
46. File location area is up to 259 both for the path name and file name together When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip in the File name area The file name including the path is too long Make it The file name with the path is more than 259 characters within 259 characters The specified path contains a folder that does not exist The path includes the folder that does not exist The file name or path name is invalid The following The file name with the invalid path is designated The charac characters cannot be used lt gt ters lt gt cannot be used for the file name and folder name Function buttons Creates the file with the entered file name adds it to the project and opens with the Editor panel Then closes this dialog box Does not create a file and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 269 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project The folder is added as a category Figure A 26 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm Link directive file dr dir Variable information file
47. Iw Description format w number of characters Interpretation when omitted lw132 80 characters in the case of display output Function The Iw option specifies the number of characters per line in a list file Application Use the Iw option to change the number of characters per line in any type of list file Description The range of number of characters that can be specified with the Ilw option is 72 to 2046 80 characters in the case of display output An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified If the number of characters is omitted it is assumed that 132 has been specified However when an assemble list file is output to display it is assumed that 80 has been specified The specified number of characters does not include the terminator CR LF If the np option is specified the lw option is invalid Cautions A control instruction WIDTH with the same function as the Iw option can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASAWIDTH R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 401 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To specify 80 as the number of characters per line in an assemble list file KOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm 1w80 The contents of the assemble l
48. Numerical value This is the value corresponding to a symbol Number of characters is variable d Motorola S type format Change generated hex files have three types of records and consist of five records The overall structure of the file is shown in the figure below Figure B 29 Motorola S type Format l Types of records are shown below Table B 21 Record Types for Motorola Hex File Data record S2 Standard 24 bits S3 32 bits End record S8 Standard 24 bits S7 32 bits Motorola hex format files are divided into standard 24 bit addresses and 32 bit addresses Standard addresses are composed of records S0 S2 and S8 The 32 bit addresses are composed of records S0 S3 and S7 Header record SO is optional and is not output A CR character is placed at the end of each S record The general formats and their meanings for each field in each record are shown below R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 490 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Table B 22 General Format for Each Record SexXWWNWWWDD DDZZ SSXXWWWWWWWWDDB DDZZ Table B 23 Meanings of Fields Length of data record Number of bytes in the address hexadecimal data and check sum File name ASCII code for the input file name expressed as a hexadecimal WWWWWW WW 24th 32th bit address Hexadecimal data 1 byte of data expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal Check sum The l
49. ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the compiler The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Macro definition Specify the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The def part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified 4 Frequently Used Options for Assemble The detailed information on frequently used options for assembling are displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specify t
50. Property Panel Compile Options Tab Property A CASE Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information Yes 4dd to both assembly and abject filelf g El Optimization Perform optimization fes Standard qxe Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Sistem mclude paths System include paths U Macro definition Macro detinition 0 Macro undefinitian Macro undetinitian 0 Startup Use standard startup routine fes Norrmall Use fisted area used by standard library Yeg O H AAH A Library Use standard library Tes Not use multiply and divide instruction Na Use standard 70 library supported floating point data Mo Use multiple and divider Yez Using standard libraries Using standard libranes 3 Message Extension Memory Model OutputFie Assembly File Function Information Fie V anables Information Fie Data Control List File Others Add debug informabon Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the q option H HAAA A A Yariables 4 Memory R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 174 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information Select whether to enable source level debugging by adding debug info
51. R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 323 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the C compiler When specifying two or more compile options separate the options with a blank space Specify the suboption or file name after a compile option without inserting a blank such as aspace Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the compile options See B 1 4 Option for details about compile options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks C source file name File name of source to be compiled Enclose the file name of a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks M Example To output the assembler source file prime asm and perform optimization based on the precedence of code size describe as cc78k0 cF051144 prime c aprime asm qx3 b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the C compiler will not fit on the command line or when the same compile option is specified repeatedly each time compilation is performed To start up the assembler from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the C compiler from a parameter file as follows X gt cc78k0 ACsource file name A fparameter file name Parameter file specification option parameter file name A file which
52. Symbol list 106 APPENDIX C INDEX System Include Path Order dialog box 278 T t CC78K0 369 t LB78K0 523 t LK78K0 455 t RA78KO 414 Tag jump 266 Text Edit dialog box U u CC78K0 348 u OC78K0 504 V v CC78K0 367 vo VF78K0 559 vs VF78K0 560 vx VF78KO 561 W w CC78K0 366 w LK78K0 459 X x CC78KO 359 Y y CC78KO0 373 y LK78KO 457 y OC78K0 509 y RA78KO 417 Z z CC78K0 370 zb LK78KO 460 ze RA78KO0 416 zf OC78KO 511 zn RA78KO 416 zs RA78KO 416 CENESAS 274 Page 566 of 570 Revision Record Description Rev Apr 01 2011 First Edition issued CubeSuite V1 00 00 User s Manual 78KO Build Publication Date Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation CENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 1101 Nicholson Road Newmarket Ontario LY 9C3 Canada Tel 1 905 898 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628 585 100 Fax 44 1
53. To output a help message on the display describe as C gt ra78k0 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 422 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 78KO Assembler Vx xx Copyright C usage The option is as follows CX o file no e file ne p file np ka nka ks nks kx nkx lw width 11 length lf nlt 1t n lhstring g ng 70 idirectory directory ra78k0 Select Create Create Create Output Output Output Expand TAB character for print file n 1 to 8 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE XxX _ XXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Renesas Electronics Corporation option input file option means omissible target chip x 012 014 etc Must be specified the object module file with the specified name Not the error list file with the specified name Not the print file with the specified name Not the assemble list to print file Not the symbol table list to print file Not the cross reference list to print file Not Specify print file columns per line Specify print file lines per page Add Form Feed at end of print file Not Not expand n 0 Print list header with the specified string Output debug information to object file Not Create object file if fatal error occurred Not Set include search path tdirectory Set temporary directory ydirectory Set device file search pat
54. Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number 1 Name of module in which Displays the name of the input object module in which public symbols are defined public symbols are defined 2 Symbol attributes Displays the symbol attributes CSEG Code segment name DSEG Data segment name BSEG Bit segment name MAC Macro name MOD Module name SET Symbol defined by SET directive NUM NUMBER attribute symbol ADDR ADDRESS attribute symbol BIT BIT attribute symbol addr bit SABIT BIT attribute symbol saddr bit SFBIT BIT attribute symbol sfr bit RBIT BIT attribute symbol A bit X bit PSW bit SFR Names defined as SFRs by EQU directive SFRP Names defined as SFRPs by EQU directive Blank External reference symbol declared by EXTRN or EXTBIT Undefined symbol Symbol value Displays the public symbol values Public symbol name Displays the public symbol names 3 3 4 Local symbol list A local symbol list outputs data on local symbols defined in an input module To configure the local symbol list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Link Options tab Select Yes kl on the Output with local symbol list property in the Link List category Local symbol list 1 MODULE 2 ATTR 3 VALUE 4 NAME R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 1
55. When adding a variables information file to the project if a variables information file has already been added then only the latest variables information file to be added is targeted by a build any such files added prior to this one will not be targeted When setting a variables information file that is not targeted by a build as a build target if other variables information files have also been added then the file will be targeted by the build and the others will not be targeted R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 49 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 2 Display ROM RAM usage You can use the variables information file generator to display the ROM RAM usage after the linking to the Output panel Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Variables Relocation Options tab on the Property panel To display the ROM RAM usage select Yes on the Output ROM RAM usage property in the ROM RAM Amount Information category No is selected by default Figure 2 58 Output ROM RAM usage Property When you run a build the ROM RAM usage is output to the Output pane following the build results First the total amount uses is output followed by the usage for each memory area Figure 2 59 ROM RAM Usage Display Start build all Tuesday April 7 010 7 48 55 PH Start build sample DeftaultBuild gt sre main c gt DefaultBuild sample luf DefaultBuild sample h
56. along the vertical axis and options along the horizontal axis are specified at the same time Table B 10 Precedence of Link Options Location marked with NG If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example The km option is invalid C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel np km Location marked with A If all three of the options in the horizontal axis are specified at the same time the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example Ifthe nkm nkp and nkl options are specified at the same time the p option is invalid C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel p nkm nkp nkl Blank area If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is valid R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 430 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE As with the o no options if two options for which n can be added to the beginning of the option name are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example The no option is specified after the o option so the o option is invalid and the no option is valid C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel o no Options not described in Table B 10 Precedence of Link Options are not particularly affected by other options However if the help specification option is specified all of other option specifications become invalid R20UT0555EJ010
57. be SS 4 bnz L0004 END Code Information SFILE C um prime c SFUNC main 8 be void CODE SIZE SCALL printf 18 bc pointer ax SCALL putchar 20 bec int ax SCALE printf 25 bc pointer ax FUNC printf 31 bc pointer s CODE SIZE 30 byte SFUNC printf 41 be charc X CODE SIZE 14 byte Target chip Device file VX xXXK 1 1 218 bytes ax S S uPD78F0511_ 44 a L INF 2 8 9 1 gt INF 2 8 9 zal gt INF 2 8 9 INF 1 2 7a gt INF 2 8 9 20 INF 3 6 INF 2 4 INF 2 6 INF 2 6 CLOCK SIZE 723 clocks int sp 2 int sp 2 int i sp 2 CLOCK SIZE 124 clocks CLOCK SIZE 60 clocks STACK SIZE STACK SIZE 14 bytes STACK SIZE 8 bytes 6 bytes R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 354 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error list file creation specification The error list file creation specification options are as follows S Description format e output file name Interpretation when omitted No error list file is output Function The e option specifies the output of an error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application U
58. d Figure 2 64 Output File Category El Output File Use memory bank relocation support tool Tes Output function information file Tes Ww Output folder for function information file ZB UildModeN armies ro alls d AUE e E Output folder for replacement information file uilldhiodeN ames Replacement information fle name Project ame _ replace tet Output folder for object information file Buld odeN amez Object information file name 2Projecth ame objinto bet Output folder for reference information file ZB uildModeN amex Reference information file name 2Projecth ame retinto bat Set the output folder and output file name for each file on the Output folder for replacement information file Replacement information file name Output folder for object information file Object information file name Output folder for reference information file and Reference information file name properties Remark Select No on the Output function information file property to output the auxiliary information files only Set the margin of the relocation destination Set the margin for the common area or bank area to which the function information file will be relocated when it is generated Set the margin in the Margin category Figure 2 65 Margin Category Margin for common area Margin for bank 00 area Margin for bank OT area Margin for bank area Margin for bank 03 area Margin for bank area Margin for bank 05 area
59. the fol lowing messages are shown in the tooltip More than maximum number of restriction in the prop The characters exceeds the maximum number of erty that called this dialog box characters cannot be restriction in the property that called this dialog box specified The current number of characters is dis played between brackets at the beginning of the line in excess of the limit Function buttons OK Reflects the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closed the dialog box Does not reflect the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closed the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 275 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Path Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to edit or add the path Figure A 29 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line Browse Subfolders are automatically included The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile cat egory Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category and Additional library paths in t
60. 00 CENESAS Page 417 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To specify the path for the device file as folder C 78kO dev describe as C gt ra78kO kOmain asm cF051144 yC 78k0 dev To specify the path for the device file as folder D device files describe as C gt ra78k0 kOmain asm cF051144 y D device files R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 418 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Symbol definition specification The symbol definition specification option is as follows q Description format Interpretation when omitted None Function The d option defines symbols Application Use the d option to define symbols Description The value given to a symbol is binary octal decimal or hexadecimal If the value is omitted it is assumed that 1 has been specified Up to 30 symbols can be specified by using a comma as a delimiter Up to 31 characters can be described for a symbol name If duplicate names are specified the symbol specified last is valid Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are distinguished for symbol names Symbols defined with d are used instead of EQU SET RESET An abort error occurs if a symbol name specified for d was also defined in the source Example of use To specify 2 as the symbol definition describe as C g
61. 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number 14 Total size of segments at Outputs the total size of the segments to which the files is to be relocated relocation destination 3 8 4 Reference information file The reference information file is an auxiliary information file with details about C source files and assembler source files Unlike other auxiliary information files changing the allocation destination will not change the information in this file To configure the reference information file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category Specify the output destination in the Output folder for reference information file property and the Reference information file name property Itis also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node xxxx x Global Symbol Reference Table 1 FILE 2 GLOBAL 3 REFERED 4 REFERED NAME FUNCTION COUNT COUNT FROM FROM OUTSIDE INSIDE file1000_3 c _file1000 3 asm2 asm _bankO_ 1 asm3 asm _common2 _bank1_1 _bank2_1 Item Description Format Number Cac Global function name Outputs the name of the global function defined in the file external symbol name Reference from different file Outputs the number of reference
62. 1 or 2 is specified if the temporary file cannot be created in the specified path an abort error occurs Example of use To output a temporary file to folder C tmp describe as C gt ra78k0O cF051144 kOmain asm tC tmp R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 414 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To output a temporary file to folder D temporary files describe as R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 415 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Kanji code 2 byte code specification The kanji code 2 byte code specification options are as follows zs ze zn ZS ze Zn Description format Z5 Ze zn Interpretation when omitted ZS Function Kanji 2 byte character described in the comment is interpreted as the specified kanji code 2 byte code Kanji code is interpreted as follows depending on the option ZS Shift JIS code ze EUC code zn Not interpreted as kanji Application Use these options to specify the interpretation of the kanji code in the comment line Description If the zs ze and zn options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid A control instruction KANJICODE with the same function as the zs ze and zn option can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASAKANJICODEAS
63. 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 99 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number 1 Version number Displayed in x yz format CENE System date Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format CEN Number of pages Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Command line Outputs the command line contents following CC78K0 Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character C source file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted c is attached as the file type extension Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line Preprocess list file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted ppl is attached Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed C source This is the input C source Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 9 on the next line Target device for this compiler Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file Displays the version number of the input device file Parameter file contents Outputs the parameter file contents Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning a
64. 10 Function buttons Displays the designated location at the top of the target panel display and moves the caret there Note that this button is enabled when the project that the opened file is registered is the active project and other than library project Cancel Cancels the criteria and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 288 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to show how the process has been progressed when the time consuming process is taken place This dialog box automatically closes when the process in progress Is done Figure A 36 Progress Status Dialog Box Progress Status Loading project Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open This dialog box automatically opens when a message is output while the time consuming process is in progress Description of each area 1 Message display area Display the message output while process is in progress edit not allowed 2 Progress bar The progress bar shows the current progress of the process in progress with the bar length When the process is 100 done the bar gets to the right end this dialog box automatically closed Function buttons Cancel Cancels the process in pro
65. 1122334455667 78899aah as the specification in the above assembler source file describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel gil12233445566778899aah R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 463 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE User option byte specification The user option byte specification option is as follows Z gb gb Description format gbuser option byte value Interpretation when omitted When the device has the user option byte function the initial value in the device file is set When the device does not have the user option byte function nothing is performed Function The gb option specifies the value set for the user option byte Application Use the gb option to specify the user option byte value Description The range that can be specified for the user option byte is 0 to OFFFFFFFFFFH An abort error occurs if a value that cannot be specified for the user option byte is specified Specify a hexadecimal value that ends with H An abort error occurs if any other value is omitted The user option byte is specified at addresses 80H to 84H Specify a security ID within 5 bytes If the specified value is less than 5 bytes the higher bits are filled with 0 The user option byte value to be allocated at addresses 80H to 84H can also be specified by defining the segment with relocation attributes shown below in the assembler source
66. 13 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 14 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 15 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 16 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area CENESAS Page 187 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use static model Specify the extension method when the static model is used extended extension This corresponds to the zm option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Use static model property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Only use common area for Uses only the common area for args and auto vars zm1 arguments and auto variables Yes Only use saddr area for args Uses only the saddr area for and auto vars zm2 arguments and auto variables Does not use the static model extension Output objects for flash Select whether to output the object for flash This corresponds to the zf option of the compiler e toa i Specify whether to automatically add a pascal function attribute __ pascal Add pascal function attribute to functions This corresponds to the zr option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Use static model property is selected Select whether to use a library for the prologue epilogue routines of a function Use prologue epilogue library This corresponds to th
67. 2 94 Format of build option list Property O Others emporary tolder Commands executed before build processing Commands executed before build processing 0 Commands executed after build processing Commands executed after build processing 0 FileName FileName Program Options is set by default FileName Program and Options are embedded macros They are replaced to the file name being built program name under execution and command line option under build execution 2 15 4 Change the file build target project When running a build that targets a specific project main project or subproject you must set that project as the active project To set the active project select the main project or subproject to be set as the active project on the project tree and select Set selected subproject as Active Project from the context menu R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 71 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 95 Set selected project as Active Project Item Be ay sub i Subproject ME wPD7aroses E Build sample A Pin Configura f Rebuild sample a Code Genera A CAFSKO Buil cs FEKO Simulate Open Folder with Explorer ey Program Ona Ei File a Clean sample Add 4 fn Set sub as Active Project pd Remove From Project Shift Del ale Rename IE When a project is set as the active project that project is underline
68. 4 bytes common area sm4 Yes 5 bytes common area sm5 Yes 6 bytes common area sm6 Yes 7 bytes common area sm7 Yes 8 bytes common area sm8 Yes 9 bytes common area sm9 Yes 10 bytes common area sm10 Yes 11 bytes common area sm11 Yes 12 bytes common area sm12 Yes 13 bytes common area sm13 Yes 14 bytes common area sm14 Yes 15 bytes common area sm15 Yes 16 bytes common area sm16 rCENESAS Specify the number of bytes in the common area when the static model is used When the static model is not used select No in the Use static model property in the Memory Model category from the Compile Options tab Specifies 0 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 1 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 2 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 3 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 4 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 5 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 6 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 7 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 8 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 9 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 10 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 11 bytes as the number of bytes in the common
69. 454 f OC78KO0 507 f RA78KO 413 File dependencies 26 File display order 25 File Save Settings dialog box 280 G g CC78KO0 343 g LK78KO 434 g RA78K0 390 ga RA78KO 392 gb LK78K0 464 General Build Debug category 292 gi LK78KO 462 go LK78KO 461 Go to the Location dialog box 288 help 535 i i CC78K0 349 i LK78K0 452 i RA78K0 393 INC78KO 349 Include file 133 J j LK78KO 433 j RA78KO 389 K k CC78KO 345 ka RA78KO 396 kd LK78KO 441 ki OC78KO 508 kie OC78K0 508 kI LK78KO 445 km LK78KO0 439 km OC78K0 508 kme OC78K0 508 kp LK78KO 443 ks RA78KO 398 kt OC78KO 508 kx RA78KO 399 L LCNV78KO 545 If CC78KO 364 If LB78K0 522 If LK78KO 449 If RA78KO0 410 Ih RA78KO 405 li CC78K0 365 Librarian 514 Link Order dialog box 282 Linker 424 list 533 List converter 537 II CC78KO 362 II LB78K0 521 ll LK78KO 447 ll RA78KO 403 Load module file 425 481 538 Local symbol list 113 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 564 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX C INDEX It CC78K0 363 nr OC78KO0 503 It RA78KO 408 ns LK78KO 435
70. 5 4 Assemble List 5 Others Figure A 20 Property Panel Individual Assemble Options Tab Property asm main asm Property El Debugintormaton Add debug information fes Local symbols info and assembler debugging into El Preproces Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool es Macro definition Macro detinition 0 Output File Assemble List Others Add debug informabon Add debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the q and qa options Build Settings N File Information R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 254 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information Select whether to enable source level debugging by adding debug information to the module being generated This corresponds to the g and ga options of the assembler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Assembler Adds debug information assembler debugging debugging info symbol information to the object module file being ng ga generated Yes Local symbols Adds debug information local symbol and assembler info and assembler debugging symbol
71. 526 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 5 5 Subcommands 1 Types The subcommands are detailed instructions for the operation of the librarian The types and explanations for subcommands are shown below Table B 27 Subcommands ao e peee e e peere e eerren o 1 orenen w o eee 2 General format of subcommand files subcommand Aoption Alibrary file name Aoption transaction Aoption The library file name specified immediately before can be replaced with transaction Aobject module file name ADlibrary file name A Amodule name A Remark Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the suobcommands and options R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 527 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format createAlibrary file name Atransaction cAlibrary file name Atransaction abbreviated form Function The create subcommand creates a new library file Description The size of the created library file is O When a transaction is specified a module is registered while the library file is created library file name If a specified file already exists it will be overwritten transaction An object module file carrying the same public symbol as the public symbol in the library file cannot be registered A module with the same name as a module in the
72. C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation b Execution end message If it detects no assembly errors resulting from the assembly the assembler outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the host operating system PASS1 Start PASS2 Start Target chip uPD 8xxx Device file VxX xx Assembly complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 382 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If it detects an assembly errors resulting from the assembly the assembler outputs the number of errors and warnings to the display and returns control to the host operating system PASS1 Start kOmain asm 12 RA78KO error E2201 Syntax error PASS2 Start kOmain asm 12 RA78KO error E2201 Syntax error kOmain asm 29 RA78KO error E2407 Undefined symbol reference CONVAH kOmain asm 29 RA78KO error E2303 Illegal expression Target chip uPD78xxx Device file VxX xx Assembly complete 3 error s and 0 warning s found If the assembler detects a fatal error during assembly which makes it unable to continue assembly processing the assembler outputs a message to the display cancels assembly and returns control to the host operating system Examples 1 A non existent source file is specified C gt ra78k0 sample asm 78KO Assembler Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electroni
73. CENESAS Adds debug information assembler debugging symbol information to the object module file being generated Adds debug information local symbol and assembler debugging symbol information to the object module file being generated Does not add debug information to the object module file being generated Page 198 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Preprocess The detailed information on the preprocess are displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during assembling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder When this option is omitted only the standard folder of the assembler is searched The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty
74. CENESAS Page 147 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c d e f 9 h Select the file you want to remove from the project Then select Remove from Project from the context menu Move files You can move files by the following procedure The file are moved under the File node Drag the file you want to move and then drop it in the destination Remarks 1 Individual option is retained when the file is dropped in the main project or subproject 2 The file is copied not moved when the file is dropped between the different project or in the main project or subproject in same project Note that this operation does not retain the individual option set in each file Add categories You can add the category node by one of the following procedure The category node are added under the File node Select Add New Category from the Project menu Select Add New Category from the context menu of either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node Remarks 1 The default category name is New category 2 The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node Move categories You can move the category node by the following procedure The category node are moved under the File node Drag the category node you want to move and then drop it in the destination Remarks 1 Individual option set in the file in the category node is retain
75. Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Select All Selects all the messages displayed on this panel Clear Deletes all the messages displayed on this panel Tag Jump Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the message file line and column Help for Message Shows the help with regard to the message at the current caret Note that the help is only for warning error messages R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 267 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Figure A 25 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type Hea eA inc Assemble file asrr Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vt Function information file fir Text file txt Empty C source file Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add New File On the Project Tree panel select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or category node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu Description of each area 1 File type area Select file types to create The description is shown at the lower box when a file type is selected File types to be shown are as foll
76. Extended Tektronix about this format The symbols contained in a program are transferred as a symbol block Each symbol block includes a section name and a list of the symbols that belong to that section If necessary a scalar can also be included in any section Symbols in the same section can be placed in one or more blocks The formats for the section definition field and the symbol definition field in the symbol block are shown below Table B 19 Symbol Block Section Definition Fields for Extended Tektronix Field Number of ASCII Description Characters rr a O specifies that the field is a section definition field Base address 2 to 17 This is a section start address Number of characters is variable Length 2 to 17 Indicates the section length Number of characters is variable and is calculated by the following 1 higher address base address R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 489 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Table B 20 Symbol Block Symbol Definition Fields for Extended Tektronix Field Number of ASCII Description Characters Type 1 Displays 1 digit hexadecimal indicating global local symbol specification and type of value 1 Global address 2 Global scalar 3 Global code address 4 Global data address 5 Local address 6 Local scalar 7 Local code address 8 Local data address Symbol 2 to 17 Indicates the symbol length This is variable
77. Fin Configurator Design Tool A CAFSKO Build Tool ces FAKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Caution A build target file added directly below the Startup node on the project tree is treated as the startup file It is not treated as a startup file if it is added to the category below the Startup node When adding a startup file to the Startup node if a startup file has already been added then only the latest startup file to be added is targeted by a build any such files added prior to this one will not be targeted When setting a startup file that is not targeted by a build as a build target if other startup files have also been added then the file will be targeted by the build and the others will not be targeted Remark See CubeSuite 78K0 Coding for the method of creating the startup routine R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 18 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 2 Add a file to a project Files can be added to a project by the following methods Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file 1 Adding an existing file a Add individual files Drag a folder from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty space below the project tree The file is added below the File node Figure 2 6 Project Tree Panel File Drop Location Project Tree A CAFSKO Build Tool es FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ab Program Analyzer Analyze Too
78. If both the r and nr options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the no option is specified the r and nr option are invalid Example of use To sort hex format objects in order of address describe as C gt oc78k0 k0 hex r R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 503 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Object filling value specification The object filling value specification options are as follows u nu u nu Description format ufilling value start address size nu Interpretation when omitted UOFFH filled with OFFH Function The u option outputs a specified filling value as an object code for an address area to which no hex format object has been output The nu option disables the u option Application Address areas to which no hex format object has been output may become written with unnecessary code When such addresses are accessed by the program for any reason their action may be unpredictable By specifying the u option write code in advance to address areas to which no hex format object has been output Description The range that can be specified for the filling value is OH to OFFH It can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified
79. Page 3 CODE 0000H 00000002H CSEG AT CODE SAMPM 0000H 00000002H gap 0002H 0000007EH CSEG 0080H 00000046H CSEG CSEG SAMPM 0080H 0000002AH CSEG SAMPS 0093H 0000001CH gap 0 0ADH OOOOFF3AH MEMORY LRAM BASE ADDRESS FACOH SIZE 0020H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SIZE R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2CENESAS Page 448 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If nlf Description format nlf Interpretation when omitted nlf Function The lf option inserts a form feed FF code at the end of a link list file The nlf option disables the lf option Application Use the If option to insert a form feed code if you wish to add a page break after the contents of a link list file are printed Description If the np option is specified the If option is invalid If both the If and nlf options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To insert a form feed code at the end of a link list file kO map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel pk0O map 1f R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 449 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error list file output specification The error list file output specification options are as follows e ne e ne Description format e file name ne Interpretation when omitted ne Function Th
80. Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use standard library Select whether to link the standard library during linking However when any C source file is added to the project the library is not linked Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Links the standard library during linking Does not link the standard library during linking Select whether to use the standard library which does not use multiply and divide instructions Not use multiply and divide instructions This property is not displayed when No in the Use standard library property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the standard library which does not use multiply and divide instructions No Does not use the standard library which does not use multiply and divide instructions Use standard 1 O library supported floating point data Select whether to use sprintf sscanf printf vprintf and vsprintf which support the input and output of floating point data This property is not displayed when No in the Use standard library property is selected If Yes is selected in the Use static model property in the Memory Model category Yes is selected in the Add pascal function attribute to functions property then this property will behave as if No were selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the standard library which s
81. View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Compile Options tab You can set the various compile options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 2 Property Panel Compile Option Tab Property A CAFOKO Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information fes 4dd to both assembly and abject filelf g El Optimization Perform optimization Yes Standard qee Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths O Sistem mclude paths System include paths O Macro definition Macro detinition 0 Macro undefinitiar Macro undetinitian 0 Startup Use standard startup routine fes Norrall Use fixed area used by standard library Yeg O H AAH A Library Use standard library Tes Not use multiply and divide instructor Na Use standard 0 library supported floating point data Mo Use multiple and divider Yez Using standard libraries Using standard libranes 3 Message Extension Memory Model OutputFie Assembly File Function Information Fie Yanables Information Fie Data Control List File Others Add debug informabon Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the q option HAHAHA A Memory 7 ka R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 326 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 1 4 Option 1 Types The compile options are detailed instructions for the op
82. a list of variables to be refer enced B 7 2 Functions 1 Generating the variables information file The variables functions information file generator counts the number of references when resolving relocations of variables and outputs a file with information to allocate them efficiently This information file can be used to reduce code by specifying the optimum allocation to the saddr area by the C compiler 2 ROM RAM usage display The variables functions information file generator displays the ROM RAM usage after the linking to the standard output B 7 3 Variables functions information 1 Areas a saddr area The 78KO has areas that can be addressed with a type of 8 bit addressing called saddr addressing short direct addressing saddr addressing targets the 256 bytes starting at FE20H Note allocating user variables here however because this area also contains general registers and ports The saddr area targeted by the variables informa tion file generator for alignment is thus 192 bytes FE20H to FEDFH b CALLT table area The area from 0040H to 007FH can be registered as a branch destination of the 32 addresses R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 551 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 37 Memory Map SFR General registers FEDFH ar FE20H an 2nd SFR 0000H 2 Variable information a Reference counting The variables functions informati
83. allowed Using compiler package version Select the version of the compiler package to be used This setting is common to all the build modes If you have selected a compiler package that has not been installed e g if you open a project created in another execution environment then that version is also displayed If the options change depending on the compiler package then the display of the build tool s properties will change according to the selected version Default Always latest version which was installed How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Always latest version Uses the latest version in the installed compiler which was installed packages Versions of the Uses the selected version in the compiler package installed compiler packages Latest compiler package Display the version of the compiler package to be used when Always latest version which was version which was installed is selected in the Using compiler package version property installed This setting is common to all the build modes This property is displayed only when Always latest version which was installed in the Using compiler package version property is selected Default The latest version of the installed compiler packages How to change Changes not allowed 10 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add memos to the build tool Add one item in one l
84. and input file names can only be input from the command line Function The f option inputs options and input file names from a specified file Application Use the f option when the information required to start up the assembler will not fit on the command line When specifying options repeatedly every time you perform assembly describe the options in the parameter file and specify the f option Description An abort error occurs if the file name is omitted Nesting of parameter files is not permitted An abort error occurs if the f option is specified within a parameter file The number of characters that can be described within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space a tab or the line feed code LF Options and input file names within a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last takes precedence The characters following or are all assumed to be comments up to the line feed code LF or EOF An abort error occurs if the f option is specified two or more times Example of use Perform assembly using a parameter file Set the contents of the parameter file kOmain pra as follows parameter file kOmain asm osample rel g cF051144 psample prn Enter the following from the command line C gt ra78k0O fkOmain pra R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev
85. and the assembler are executed twice by one build processing The order 1 Compiler CA r 8K01 2 Assemble AA rak 3 Yariables information file generator F 78k 4 Compile 04 8k0 ma K Assemble AA ek 0 6 Linkerl LE Fok O T Object converte O00 78 0 Common 4 Compile Assemble Link Opti 4 Object Co A Description of each category 1 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output variables infor Select whether to output the variables information file mation file Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the variables information file No Does not output the variables information file The variables information file will be removed from the rapid build target R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 224 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for vari Specify the folder for saving the variables information file ables information file This corresponds to the vo option of the variables information file generator If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macr
86. as a 4 digit decimal number no zero suppression G Error message Outputs error messages R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 114 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 4 Object Converter The object converter outputs the following list Output List File Name Output List Name To configure the error list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Object Convert Options tab Select Yes e on the Output error list file property in the Error List category The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node Remark See B 4 1 O files for details about input and output files of the object converter 3 4 1 Error list Error messages output when the object converter is started up are stored in an error list The output format is same as error list output by the linker R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 115 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 5 Librarian The librarian outputs the following list Output List File Name Output List Name List file Library information output list To configure the list file output in CubeSuite on t
87. as comments Specification of compile options When using CA78KO note the following points When several specifications have been made for an option that does not allow multiple specifications the last specification takes precedence The type specification following the c option must not be omitted If it is omitted an abort error will occur If the c option is not specified be sure to enter pragma pc type in the C source module file instead During compilation if the specified option is different from the option in the C source the specified option takes precedence A warning message is output at that time If the help option has been specified all other options are ignored 3 Source file names The part except the source file name extension primary name is used as the module name by default Therefore some restrictions apply to the source file names that can be used Regarding the length of the file name configure the file name with a primary name and extension within the range allowed by the host OS and separate the primary name and the extension with a dot The characters that can be used for the primary name and the extension consist of the characters allowed by the host OS except parentheses semicolons and commas Note that a hyphen cannot be used as the first character of a file name or file name Do not specify file names that include a space or 2 byte characters Sharp symbol c
88. board While editing the value of the property inserts the contents of the clip board While editing the value of the property deletes the selected character string Select All While editing the value of the property selects all the characters of the selected property Reset to Default Restores the configuration of the selected item to the default configuration of the project For the Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option Reset All to Default Restores all the configuration of the current tab to the default configuration of the project For the Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 160 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Common Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the build tool categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed i 2 3 4 1 Build Mode 2 Output File Type and Path 3 Frequently Used Options for Compile 4 Frequently Used Options for Assemble 5 Frequently Used Options for Link 6 Frequently Used Options for Object Convert 7 Device 8 Build Method 9 Version Select 10 Notes 11 Others Remark Ifthe property in the Frequently Used Options category is changed the v
89. box then closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 273 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Figure A 28 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category Using libraries in the Frequently Used Options for Link category Memo in the Notes category and Commands executed before build pro cessing Commands executed after build processing in the Others category From the Compile Options tab Macro definition Macro undefinition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before compile processing Commands executed after compile processing in the Others category From the Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before assemble processing Commands executed after assemble processing in the Others category From the Link Options tab Using libraries in the Libra
90. cannot detect it If a function that is processed during interrupt servicing is called by means of interrupt servicing interrupt function or function called by interrupt function its argument automatic variable may be damaged Even if a function that is processed during interrupt servicing uses a common area saving returning to from a common area is not performed sm and ql5 cannot be specified at the same time Otherwise a warning for ql5 will be output and it will be processed as ql4 Example of use C gt cec78k0 cF051144 test c sm16 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 375 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Common object specification The common object specification option is as follows common common Description format common Interpretation when omitted The object for the specified device is output Function The common option specifies the output of an object common to the 78KO Application Use the common option to generates an object that can be used commonly in the 78KO regardless of the device type specification option c Description Specify this option to generate an object that can be used commonly in the 78KO Example of use To generate an object that can be used commonly in the 78KO describe as C gt cc78k0 prime c cF051144 common R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 376 of 570
91. category Figure 2 19 Output file name Property For Load Module File O Output File JCE ARNG against ermar Remark You can also change the option in the same way with the Output file name property in the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 29 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 When changing the hex file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Object Convert Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Hex file name property in the Hex File category Figure 2 20 Hex file name Property El Hex File Output hes file Yez Split hes file Ho Caution When Yes zf on the Split hex file property is selected the hex file is split into separate files hxb and hxf If a code is output to a segment allocated in extended space a separate hex file H1 to H15 is output into each space See B 4 2 Functions for details Remark You can also change the option in the same way with the Hex file name property in the Frequently Used Options for Object Convert category on the Common Options tab 3 When changing the library file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Output file name property in the Output File c
92. device in the command line takes precedence Example of use To specify the uUPD78F0511_44 as the target device in the command line describe as C gt cc78k0 cFO051144 prime c R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 330 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To specify the uPD78F0511_44 as the target device in the C source file describe as pragma pc F051144 define TRUE 1 define FALSE 0 Hdefine SIZE 200 mark SIZE 1 void main void int i prime k count Therefore the target device specification can be omitted from the command line C gt cc78k0 prime c Specify different devices in the C source file prime c and the command line and then start up the C compiler To specify the uPD78F0511_44 as the target device in the C source file prime c describe as pragma pc F051144 define TRUE 1 define FALSE 0 define SIZE 200 char mark SIZE 1 void main void int i prime k count Next specify the uPD78F0514 as the target device in the command line and then start up the C compiler C gt cc78k0O c014 prime c The target device specification in the command line takes precedence and compilation is executed as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 331 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO C Compiler Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xx
93. displayed corresponding to the numbers of banks XX 00 to 15 Figure 2 66 Select common bank area Property Select commonbank area No specication e Runa build of the project Run a build of the project A function information file is generated It will be input into the compiler automatically and a rebuild will be executed again Remarks 1 The function information file in a is overwritten by running a build If the output folder or file name is changed the specified file will be generated again 2 Since objects are generated anew using the function information file the second build will be a rebuild If the build completes successfully a load module file is generated with the C source files relocated to the specified area Figure 2 67 Project Tree Panel After Generating Load Module File Project Tree sample Project MS uPD SF0547_80 Microcontroller A CAFBEO Build Tool ce FAKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Gnalyzer 4nalyze Tool 3 File tl Build tool generated Files txt sample replace bt E txt sample _objinfa txt txt sample refinfo txt mi sample Imf map sample map he sample hex Symi sample sym F Startup c maim c fini sample fin R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 55 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Changing the relocation destination of the auto generated function information file If a warning W1402000 occurs while
94. dr pkO map kd The contents of kO map is as follows 78K0 Linker Vx xx Date XX XXX XXXX Page Command kOmain rel kOsub rel dkO dr pk0O map kd Para file Out file kOmain 1lmf Map file kO map Direc file k0O dr lt Link directive file name Directive MEMORY ROM Oh 4000h lt Contents of link directive file MEMORY RAM Ofe20h 1000h Tink information 3 output segment s 48H byte s real data R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 441 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 23 symbol s defined kee Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000H SIZE 1000H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS CODE 0000H 0002H CSEG AT R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 442 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE kp nkp Description format kp nkp Interpretation when omitted nkp Function The kp option outputs a public symbol list into a link list file The nkp option disables the kp option Application Use the kp option to output a public symbol list into a link list file Description If the nkm nkp and nkl options are all specified the link list file cannot be output If the ng option is specified the public symbol list cannot be output If both the kp and nkp options are specified at the same time the option spec
95. execute the program with a notice that a fatal error has occurred specify the j option to output the object module file Description When the j option is specified the object module file will be output even if a fatal error occurs If both the j and nj options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the no option is specified the j option is invalid Example of use To output an object module file KOmain rel even if a fatal error occurs describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm j R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 389 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Debug information output specification The debug information output specification options are as follows g ng ga nga g ng Description format Interpretation when omitted g Function The g option specifies that debug information local symbol information is to be added to an object module file The ng option disables the g option Application Use the g option when performing symbolic debugging of data that includes local symbol Use the ng option in the following three cases 1 Symbolic debugging of global symbols only 2 Debugging without symbols 3 When only the object is required evaluation using PROM etc Description If both the g and ng options are specified at the same time the option specified last
96. file However be sure to define the segment with 5 bytes for address 80H to 84H Any segment name OPT BYTE 11H Address 22H Address Address Address Address An error will occur if this option is specified for a device that does not have the user option byte function If specification of the assembler source file and specification of this option are made in duplicate this option takes priority Be sure to see the user s manual of the device and set the user option byte R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 464 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To specify 30H at address 80H OOH at address 81H OOH at address 82H OOH at address 83H and 02H at address 84H as the user option byte value describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel gb3000000002H To allocate the copy routine for expanding ROMized segments in RAM area at address 300H describe as To target addresses OFCFOOH to FFFFFH for ROMization describe as R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 465 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Help specification The help option is as follows Description format Interpretation when omitted No display Function The option outputs a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the link options See these when executing the linker
97. file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Restriction Yes If Outputs a form feed code into the list file Does not output a form feed code into the list file Specify the number of characters in each line of the list file Select from the drop down list Number of characters in 1 line This corresponds to the Iw option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 72 to 2046 decimal number Number of lines on 1 page Specifies the number of lines on 1 page of the list file If O is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 and 20 to 32767 decimal number R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 258 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Tab width Specify the tab width of the list file This corresponds to the It option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the genera
98. file from folder D library files describe as R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 453 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Parameter file specification The parameter file specification option is as follows f Description format Interpretation when omitted Options and input file names can only be input from the command line Function The f option inputs options and input file names from a specified file Application Use the f option when the information required to start up the linker will not fit on the command line When specifying options repeatedly every time you perform linking describe the options in the parameter file and specify the f option Description An abort error occurs if the file name is omitted Nesting of parameter files is not permitted An abort error occurs if the f option is specified within a parameter file The number of characters that can be described within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space a tab or the line feed code LF Options and input file names within a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last is valid The characters following or are all assumed to be comments up to the line feed code LF or EOF An abort error occurs if two or more f option
99. files are added after the last object module file in the list Newly added library files are added to the end of the list By changing the display order of the files you can set the input order of the files to the linker To change the display order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the file names After changing the dis play order click the OK button R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 70 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 2 Change the file build order of subprojects Builds are run in the order of subproject main project but when there are multiple subprojects added the build order of subprojects is their display order on the project tree To change the display order of the subprojects on the project tree drag the subproject to be moved and drop it on the desired location 2 15 3 Display a list of build options You can display the list of build options set currently on the Property panel for the project main project and subproject If you select Build Options List from the Build menu the current settings of the options for the project are displayed on the Build Tool tab from the Output panel in the build order Remark You can change the display format of the build option list Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Set the Format of build option list property in the Others category Figure
100. flash memory add this option to split up the file into separate hex format files one for the boot area and one for other areas If the zf option is specified the output file type at the boot area ROM program side is hxb and the output file type at the side of the other programs is hxf Caution Do not specify this option for a device that does not have a flash memory area self programming function Example of use To split the hex file into separate files kO hxb for the boot area and kO for other areas describe as C gt o0c78k0 k0 lmf zf R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 511 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Help specification The help option is as follows Description format Interpretation when omitted No display Function The option outputs a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the object convert options See these when executing the object converter Description When the option is specified all other options are invalid Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Example of use To output a help message on the display describe as C gt o0c78k0 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 512 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Object Converter Vx xx Xx XXX XX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Re
101. from the build tool by running build rebuild clean Caution Tab is not automatically switched when a new message is output on the non selected tab If this is the case is added to the tab informing a new message is output File menu only available for the Output panel The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Output panel other items are common to all the panels Save Output tab name Saves the contents on the currently selecting tab in the previously saved text file txt see c Save log When this item is selected for the first time after launching the program the operation is equivalent to when selecting Save Output tab name As Save Output tab name As Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents on the currently selecting tab in the des ignated text file txt see c Save log R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 266 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu only available for the Output panel The following items are exclusive to the Edit menu in the Output panel other items are all invalid Copy Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Select All Selects all the messages displayed on this panel Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Quick Find tab target Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Replace in Files tab target Context menu copy
102. in HL registor RIAI300 CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code 1421FE DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 63 A B 95 DE A 84 62 95 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 539 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example The object codes are embedded as shown below Assemble list chip initialize 11201A HDTSA 1AH 1620FE HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor R9A0000 CONVAH gt convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code 1421FE DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 63 A B 95 DEl A 84 DE 62 A 95 DE A Absolute assemble list chip initialize 11201A HDTSA 1AH 1620FE HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor R9AI300 CONVAH gt convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code 1421FE DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 63 A B 95 DE A 84 62 95 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 540 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 6 3 Method for manipulating 1 List converter startup The following two methods can be used to start up the list converter a Startup from the command line X path name gt lcnv78k0 Aoption input file name Aoption Icnv78k0 Command name of the list converter option Enter detailed instructions for the
103. in decimal A number in other than base 10 format or a string has been specified Function buttons The folder that was dragged and dropped and the files in that folder are added to the project And then close the dialog box Cancel Do not Do not add a folder and files and then closes this dialog box 0 a folder and files and then closes this Do not add a folder and files and then closes this dialog box 0 box C Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 271 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Figure A 27 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Format of build option list in the Others category From the Compile Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Assemble Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Link Options tab Area name in the Stack category and Other additional options in the Others category From the Object Convert Options tab Other additional options in the Others
104. indicate continuation Everything described from a semicolon to the end of the line will be assumed to be a comment and will not be interpreted by the librarian command If the last subcommand in a subcommand file is not the exit subcommand the librarian will automatically interpret that an exit subcommand is specified The librarian reads subcommands from the subcommand file and processes them The librarian quits after it completes processing of all subcommands in the subcommand file Example Create a subcommand file kO slb using an editor and then start up the librarian library creation command create k0 lib add k0 lib kOmain rel amp kOsub rel 1 C gt 1b78k0 lt kO slb 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the librarian is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78KO Librarian Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation b Execution end message The librarian does not output an execution end message When the user enters the exit subcommand after all processing is complete the librarian returns control to the host operating system create k0 lib add k0 lib kOmain rel kOsub rel ex1it If the librarian detects a fatal error which makes it unable to continue librarian processing the librarian outputs a message to the display and returns control to the operating system Example A non existent cre
105. information to the object module debugging info file being generated Does not add debug information to the object module file being generated 2 Preprocess The detailed information on the preprocess are displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during assembling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder When this option is omitted only the standard folder of the assembler is searched The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified However this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 255 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use whole include paths Select whether to assemble using the include path specified in the Additional include paths specified for build
106. into a link list file x O g O I x Outputs a local symbol list into a link list file Changes the number of lines printed per page in a link list file Inserts a form feed code at the end of a link list file nkl Link list file format specification Error list file output specification Outputs an error list file Inputs the specified file as a library file Reads a library file from a specified path Inputs the input file name and options from a specified file Creates a temporary file in the specified path 3 4 I I I I I I lt h gt n Library file specification Library file read path specification Parameter file specification Temporary file creation path specification Device file search path specification Reads a device file from a specified path R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 429 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Classification o escription Warning message output Specifies whether or not a warning message is output to the specification console Boot area ROM program linking Specifies the start address of the flash memory area specification for a product with built in flash memory ee sree erone savom o a ee speetes te ae sereen pemeran e T owsaropmossoeorneo 2 Precedence For the link options shown in the following table the precedence is explained in a case where two or more options
107. is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after assemble processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the assemble options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the assemble options group Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 260 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on each file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File Information 2 Notes Figure A 21 Property Panel File Information Tab Property c main c Property El File Information Save With absolute path writable Hotes File name This ie the name of this file Change the file name in the project tree panel Build Settings Description of each category 1 File Information The detailed information on the file are displayed and the configuration can be changed File name Display the
108. is not enough the output example is as follows filel c 10 file2 c 20 file3 c 30 Example 2 When the space in the common area is not enough the output example is as follows fFile4 c 10 file5 c 20 file6 c 30 Total Code Size 14 0 Byte s Information before relocation Outputs the information before relocation start Outputs information at the area level on Start address Outputs the start address of the area Common area information Outputs the relocation information of the common area start File name code size Outputs the file name and code size allocated to the common area A file to which is appended the end of the file name is one which can be relocated to the common area only A file to which is appended the end of the file name is one for which the relocation destination is specified in the Property panel Total code size Outputs the total code size of the files to be relocated to the common area Vacant area size Outputs the size of the vacant area in the common area The code size output to the replacement information file does not include libraries and the like For this reason the vacant area may be less than the size of the common area minus the code size If the size of the vacant area is negative it indicates that the amount of the area is lacking Bank area information start Outputs the relocation information of the bank XX area XX 00 to 15 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00
109. is specified Example of use Perform linking using a parameter file kO plk The contents of the parameter file kO plk is as follows parameter file kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0 lmf pkO map e tC tmp g Enter the following from the command line C gt 1k78k0 f k0 plk R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 454 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Temporary file creation path specification The temporary file creation path specification option is as follows ef t Description format tpath name Interpretation when omitted Path specified by environmental variable TMP Current path if no path is specified Function The t option specifies a path in which a temporary file is created Application Use the t option to specify the location for creation of a temporary file Description Only a path can be specified as a path name The path name is cannot be omitted Even if a previously created temporary file exists if the file is not protected it will be overwritten As long as the required memory size is available the temporary file will be expanded in memory If not enough memory is available the contents of the temporary file will be written to a disk Such temporary files may be accessed later through the saved disk file Temporary files are deleted when linking is finished They are also deleted when linking is abort
110. is used to perform authentication when the debugger is activated Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel On the Security ID property in the Device category specify the security ID in the 20 digit hexadecimal number The range that can be specified for the value is 0 to FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 61 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 77 Security ID Property If the setting is made as above the following value is set 0x11 to address 0x85 0x22 to address 0x86 0x33 to address 0x87 0x44 to address 0x88 0x55 to address 0x89 0x66 to address Ox8A 0x77 to address 0x8B 0x88 to address 0x8C 0x99 to address 0x8D OxAA to address Ox8E Remark See CubeSuite 78KO Debug for connecting with the debug tool R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 62 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 14 Prepare for Implementing Boot flash Relink Function Depending on the system in addition to the area which cannot be rewritten replaced boot area there are occasions when you can use the area which can be rewritten replaced flash area such as the flash or external ROM In these kinds of systems when you wish to change the program in the flash area a function called the relink function correctly performs function calls between the boot area and flash area w
111. is valid If the g ng and ga nga options are specified at the same time the ga nga option is valid regardless of the position in which it is specified If the no option is specified the g option is invalid Cautions Acontrol instruction DEBUG NODEBUG or DG NODG with the same function as the g and ng options can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASADEBUG ASADG Abbreviated form ASANODEBUG ASANODG Abbreviated form R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 390 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To add debug information local symbol information to an object module file kKOmain rel describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm g R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 391 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ga nga Description format nga Interpretation when omitted ga Function The ga option specifies that assembler source debug information is to be added to an object module file The nga option disables the g and ga option Application Use the ga option when performing debugging at the source level of the assembler To perform debugging at the source level you will need the separately available integrated debugger Use the nga option in the following three cases 1 Debugging without an assembler
112. li options of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes With no C source info Outputs the assembly file without C a source information Yes With C source Outputs the assembly file with C source info unexpanded include file information include file contents are not contents sa expanded Yes With C source Outputs the assembly file with C source info expanded include file information include file contents are contents sa li expanded Does not output the assembly file 10 Data Control The detailed information on data control are displayed and the configuration can be changed Assign bit field in Select whether to assign the member of the bit field structure from MSB structure from MSB This corresponds to the rb option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes rb Assigns the member of the bit field structure from MSB Assigns the member of the bit field structure from LSB Pack structure members Select whether to prohibit from inserting the align data to allocate the members consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address This corresponds to the rc option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes rc Prohibits from inserting the align dat
113. library file cannot be registered If an error occurs processing is interrupted and the library file cannot be created Example of use To register modules m1 and m2 while the library file kO lib is created describe as create kO 1lib ml rel m2 rel lt Before file creation gt l l l l lt Atfter file creation gt kO lib R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 528 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format addAlibrary file nameAtransaction aAlibrary file nameAtransaction Abbreviated form Function The add subcommand adds a module to a library file Description A module can be added to a library file even if no modules are stored in the library An abort error occurs if a module with the same name as the module to be added already exists in the library file An abort error occurs if the module to be added carries the same public symbol as the public symbol in the library file Example of use To add module m3 to the library file kO lib describe as add kO 1lib m3 rel lt Before module addition gt kO lib m3 lt After module addition gt kO lib R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 529 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format deleteAlibrary file nameA Amodule name A A dAlibrary file nameA Amodule name A JA Abbreviated f
114. main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different This property is not displayed when No in the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category is selected Default How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area dialog boxwhich appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters 13 Function Information File The detailed information on the function information file is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when a device with a memory bank installed is specified as the microcontroller and a C source file is selected on the Project Tree panel Using function This is the functions information file to be used for relocating functions to the bank memory information file The valid function information file registered to the project is searched and the file name is displayed This corresponds to the mf option of the compiler Default The name of the function information file that is added to the project How to change Changes not allowed 14 Data Control The detailed information on data control are displayed and the configuration can be changed Assign bit field in Select whether to assign the member of the bit field structure from MSB structure fro
115. name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Macro definition Specify the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The def part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of the assembler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified 5 Frequently Used Options for Link The detailed information on frequently used options for linking are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for library projects Using libraries Specify the l
116. name number of references size reference type file name const global variable and const variable variable name number of references size reference type const static variable variable name number of references size reference type file name global variable variable name number of references size reference type global variable and const variable for the boot area variable name number of references size reference type const boot global variable for the boot area variable name number of references size reference type boot Remark Describe variables in the order of priority from highest to lowest Comment out the lines for variables and functions that are not to be allocated by adding a semicolon at the beginning of the line b Set the generation of the variables information file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Variables Relocation Options tab on the Property panel Select No on the Output variables information file property Figure 2 57 Output variables information file Property c Run a build of the project Run a build of the project A load module file is generated with the variables allocated as specified in the variables information file Caution Ifa file with an extension of vfi is added to the project it is treated as a variables information file It is also treated as a variables information file if it is added below the Startup node
117. name to be output Use the extension lib If the extension is omitted lib is automatically added The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name Default ProjectName lib How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters 2 List File The detailed information on list files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output list file Select whether to output the list file with the librarian This corresponds to the o option of the list subcommand How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Outputs the list file information on modules in the library file Does not output the list file information on modules in the library file Output with public Select whether to output public symbol information to the list file with the librarian symbol information This corresponds to the public option of the list subcommand This property is not displayed when No in the Output list file property is selected Default How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs public symbol information to the list file Does not output public symbol information to the list file Output with form feed Select whether to output a form feed code into the end of list files control code This corresponds to the If option of the librarian This property is not displayed when No in the Outpu
118. node Current Information xxx x Replacement Information Table MEMORY 2 ROM ADDRESS 3 0x00000 SIZE 4 32768 MEMORY 2 BANKOO ADDRESS 3 0x08000 SIZE 4 16384 MEMORY 2 BANKO1 ADDRESS 3 0x18000 SIZE 4 16384 MEMORY 2 BANKO2 ADDRESS 3 0x28000 SIZE 4 16384 MEMORY 2 BANKO3 ADDRESS 3 0x38000 SIZE 4 16384 MEMORY 2 BANKO4 ADDRESS 3 0x48000 SIZE 4 16384 MEMORY 2 BANKO5 ADDRESS 3 0x58000 SIZE 4 16384 5 COMMON 6 callt c 1 6 asm3 asm 1 6 asml asm 1 6 file1 c 1 6 file2 c 2 6 file10 4 c 10 6 file10 3 c 10 6 file10 2 c 10 6 file10 c 10 6 file1000 3 c 1000 6 f ile100 c 100 6 file1000_ 2 1000 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 122 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 6 ile200 c 200 6 file201 c 201 6 file1000 c 1000 6 file2000 c 2000 6 f ile10000 4 c 10000 6 file10000 3 c 10000 6 ile10000 2 c 10000 6 file10000 c 10000 6 main c 145 Total Code Size 7 45692 Byte s Available Space 8 14970 Byte s 9 BANK00 10 asm2 asm 1 Total Code Size 11 1 Byte s Available Space 12 16383 Byte s 9 BANKO1 10 asm3 asm 1 Total Code Size 11 1 Byte s Available Space 12 16383 Byte s 9 BANKO2 10 asm3 asm 1 Total Code Size 11 1 Byte s Available Space 12 16383 Byte s a a Replace Information k Replacement Inf
119. node is selected Displays this node s property on the Property panel 7 When the Startup node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of this node You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project This menu is always disabled This menu is always disabled Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project This menu is always disabled Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel 8 When a category node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes t
120. of a temporary file Description Only a path can be specified as a path name The path name is cannot be omitted Even if a previously created temporary file exists if the file is not protected it will be overwritten As long as the required memory size is available the temporary file will be expanded in memory If not enough memory is available the contents of the temporary file will be written to a disk Such temporary files may be accessed later through the saved disk file Temporary files are deleted when library formation is finished They are also deleted when library formation is aborted by pressing the keys CTRL C key The path in which the temporary file is created is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the t option 2 Path specified by environmental variable TMP when the t option is omitted 3 Current path when TMP is not set Caution When 1 or 2 is specified if the temporary file cannot be created in the specified path an abort error occurs Example of use To output a temporary file to folder C tmp describe as C gt 1b78k0 tC tmp R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 523 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To output a temporary file to folder D temporary files describe as C gt 1b78k0 t D temporary files R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 524 of 570 Apr 01 2011 Cu
121. of the librarian are shown below See 3 5 Librarian for details about output lists Table B 25 I O Files of Librarian Input files Subcommand file File containing the subcommands and parame ters for the executed commands user created file Output files List file File containing the result of library file information Ist output I O files Object module file Object module file output by the compiler or rel assembler Library file File used to input the library files output by the librarian and update the contents Temporary file File created automatically by the librarian when Lb xxxxxx y forming a library y 1 to 6 Temporary files are deleted when execution of the librarian ends R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 514 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 5 2 1 2 3 Functions Formation of a library of modules The assembler and linker create one file for every module they output This means that if a large number of modules are created the number of files also grows The assembler there fore includes a function for collecting a number of object modules in a single file This function is called module library formation and a file which is organized as a library is called a library file A library file can be input to the linker By creating a library file consisting of modules common to many programs users can make file management and operatio
122. of use To specify 20 as the number of lines per page in an assemble list file KOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm 1120 The contents of kOmain prn is as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 403 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Assembler Vx xx Date XxX XXX XXxXx Page 1 Command cF051144 kOmain asm 1120 Para file In file k0Omain asm Obj file kOmain rel Prn file kOmain prn Assemble list 78KO Assembler Vx xx Date XxX XXX XXxXxX Page 2 ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT 1 1 2 2 NAME SAMPM 3 3 pr kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 4 4 i 5 5 E HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program 6 6 i 7 7 main routine 78K0 Assembler Vx xx Date xXxX XXX XXxXx Page 3 ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT 8 8 i 9 9 prkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 10 10 11 11 PUBLIC MAIN START R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 404 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format lhcharacter string Interpretation when omitted None Function The Ih option specifies the character string printed in the title column of the header of an assemble list file Application Use the Ih option to display a title that briefly explains the contents of an assemble list file By printing the title on each page the contents of the assemble l
123. of when the C compiler is installed to C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78KO V x xx Function The i option specifies that an include file specified by include statement in a C source file is to be input from a specified folder Application Use the i option to search an include file from a certain folder Description Up to 8 folders can be specified at once by separating them with A space cannot be entered before or after If two or more folders are specified following the i option or if two or more i options are specified the files specified by include is searched in the specified order The search sequence is as follows 1 Folder with source fileN t 1 2 The folder specified by the i option 3 Folder specified by environmental variable INC78KO 4 C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78KO Vx xx inc78koe 2 Notes 1 Ifthe include file name is specified with double quotation marks in the include statement folders with source files are searched first If the include file name is specified with lt gt search is not performed 2 This is an example of when the C compiler is installed to C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78KO V x xx R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 349 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To input the include file that is specified in an incl
124. omitted ka Function The ka option outputs an assemble list into an assemble list file The nka option disables the ka option Application Use the ka option to output an assemble list Description If both the ka and nka options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the nka nks and nkx options are all specified the assemble list file cannot be output If the np option is specified the ka option is invalid Example of use To output an assemble list file into an assemble list file KOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm ka The contents of kKOmain prn is as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 396 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT NAME SAMPM gE KKRKKKEKKERKE KEKE KEKE KE KERKEKREKKEKEKKKEKRKKKEK KEKE HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program main routine RAEERRAEERRAEAAEARAARERRE AREER A RRR EE RK RRS EO 11 PUBLIC MAIN START 12 EXTRN CONVAH 13 14 AT OFE20H 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 11201A HDTSA 1AH 27 1620FE HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 397 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ks nks Description format nks Interpretation when omitted n
125. option of the linker This property is invalid when the Boot area load module file name property in the Device category from the Link Options tab is specified This property is not displayed when the device does not have a security ID function Default Oxffffffffffffffffffff Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0x00000000000000000000 to Oxffffffffffffffffffff 20 digit 10 byte hexadecimal number 8 Build Method The detailed information on the build method is displayed and the configuration can be changed Handling the source file Selects whether to recompile assemble the source file if there are no files that include it includes non existing file 9 Default Re compile assemble the source file How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Re compile assemble the Recompiles assembles the source file if there source file are no files that include it Ignore re compiling Does not recompile assemble the source file assembling the source file if there are no files that include it The detailed information on the build tool version is displayed and the configuration can be changed 9 Version Select R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 169 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Using compiler package Display the folder in which the compiler package to be used is installed install folder P Default Install folder name How to change Changes not
126. order Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Property Displays the selected build tool s property on the Property panel 4 When the File node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension The file is added directly below this node Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of this node You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project This menu is always disabled This menu is always disabled Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project This menu is always disabled Property Displays the selected categ
127. output to the current folder If only the path name is specified in outout file name input file name sym will be output to the specified path If both the s and ns options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid When a symbol having an ADDRESS or BIT attribute is defined for a segment allocated in extended space the object converter generates a separate symbol table file for each space All symbols which have NUMBER attribute are output to a symbol table file in normal space The file types of symbol table files generated for extended space are as follows File Normal Space Extended Space ef om fs lels gt s s oe Example of use To output a symbol table file sample sym describe as C gt o0c78k0 kO 1lmf ssample sym R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 502 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Object address order sort specification The object address order sort specification options are as follows r nr r nr Description format E Nr Interpretation when omitted r Function The r option outputs sorting of hex format objects in order of address The nr option outputs hex format objects in the order in which they are stored in the load module file Application Use the nr option to specify when the hex format objects do not need to be sorted in address order Description
128. p np p np Description format p Loutput file name Interpretation when omitted pinput file name prn Function The p option specifies the output of an assemble list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The np option disables the p ka ks kx lw ll Ih It and If option Application Use the p option to specify the location to which an assemble list file is output or to change its file name Specify the np option when performing assembly only to output an object module file This will shorten assembly time Description If the output file name is omitted when the p option is specified the output file name will be nput file name prn If the drive name is omitted when the p option is specified the assemble list file will be output to the current drive If both the p and np options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To output an assemble list file sample prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm psample prn R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 395 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assemble list file information specification The assemble list file information specification options are as follows ka nka ks nks Kx nkx ka nka Description format nka Interpretation when
129. programming specification The self programming specification option is as follows self self Description format Interpretation when omitted None Function The self option does not output an error when CALL 8100H is described even if address 8100H is outside the access range i e there is no internal ROM Application Use the self option to use self programming Description Specify the self option if an error occurs when CALL 8100H is described during self programming Example of use If an error occurs when CALL 8100H is described during self programming describe as C gt ra78k0 kOsub asm cF051144 self R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 421 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Help specification The help option is as follows Description format Interpretation when omitted No display Function The option outputs a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the assemble options See these when executing the assembler Description When the option is specified all other options are invalid To read the next part of the help message press the return key To quit the help display press any key other than the return key and then press the return key Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Example of use
130. refer to the format information for the item of each section 2 format information sreg variable count size type file const static const variable count size type const global const variable count size type file static variable count size type global variable count size type const boot global const in boot variable count size type boot global in boot type near 1 far 2 sreg 0 callt variable count type file static variable count type global variable count type boot global in boot type near 1 far 2 callt 0 3 gap information callt gap 4 START 5 SIZE 00080H 00040H saddr gap 4 START 5 SIZE FFE26H 000BAH 6 variable information sreg 7 7 8 Sy 9 15 10 4 7 flash a 6 2 13 25 10 1 7 lash b 8 2 9 2 10 1 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 118 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 7 var1 8 1 9 2 10 1 11 lash c 12 const 7 var2 8 1 9 2 10 1 const 7 var3 8 1 9 4 10 1 11 flash c 7 boot_a 8 1 9 2 10 0 13 boot 7 boot_b 8 1 9 2 10 0 13 boot 14 function information callt PALS 1 406 1 417 1 428 tlash c 2 15 22 116 1 417 1 func L6 1 117 1 boot Item Description Format Number a Format information start Indicates start of format information of the variable and fu
131. required to start up the assembler will not fit on the command line or when the same assemble option is specified repeatedly each time assembly is performed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 381 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To start up the assembler from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the assembler from a parameter file as follows X gt ra78k0 ASource file A fparameter file name Parameter file specification option parameter file name A file which includes the data required to start up the assembler Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows Al option Aoption If the source file name is omitted from the command line only 1 source file name can be specified in the parameter file The source file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all assemble options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file kKOmain pra using an editor and then start up the assembler parameter file kOmain asm osample rel psample prn C gt ra78k0O f kOmain pra 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the assembler is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78KO0 Assembler Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright
132. running a build in 1 you must change the relocation destination Below is the procedure for relocating the C source files after you have changed the relocation destination a Change the relocation destination When changing the relocation destination perform the actions while making reference to the auxiliary information files replacement information file object information file and reference information files The example of changing the relocation destination is shown below lt 1 gt If you could not relocate files containing functions that cannot be relocated to the common area or bank area Select files in the function information file defined for relocation to the common area files with C specified as the relocation destination that can be relocated to the bank area and change their relocation destination to the bank area Whether the selected file can be relocated to the bank area can be identified by referring to the replacement information file Files that can be relocated only to the Files to which is appended the end of file name code size in common area the replacement information file Files that can be relocated to the Files to which is not appended the end of file name code size common area and bank area in the replacement information file Example Change the relocation destination of file file100 c from the common area to bank 3 and that of file file200 c from the common area to bank 4 Before
133. select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output category No is selected by default R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 51 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 61 Use memory bank relocation support tool Property Use memory bank relocation sup Jutput function mbormation file Output folder for replacement information file Replacement information file name Output folder for object information file Object information file name Output folder for reference information file Reference information file name Mo BuilldModeh ame 2Projecthl ame4_replace tut BuilldModeh ane 2Projecth ame objinto bet bulldModeh ame 2Projecth ame retinto bet Remark If you select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property the following properties are automatically changed The Add debug information property in the Debug Information category from the Compile Options tab will be changed to Yes Add to both assembly and object file g2 The Output assemble file property in the Assembly File category from the Compile Options tab will be changed to Yes With no C source info a The Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category from the Assemble Options tab will be changed to Yes p The Output with cross reference list property in the Assemble List category from the Assem
134. source 2 When only the object is required evaluation using PROM etc 3 Debugging at the source level of the C compiler Description If both the ga and nga options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the g ng and ga nga options are specified at the same time the ga nga option is valid regardless of the position in which it is specified If the no option is specified the ga option is invalid Cautions Acontrol instruction DEBUGA NODEBUGA with the same function as the ga and nga options can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below AS ADEBUGA ASANODEBUGA Example of use To add assembler source debug information to an object module file kOmain rel describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm ga R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 392 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Include file read path specification The include file read path specification option is as follows Description format ipath name path name two or more path names can be specified Interpretation when omitted The include file is searched in the following sequence 1 Path where the source file exists 2 Path specified by environmental variable INC78KO Function The i option specifies that an include file specified by include in a source is to be input from a s
135. sp 42 int sp 2 int i sp 2 CLOCK SIZE 116 clocks STACK SIZE 8 bytes CLOCK SIZE 58 clocks STACK SIZE 6 bytes Format Systom ime Displayed in HH MM SS format Outputs the command line contents following CC78KO Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 15 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 One or more white space characters or tabs e are replaced by a single white space character R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 94 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number C source file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted c is attached as the file type extension Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 15 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 6 Assembler source file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted asm is attached as the file type extension Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 15 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 7 Parameter file contents Outputs the parameter file contents Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 15 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 One or more white space characters or tabs are replaced by a single white space character 8 Device type This character string is spec
136. text box of the subproperty Macro definition Macro definition 0 When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties automatically Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Additional include paths property in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 39 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 2 Set a macro definition Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel The macro definition setting is made with the Macro definition property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 42 Macro definition Property E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 43 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Enter the macro definition in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line You can specify up to 31 characters per line up to 30 line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value If you click the OK button the entered macro definitions are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 44 Macro definition Property After Setting Macros El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 mill Ta Lie i LAT i
137. the drop down list Restriction Yes Speed Performs optimization with the execution speed precedence qx1 precedence Yes Standard Performs optimization with both the execution speed qx2 and module size precedence Yes Code size Performs optimization with the module size precedence qx3 precedence Yes Code size Performs optimization with top precedence to module Best qx4 size In addition qx3 common code is placed in subroutines and the library for the stack access is used Yes Detail setting The Optimization Details category is shown The option that is selected in the category has the precedence for the optimization When No nq is selected in all the properties in the Optimization Details category the optimization will not be done Does not specify optimization R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 237 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Optimization Details The detailed information on the optimization are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when Yes Detail setting in the Perform optimization property in the Optimization category is selected Swap order of formula operations Select whether to output an efficient code in order to achieve efficient register utilization by swapping the execution order of formula This corresponds to the qw option of the compiler Default Configuration of
138. the output folder and file name of the variables information file If the Variables information file property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 477 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE lt 11 gt Set compile options Select the Compile Options tab Select Yes zf on the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category Figure B 20 Memory Model Category in Flash Area El Memory Model Next select Yes For flash area on the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category Figure B 21 Use standard startup routine Property in Flash Area fes For flash areal Next add the created variables information file for the boot area to the flash area project Specify the variables information file for the boot area on the Variables information file for boot area property in the Variable Information File category Figure B 22 Variables information file for boot area Property in Flash Area O Yanables Information Fie _AboottDefaultBuildtboot vi Lal lt 12 gt Set link options Add the created boot area load module file to the flash area project Select the Link Options tab Specify the boot area load module file on the Boot area load module file name property in the Device cat
139. to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zd Uses a library for the prologue epilogue routines of a function No Does not use a library for the prologue epilogue routines of a function 8 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Object file name Specify the name of the object file generated after compilation If this field is blank the file is saved under the file name with extension c replaced by rel This corresponds to the o option of the compiler How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Output common object Select whether to output the objects common to the various devices file for various devices This corresponds to the common option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Yes common common Yes common Outputs the objects common to the various devices the objects common to the various devices Does not specifies outputting the objects common to the various devices R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 246 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 9 Assembly File The detailed information on assembly files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble file Select whether to output the assembly file This corresponds to the a sa and
140. tracer could not obtain stack information in the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box under Unknown Functions Figure 2 123 Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Dialog Box Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Unknown Functions Adjusted Functions subl1 4 4 sub 24 8 4 System Library Functions Remark Functions will appear under Unknown Functions in the following circumstances The frame size could not be measured A recursive function for which the recursion depth has not been set in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box The function includes indirect function calls which are not set as callee functions in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 90 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 5 Change the frame size You can dynamically change the frame size of functions for which the stack usage tracer was not able to obtain stack information or for functions that you intentionally want to modify using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file 1 Using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box The procedure for using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box is as follows Select the desired item in the tree display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window then click toolbar gt gt W The Adjust Stack Size dialog box opens Figure 2 124 Adjust Stack Size Dialog Box Adjust Stack Size Function Ma
141. treated as a function information file if it is added below the Startup node When adding a function information file to the project if a functions information file has already been added then only the latest function information file to be added is targeted by a build any such files added prior to this one will not be targeted When setting a function information file that is not targeted by a build as a build target if other function information files have also been added then the file will be targeted by the build and the others will not be targeted R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 57 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 Set Build Options Separately Build options are set at the project or file level Project level See 2 12 1 Set build options at the project level Project level See 2 12 2 Set build options at the file level 2 12 1 Set build options at the project level To set options for build options for a project main project or Subproject select the Build tool node on the project tree to display the Property panel Select the component tabs and set build options by setting the necessary properties Compiler Compile Options tab Assembler List Converter Assemble Options tab Linker Link Options tab Object converter Object Convert Options tab Librarian Create Library Options tab Variables information file generator Variables Relocation Options tab Memory ban
142. under the file name with extension asm replaced by rel This corresponds to the o option of the assembler How to change Directly enter to the text box Up to 259 characters Output common object Select whether to output the objects common to the various devices file for various devices This corresponds to the common option of the assembler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Outputs the objects common to the various devices Outputs objects for 78KO Output error list file Select whether to output the error list file This corresponds to the e option of the assembler R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 256 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Assemble List The detailed information on the assemble list are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the p option of the assembler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes p Outputs an assemble list file No np Does not output an assemble list file Execute list converter Select whether the list converter is executed following the generation of an execution module The list converter is not executed during library generation This property is not displayed when No n
143. 0 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 431 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Load module file output specification The load module file output specification options are as follows 0 NO 0 NO Description format o output file name no Interpretation when omitted o nput file name mt Function The o option specifies the output of a load module file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The no option disables the o j and g option Application Use the o option to specify the location to which a load module file is output or to change its file name Specify the no option when performing linking only to output a link list file This will shorten link time Description Even if the o option is specified when a fatal error occurs the load module file cannot be output If output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the load module file nput file name mf will be output to the current folder If only the path name is specified in outpout file name input file name mt will be output to the specified path If both the o and no options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To output a load module file kO Imf describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0 1mf R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 432 of 570 Apr 01
144. 0 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 561 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE When the memory area name is defined in the memory directive Memory Area Information ROM xxxxxH byte s real data RAM xxxxxH byte s real data Memory Area Information in ROM ROM XxXxxXxH byte s ROM1 xxxxxH byte s xxx Memory Area Information in RAM RAM xXxXxxxH byte s RAM1 xxxxxH byte s First the total amount uses Is output followed by the usage for each defined memory area Example of use To output ROM RAM usage after the linking to the standard output describe as C gt vf78k0 main rel sub rel vx To allocate the copy routine for expanding ROMized segments in RAM area at address 300H describe as To target addresses OFCFOOH to FFFFFH for ROMization describe as R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 562 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX C APPENDIX C INDEX INDEX Symbols Add a build mode 73 h CC78K0 379 Add a file to a project 19 LB78K0 525 Add Existing File dialog box 294 LONV78K0 549 Add File dialog box 268 LK78K0 466 Add Folder and File dialog box 270 OC78K0 512 Assemble list 104 RA78KO 422 Assembler 380 pragma pc 330 Assembler source file 93 asm 380 cer 320 B dr 424 550 b LK78KO 451 ecc 320
145. 0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 366 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Execution state display specification The execution state display specification options are as follows v nv V nv Description format V nlv Interpretation when omitted NV Function The v option outputs the execution state of the current compilation to the console The nv option disables the v option Application Use the v option to check the execution status of compilation Description The phase name and function names in the process are output If both the v and nv options are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use To output the execution state of the current compilation to the console describe as C gt cec78k0 cF051144 prime c v R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 367 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Parameter file specification The parameter file specification option is as follows f Description format Interpretation when omitted Options and input file names can only be input from the command line Function The f option inputs options and input file names from a specified file Application Use the f option when the information required to start up the CA78KO will not fit on the command line because two or more opt
146. 011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 1 ufilling value If the target device contains internal ROM the internal ROM range 2 ufilling value size From address 0 to size 1 3 ufilling value start address size From start address to start address size 1 In a bank supported product specify the bank number CPU address in the start address and size See 11 Hex output method of bank supported products for details Example of use Fill an address area to which a hex format object has not been output with code It is Supposed that the following hex file exists In this case code cannot be written to the address area OO3EH to OFFFH 020000000200FC 100002002B41000BFC80FE2B40000944F7083A20EC 1 100012001A6720FE2822006521FED350D25014FE1A 1 10002200B8900059F2835002431B900059F28350005 1 gt 0C003200242156AF0A8302A807A830560C 01000003B85D0qd002643 2 1010100024A5F622B667 2 00000001FF 2 1000H OFFFH Code is filled to this area 003EH 003DH 0002H 0001H 0000H To fill OOH to the address area 003EH to OFFFH describe as C gt 0c78k0 k0 lmf u00h 003eh 0fc2h R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 505 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error list file output specification The error list file output specification options are as follows e ne e ne Description format
147. 0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 76 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 8 Set the current build options as the standard for the project On the Property panel if you add a change to the settings for the standard build options the value of the property will be displayed in boldface Figure 2 104 Property Panel After Changing Standard Build Option O Output File Type andPath Output file type Execute Module Hex File Intermediate file output folder b uildModeN anes To make the build options for the currently selected project main project or Subproject the standard build options remove the boldface select the Build tool node on the project tree and select Set to Default Build Option for Project from the context menu Figure 2 105 Set to Default Build Option for Project Item AS CA7SK0 Build Tool cee FEKO Simulator Deb ey Program Analyzer E Rebuild Project Shift F7 y File ed Clean Project C E Set to Default Build Option For Project Eg Build Project F7 mE Set Link Order The value of the properties after setting them as the standard build option are as shown below Figure 2 106 Property Panel After Setting Standard Build Option E Output File Type andPath Output file type Execute Module Hex File Intermediate file output folder zbudi ode ame Caution When the main project is selected only the main project settings are made Even if subproje
148. 1 Name of source file in which Outputs the name of source file in which error occurred error occurred Line on which error occurred Outputs a left aligned value with zeroes suppressed Type of error Outputs the type of error 4 Error number Outputs error numbers in the mnnn format 2 is output if m is an assembler 3 if it is a linker 4 if is an object converter 5 if is a librarian and 6 if it is a list converter nnn is the error number Remark The file name and the line where the error occurred may not be displayed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 109 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 3 Linker The linker outputs the following lists Output List File Name Output List Name Link list file Link list file headers Map list Local symbol list To configure the link list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Link Options tab Select Yes on the Output link list file property in the Link List category To output the error list file in the Error List category set the Output error list file property to Yes e The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated file
149. 1 00 CENESAS Page 413 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Temporary file creation path specification The temporary file creation path specification option is as follows ef t Description format tpath name Interpretation when omitted Path specified by environmental variable TMP Current path if no path is specified Function The t option specifies a path in which a temporary file is created Application Use the t option to specify the location for creation of a temporary file Description Only a path can be specified as a path name The path name is cannot be omitted Even if a previously created temporary file exists if the file is not protected it will be overwritten As long as the required memory size is available the temporary file will be expanded in memory If not enough memory is available the contents of the temporary file will be written to a disk Such temporary files may be accessed later through the saved disk file Temporary files are deleted when assembly is finished They are also deleted when assembly is aborted by pressing the keys CTRL C key The path in which the temporary file is created is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the t option 2 Path specified by environmental variable TMP when the t option is omitted 3 Current path when TMP is not set Caution When
150. 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 74 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 6 Change the build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the build you can collec tively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and macro definition settings every time 1 When changing the build mode for the main project or subprojects Select the Build tool node of the target project on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select the build mode to be changed to on the Build mode property in the Build Mode category Figure 2 100 Build Mode Property 2 When changing the build mode for the entire project Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box opens Figure 2 101 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode Apply to All Build mode list DefaultB uild BuildModes If you select the build mode to be changed from the build mode list the selected build mode is displayed in Selected build mode If you click the Apply to All button the build mode for the main project and all the sub projects which belong to the project will be changed to the build mode selected in the dialog
151. 13 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number Name of module in which Displays the name of the input object module in which local symbols are defined local symbols are defined Symbol attributes Displays the symbol attributes CSEG Code segment name DSEG Data segment name BSEG Bit segment name MAC Macro name MOD Module name SET Symbol defined by SET directive NUM NUMBER attribute symbol ADDR ADDRESS attribute symbol BIT BIT attribute symbol addr bit SABIT BIT attribute symbol saddr bit SFBIT BIT attribute symbol sfr bit RBIT BIT attribute symbol A bit X bit PSW bit SFR Names defined as SFRs by EQU directive SFRP Names defined as SFRPs by EQU directive Blank External reference symbol declared by EXTRN or EXTBIT Undefined symbol Symbol value Displays the local symbol values Local symbol name Displays the local symbol names 3 3 5 Error list An error list stores the error messages output when the linker is started up LK78KO 1l error 2 E3405 3 Undefined symbol CONVAH in file kOmain rel Item Description Format Number 1 Type of error Outputs the type of error Error number Outputs error numbers in the nnnn format F is output if is an abort error E if it is a fatal error C if is an Internal error and W if it is a warning nnnn the error number is displayed
152. 15 0 warning s found 16 31 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 104 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number a Line number of source image Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed ee number Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed The expansion of INCLUDE files and macros are included Macro display Displays a macro M This is a macro definition line n This is a macro expansion line n is the nest level Blank This is not a macro definition or expansion line INCLUDE display Displays INCLUDE In Within an INCLUDE file n is the nest level Blank An INCLUDE file is not used 5 Source statement Displays source statements Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning on the next line 6 Location counter value The line s start address appears as the label for machine instructions DB DW DS and DBIT It is displayed in hexadecimal format without zero suppression It is displayed in hexadecimal format without zero suppression 7 Line on which error occurred This is a line on which error occurred Required items are displayed 8 Relocation information Displays relocation information R Object code or symbol value is changed by the linker Blank Object code or symbol value is not changed by the linker Segment address Displays a start address of a s
153. 16 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Filling value Specify the values in hexadecimal number without 0x example FF to be written to the address for which no hex format object is output If this is blank it is assumed that FF has been specified This corresponds to the u option of the object converter This property is not displayed when No nu in the Fill free memory space property is selected How to change Directly enter to the text box 0 to FF hexadecimal number Specify the start address for filling in hexadecimal without Ox example 100A0 Filling start address If this is blank it is assumed that 0 has been specified If this property is specified configure the Filling size byte property If the Filling size byte property is blank the specification of this property is invalid This corresponds to the u option of the object converter This property is not displayed when No nu in the Fill free memory space property is selected How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to the largest address of the program space hexadecimal Filling size byte Specify the size from the start address for filling in hexadecimal without 0x example FOO If the result of changing the Filling start address property is outside the range that can be specified for this property then this property will be blank This corresponds to the u opti
154. 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Forced load module file output specification The forced load module file output specification options are as follows j nj j nj Description format Interpretation when omitted nj Function The j option specifies that the load module file can be output even if a fatal error occurs The nj option disables the j option Application Normally when a fatal error occurs the load module file cannot be output When you wish to execute the command with a notice that a fatal error has occurred specify the j option to output the load module file Description When the j option is specified the load module file will be output even if a fatal error occurs If both the j and nj options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the no option is specified the j option is invalid Example of use To output a load module file kOsub Imf even if a fatal error occurs describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel j R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 433 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Debug information output specification The debug information output specification options are as follows g ng g ng Description format g ng Interpretation when omitted g Function The g option specifies that debug
155. 32 bit entry address within the range OH to FFFFFFFFH Check sum S8 record S8 XX WWWWWWWW ZZ 1 2 3 4 Item Description Number e Record type Record length This is the number of bytes in 3 plus the number of bytes in 4 3 Entry address This is the 24 bit entry address within the range OH to FFFFFFH 4 Check sum 4 Symbol table file The symbol table file output by the object converter is input to a debugger The following is the symbol table file of the sample program 04 FF PUBLIC 010097CONVAH 010000MAIN 010080START 0OFE20 STBEG OOFBO0 STEND FF SAMPM lt 02FE20HDTSA O2FE21STASC FF SAMPS lt 0100A8SASC 0100AESASC1 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 493 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 30 Formats for Symbol Table File Start of symbol table Start of public symbol Note gt Symbol attributes Symbol value Public symbol name a Public symbol 4 blank 4 blank spaces 4 4 blank spaces 4 blank spaces Module name 1 Module name 1 1 Local symbols for Start of local symbol Symbol attributes Symbol value Local symbol name CR each module Symbol attributes Symbol value Local symbol name 4 blank spaces Module name 2 Repeated in units of object module End mark of symbol table Note Symbol attributes are the values shown below See the following figure about formats of symb
156. 44 prime c asample asm R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 351 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format sa output file name Interpretation when omitted No assembler source file is output Function The sa option adds the C source as a comment to the assembler source file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application Use the sa option to output an assembler source file and a C source file together Description If the output file name is omitted when the sa option is specified the output file name will be nput file name asm If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the sa option is specified the output file name will be output file name asm If the drive name is omitted when the sa option is specified the assemble source file will be output to the current drive If both the sa and a options are specified at the same time the sa option is ignored The C source in an include file is not added to the comments in the output assembler source file However if the li option is specified the C source in the include file is also added to the comments Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To add the C source file prime c as a comment to the assembler source file prime asm descri
157. 5 Make Settings for Build Operations If there is no subproject the project is always active Remarks 1 If there is no subproject in the project the project is always active 2 When setting a build mode add the build mode see 2 15 5 Add a build mode 3 Set build target files Add or remove build target files and update the dependencies see 2 3 Set Build Target Files 4 Set build options Set the options for the compiler assembler librarian and the like see 2 5 Set Compile Options 2 6 Set Assemble Options 2 9 Set Create Library Options 5 Runa build Run a build see 2 16 Runa Build The following types of builds are available Build see 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files Rebuild see 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build see 2 16 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations Batch build see 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remark _ If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process on the Property panel from the Common Options tab in the Others category set the Commands executed before build processing and Commands executed after build processing properties If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process at the file level you can set them from the Individual Compile Options tab for a C source file and Individual Assemble Options tab for an assembler source file 6 Save the project Save the set
158. 5 and unsigned char type variable Constants from 128 to 127 and signed char type variable Constants from 0 to 255 with suffix U and signed char type variable 4 Preprocess The detailed information on the preprocess are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 179 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during compiling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder When this option is omitted only the standard folder of the compiler is searched The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the compiler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified However
159. 628 585 900 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 Dusseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 65030 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 204 205 AZIA Center No 1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd Pudong District Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5877 1818 Fax 86 21 6887 7858 7898 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2886 9318 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co Ltd 7F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel 886 2 8175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 1 harbourFront Avenue 06 10 keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6278 8001 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 Jin Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 http www renesas com 2011 Renesas Electronics Corporation All rights reserved Colophon 1 0 CubesSuit
160. 70 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link list file output specification The link list file output specification options are as follows p np p np Description format p Loutput file name Interpretation when omitted pinput file name map Function The p option specifies the output of a link list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The np option disables the p km kd kp kl Il and If option Application Use the p option to specify the location to which a link list file is output or to change its file name Specify the np option when performing linking only to output a load module file This will shorten link time Description If outout file name is omitted when the p option is specified the link list file nput file name map will be output to the current folder If only the path name is specified in output file name input file name map will be output If both the p and np options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To create a link list file kO map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel pk0O map R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 438 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link list file information specification The link list file information specification opt
161. 8KO Assembler Vx xx RA78KO MAINROUTINE Date xx xxx xx Page 1 Command cF051144 kOmain asm lhRA78K0_ MAINROUTINE Para file In file kOmain asm Obj file kOmain rel Prn file kOmain prn Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 406 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE NAME SAMPM gE KKKKKEKKERKE KEKE KEE KE KEKE KRKEKEKKEKRKEKEKRKEKKK KEKE HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program main routine R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 407 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format lt number of characters Interpretation when omitted It8 Function The lt option specifies the basic number of characters for outputting a horizontal tabulation HT code in the source file replacing it with several blanks Spaces in each list tabulation processing Application Use the lt option to reduce the number of characters per line by reducing the number of blanks per HT code for example when a small number of characters per line has been specified for lists via the lw option Description The range number of characters that can be specified with the It option is 0 to 8 An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified If the number of characters is omitted it is assumed t
162. APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Number of lines on 1 Specify the number of lines on 1 page of list files preprocess list file error list file and cross page reference list file If O is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Tab width Specify the tab width of list files preprocess list file error list file and cross reference list file This corresponds to the It option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box 0 to 8 decimal number 12 Others Other detailed information on compilation are displayed and the configuration can be changed Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before compile processing before compile The following macro names are available as embedded macros processing ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces w
163. Adjust Stack Size dialog box the changes are reflected in sub called by func2 as well int sub int i void func void void func2 void void main void funci func2 ine sub ane i 4 i return i void funcl void int ret i 0 ret sub i void func2 void int ret i 100 ret sub i ASM statements in C source If C source contains ASM statements the stack usage tracer may output the following message W9432 Illegal format in file path name line number If this occurs fix the problem by disabling the code in question using if declarations or the like or commenting it out Calls to indirectly recursive functions If a recursion path consists of multiple functions the stack size may be calculated incorrectly Example Assuming that the frame size of recursive functions func_rec1 func_rec2 is 8 bytes if the recursion depth of func_rec1 func_rec2 is set to 3 in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box then although the stack size of func will be calculated correctly as 8 24 3 the stack size of func2 will be calculated as 8 3 ignoring calls to func_rect1 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 311 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE func rechl int i func _ rec2 int i funci void func2 void void main void funci fune2 J void fune recl ant i j 4
164. All function arguments are given via a register and a function assigns function arguments and automatic variables to a static area The leaf function assigns function arguments and automatic variables from higher addresses to the FEDFH and lower area of the saddr in the description order This saddr area is called common area since this area is shared by the leaf functions of all modules The value of n indicates the size of the common area When n 0 or n is omitted there is no common area The compiler defined macro _STATIC_MODEL is regarded as 1 sreg __sreg keyword can be added to function arguments and automatic variables The function arguments and automatic variables that have an sreg __sreg keyword added are assigned to the saddr area and can be manipulated in 1 bit units By specifying the rk option the function argument and automatic variable except for a static variable in a function are assigned to the saddr area and can be manipulated in 1 bit units R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 374 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Cautions Since arguments and automatic variables are secured statically the contents of arguments and automatic variables of a recursive function may be damaged An error occurs when a recursive function calls itself However when a recursive function is called to where another function has been called no error occurs since the CC78KO
165. Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Variables information file specification The variables information file specification option is as follows ma Description format mafile name mafile name mafile name file name Interpretation when omitted A variables information file is not used Function The ma option specifies the variables information file to be used Application Use the ma option to efficiently allocate variables using a variables functions information file Description Up to 2 file names can be specified A variables information file can be used to specify attributes for variables separate from the C source code See B 7 Variables Information File Generator for details about a variables information file Example of use To allocate variables by using the variables information file info vfi describe as C gt cc78k0 prime c cF051144 mainfo vfi R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 377 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Function information file specification The function information file specification option is as follows mf mf Description format Interpretation when omitted All source are allocated to a common area Output file fin Remark Alphanumeric characters Function The mf option specifies to reference and create function i
166. Batch build 78 83 elk 425 Batch Build dialog box 286 elv 538 Boot flash relink function 468 eoc 481 Browse For Folder dialog box 296 er 320 Build 78 80 era 381 Build mode 73 75 her 320 Build Mode Settings dialog box 284 hex 481 Build tool version 16 lib 424 514 550 Amf 425 481 538 550 C c CC78K0 330 Ast 514 map 425 c RA78KO 387 p 538 C compiler 319 pik 424 550 Category 24 plv 538 Change the build mode 75 poc 481 Change the output file name 29 pra 380 Character String Input dialog box 272 prn 381 538 Clean 85 common CC78K0 376 common RA78K0 420 rel 381 424 514 538 550 sym 481 create 528 vfi 551 Cross reference list 107 A Cross reference list file 100 a CC78K0 351 R d CC78K0 347 d LK78K0 437 Absolute assemble list 117 Active project 71 add 529 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 563 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX C INDEX d RA78K0 419 delete 530 Delete a build mode 76 E e CC78K0 355 e LCNV78KO0 547 e LK78KO 450 e OC78K0 506 e RA78KO 411 Editor panel 264 Error list 108 114 117 Error list file 96 exit 536 F f CC78K0 368 f LCNV78KO0 548 f LK78KO
167. C comments Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To enable C comments select Yes zp on the Allow C format comments property in the Extension category default Figure 2 35 Allow C format comments Property Allow nested kanji character code of source Shit JIS 23 Follow ANSI Standard Ho Interpret intishor as char Ho Interpret long as int Ho Disable an mt extension for function Ho 2 5 6 Use floating point compatible standard input output functions Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel In the Library category if you select Yes on the Use standard library property the Use standard I O library supported floating point data property is displayed To use the standard input output functions which support floating point data sprintf sscanf printf vprintf and vsprintf select Yes Figure 2 36 Use standard library and Use standard I O library supported floating point data Property Use standard library Use rultipler and divider Using standard libraries Using standard librarnes a 2 5 7 Change the setting to use the multiplier and divider Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel In the Library category if you select Yes on the Use standard library property the Use multiplier and divider
168. Change After Change filel00 c filel00 c file100 file100 file200 c C 200 file200 c 4 200 file200 file200 lt 2 gt When the size of the vacant area is larger than that of the file that could not be relocated The memory bank relocation support tool keeps some margin by default common area 1000 bytes bank area 500 bytes during relocation process of files Consequently the size of the vacant area may be larger than that of the file that could not be relocated in the replacement information files In this case on the Property panel from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab in the Margin category set the margins of the common area and bank area to smaller values R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 56 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 3 gt When the total code size is larger than the ROM size Reinforce the optimization by the C compiler and review the source program to reduce the total code size Refer to the reference information file and take a relevant action if functions that satisfy the following conditions are found When the function is not referenced from other files If the relevant function is the global function change it to the static function When the function is not referenced from other files nor from the file in which the function is described Delete the function Caution The function for which above action be taken shall
169. Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before assemble processing before assemble The following macro names are available as embedded macros processing ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before assemble processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after assemble processing after assemble The following macro names are available as embedded macros processing ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling The specified command
170. DIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output file name Specify the load module file name to be output Use the extension Imf If the extension is omitted Imf is automatically added This corresponds to the o option of the linker The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName Imf has been specified Default ProjectName Imf How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Force linking against Select whether to forcibly generate the load module file when an error occurs during linking error This corresponds to the j option of the linker How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Forcibly generates the load module file when an error occurs during linking No Does not generate the load module file when an error occurs during linking 4 Library The detailed information on the library are displayed and the configuration can be changed Using libraries Specify the library file name lib to be used other than the standard libraries Add one file in one line The library files are searched from the library path This corresponds to the b option of the linker The specified library file name is displayed as the subproperty Using libraries number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the but
171. DIX B COMMAND REFERENCE In Command Line In Parameter File 03H 06H 08H ODH OEH 10H Cannot be described Can be described 15H 17H 18H 1BH 7FH However these will appear in the assemble list file as l A single ODH will not be output to the list 01H 02H 04H 05H 07H OBH Can be described Can be described OCH OFH 11H 12H 13H 14H However these will appear in the However these will appear in the assemble 16H 19H 1CH 1DH 1EH 1FH assemble list file as list file as Can be described Cannot be described However these will appear in the end of file assemble list file as l Alphabetic characters Uppercase and lowercase characters Uppercase and lowercase characters are are input as is input as is Other Can be described Can be described Remark If an asterisk on the startup line is not a target for wild card expansion it can be written even if it is not enclosed in Cautions A control instruction TITLE or TT with the same function as the Ih option can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASATITLEA A character string A ASATTA A character string A abbreviated form Example of use To print the title RA78KO_MAINROUTINE in the header of an assemble list file kKOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm 1hRA78K0 MAINROUTINE The contents of kOmain prn is as follows 7
172. EG FE20H Segment size MI DI 310H FBOOH R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2CENESAS Page 436 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link directive file specification The link directive file specification option is as follows q Description format Interpretation when omitted None Function The d option specifies that the specified file is to be input as a link directive file Application When you wish to define a new memory area redefine the default memory area or allocate a segment to a specific address or memory area you will need to create a link directive file Use the d option to input this link directive file to the linker Description An abort error occurs if the file name is omitted Nesting of link directive files is not permitted The number of characters that can be described within a link directive file is unlimited An abort error occurs if the d option is specified two or more times or if two or more file names are specified See CubeSuite 78K0 Coding for details about link directive files Example of use Redefine the default memory area ROM RAM The contents of the link directive file kO dr is as follows MEMORY ROM 0000h 1000h MEMORY RAM OFE20h 1E0h To link the link directive file kO dr describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel dk0O dr R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 437 of 5
173. ESAS Page 31 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 When outputting the public symbol list Figure 2 25 Link List Category For Public Symbol Information Output link list File Yeg Output with Form feed control code Ho Number of lines on 1 page bE If you select Yes default on the Output link list file property the Output with public symbol list property is displayed To output public symbol list to the link list file select Yes kp No is selected by default Remark See 3 3 3 Public symbol list for the public symbol list R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 32 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 Set Compile Options To set options for the compiler select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various compile options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 26 Property Panel Compile Options Tab Property A CA SEkO Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information Yes 4dd to both assembly and abject filelf g Optimization Perform optimization Yes Standard qee Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths O Sistem mclude paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undetinitian 0 Startup Use standard startup routine fes Norrmall Use fited area us
174. FFFFFFFFFFF1O0 gt 0O20000020000FC gt 0601000013F3019A0080D8 020000020000FC 10010600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFO9 10011600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE9 10012600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDO9 L1O0OBFFOOOFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF51 020000020000FC 04C00000000000AF8D 020000020000FC 10C00400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF3C 10C01400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2C Since the 00100 address is not a bank so the code 13F301 9A0080 are written as is to address 00100 Since the 18000H address is a bank it is converted to a flash memory real address and the code visible to address 18000H is overwritten by address OCOOOH The code after the first 10 bytes remains as 00 00 00 AF causing the address value to be shifted At the same time the checksum values of the last byte of each line are also changed The user is not required to make special allowances for this change The example of output in Intel extended hex format bank number CPU address is as follows gt LOOOFOOOFFFFPFFFFFFFFFFPFFFFFPFFFFFFFFFFFFF1O0 20200000 Z0000FC gt 0601000013F3019A0080D8 020000020000FC 10010600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9 10011600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEO9 10012600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDOS 10BFFOOOFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF51 020000021000EC 04800000000000AFCD 020000021000EC 10800400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF7C 10801400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
175. FFFFFFFFFFFFF6C In the case of the bank number CPU address the code 00 00 00 AF visible to address 18000H are written as is to address 18000H 12 Size of void type pointers When the mf option is specified function pointers are 4 bytes and void type pointers are 2 bytes For this reason handling function pointers as void type pointers could result in data loss R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 137 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS 13 Generating function information files When the mf option is specified do the following if warning WO0060 is output a Rebuild the project again If warning W0060 is not output and linking is successful the build has completed successfully b If warning W0060 is still output after the rebuild check the following Make sure that global functions with the same name are not defined in multiple source files Correct the C source files so that definitions do not overlap If there are an descriptions relating to nonexistent files left in the function information file edit this file to remove the descriptions of nonexistent files 14 Device file search order of the C compiler a Paths specified via y option b cc78k0 exe startup path dev c Path where cc78k0 exe was started d The current folder e Paths specified by the PATH environment variable cc 78k0 exe does not reference registry information relating to devices files For
176. File Data Control List File Others Add debug informaton Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the q option H o H H HAHAAHA A H File Information You can set compile options for the C source file by setting the necessary properties in this tab Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Compile Options tab by default 2 When setting assemble options for an assembler source file Select an assembler source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel In the Build category if you select Yes on the Set individual assemble option property the message dialog box Figure 2 73 Message Dialog Box is displayed Figure 2 72 Set individual assemble option Property Figure 2 73 Message Dialog Box Question 00203002 Are you sure you want to set the curent assemble options to the individual assemble options R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 59 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS If you click the Yes button in the dialog box the Individual Assemble Options tab will be displayed Figure 2 74 Property Panel Individual Assemble Options Tab Property aam main asm Property El Debugintormaton Add debug information fes Local symbols info and assembler debugging into El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths U Use who
177. ILD OUTPUT LISTS BANKOO 10001 bytes BANKO1 10001 bytes BANKOZ2 1 bytes BANKO3 bytes BANKO4 bytes BANKOS bytes Item Description Format Number File name Outputs the file name Outputs information in file units Although it also outputs information about assembler source files these are not included as relocation because they contain instructions e g CSEG quasi instructions specifying the allocation destinations Relocation destination Outputs the relocation destination of the file C Relocated to the common area Numeric value Relocated to the bank XX area XX 00 to 15 E Global function name Outputs the name of the global function defined in the file Code size information start Output the total code size per allocation destination 3 8 2 Replacement information file The replacement information file is an auxiliary information file with details about allocation at the area level To configure the replacement information file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category Specify the output destination in the Output folder for replacement information file property and the Replacement information file name property Itis also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files
178. J0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 92 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS This chapter describes format and other aspects of lists output by the build via various commands 3 1 C Compiler The C compiler outputs the following files Assembler source file Error list file Preprocess list file Cross reference list file Remark See B 1 1 I O files for details about input and output files of the C compiler 3 1 1 Assembler source file The assembler source file is an ASCII image list of C source compilation results and is a source file in assembly language that corresponds to the target C source program It can also include the C source to this file as comments by setting the assembler source file creation specification option sa To configure the assembler source file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Compile Options tab In the Assembly File category set the Output an assemble file property to Yes The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property 78K0 C Compiler V 1 x xx Assembler Source Date 2 xx XXX xXxxx Time 3 xx xx xx Command In file gt Asm file Para file 4 cF051144 prime c sa 5 prime c 6 prime asm
179. JIS AS AKANJ I CODEAEUC AS AKANJ I CODEANONE Kanji code can also be specified by using the environmental variable LANF78K Example of use To interpret the kanji code as EUC code describe as C gt ra78k0 kOmain asm cF051144 ze R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 416 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device file search path specification The device file search path specification option is as follows ey Description format Interpretation when omitted The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 Path registered in the device file installer 2 Path by which the ra78k0 exe was started up 3 Current folder 4 The environmental variable PATH Function The y option reads a device file from the specified path Application Use the y option to specify a path where a device file exists Description An abort error occurs if something other than a path name is specified after the y option An abort error occurs if the path name is omitted after the y option The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the y option 2 Path registered in the device file installer 3 Path by which the RA78KO was started up 4 Current folder 5 The environmental variable PATH R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1
180. Link Options Object Convert Options Variables Relocation Options Start build all Friday February 18 Z011 6 29 17 PM Start build sample DefaultBuild gt sre main c gt DefaultBuild sample 1mf gt DefaultBuild sample hex Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 Ended Success 1l Projects Failed 0 Projects Friday February 18 2011 6 29 18 PM EOF allMessages Rapid Build Build Tool The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Select Windows start gt gt All programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite DISCONNECT R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 141 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Menu bar Displays the menu relates to build a Project The Project menu shows menu items to operate the project and others Add New Subproject Closes the current project and opens the Create Project dialog box to create a new project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Open Project Closes the current project and opens the Open Project dialog box to open the existing project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation me
181. Microcontroller AS CAFSKO Build Tool es FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool lh File Fi Startup e boot c ar link_boot dr R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 63 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Set the build options for the boot area project Select the build tool node on the project tree and set each of the build options on the Property panel a Set variables relocation options Set the variables relocation options to generate a variablesinformation file and use it to allocate variables Select the Variables Relocation Options tab In the Output File category set the Output variables information file property to Yes to generate an empty variables information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property Remark Ifa variables information file with the same name already exists the build will be configured to use it Figure 2 79 Output variables information file Property in Boot Area Output variables information file Jutput folder for vanables information file Variables information file name 2 rojecthl amez vii Set the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property to change the o
182. NDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description Open with Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the application to open the file Stack Usage Tracer window This is the first window to be open when the stack usage tracer is launched Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists This dialog box is used to display a list of functions for which the stack dialog box usage tracer could not obtain stack information functions for which information was changed intentionally and functions for which the stack usage tracer forcibly set an additional margin Adjust Stack Size dialog box This dialog box is used to change the information for the selected function Open dialog box This dialog box is used to open an existing stack size specification file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 140 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This is the first window to be open when CubeSuite is launched This window is used to control the user program execution and open panels for the build process sample CubeSuite Project Tree 2 E start E ag x aS ic a yd J _ Project Tree 20 8 a LB sample Project uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool eij Code Generator Design Tool CA78KO Build Tool S gt 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool gt Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File g Build tool generated files im
183. NDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE APPENDIX C INDEX How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electricity logic circuits and microcontrollers Conventions Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation XXX Overscore over pin or signal name Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution Information requiring particular attention Remark Supplementary information Numeric representation Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal OXXXXX Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such Integrated Development Environment User s Manual R20UTO548E Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice Be sure to use the latest edition of each document when designing All trademarks or registered trademarks in this document are the property of their respective owners MEMO MEMO MEMO TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 12 1 1 Overview 12 1 2 Features 13 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 14 2 1 Overview 14 2 1 1 Create a load module 14 2 1 2 Create a user library 15 2 2 Change the Build Tool Version 16 2 3 Set Build Target Files 17 2 3 1 Seta startup routine 17 2 3 2 Add a file to a project 19 2 3 3 Remove a file from a pr
184. New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add a new subproject to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file exten sion Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 142 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Sets selected project or sub Set the selected project or subproject as an active project project as Active Project Close Project Closes the current project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Save Project Saves the configuration information of the current project to the project file Save Project As Opens the Save Project As dialog box to save the configuration information of the current project to the project file with another name Remove from Project Removes the s
185. OREN Folder with Explorer ee Program Analyze Add a File Save Project and Development Tools as Package Rename Property Remark Ifthe included source files are not built after editing the header file and running the build update the file dependencies see 2 3 7 Update file dependencies R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 80 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Run a build of all build target files hereafter referred to as rebuild Running a rebuild is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project See 2 15 4 Change the file build target project 1 When running a rebuild of the entire project Click on the toolbar 2 When running a rebuild of the active project Select the project and then select Rebuild active project from the context menu Figure 2 111 Rebuild active project Item T Gii Wi oy m D A HH H Code Generator K A Clean sample A CASK Build Tor 2s FSKO Simulator 0 S OREN Folder with Explorer ey Program Analyze dd a 9 File Save Project and Development Tools as Package Rename bik Property 2 16 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations CubeSuite has a function that a build is started automatically when one of the following events occurs hereafter referred to as rapid build When C source files assembler source files head
186. OW REFERENCE b All Functions Display a list of functions that can be added as functions called by the selected function callee functions This area generally displays functions that can be added in the following format function name total stack size frame size additional margin Remarks 1 If the function that can be added is written in assembly language or it is a system library func tion then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe function that can be added is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name 3 Ifthe function that can be added includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an ampersand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe function that can be added is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name c Button area Add Adds the function selected in All Functions to Callee Functions If no function is selected in All Functions then this button will be grayed out Delete Deletes the function selected in Callee Functions from Callee Functions If no function is selected in Callee Functions then this button will be grayed out Remark Functions can only be deleted from Callee Functions if the function name ends with a plus sign functions added fro
187. PENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Not use sign extended Select whether to perform char related calculations without pan integral extension calculation for char This corresponds to the qc option of the compiler Default Yes qc How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qc Performs char related calculations without pan integral extension Note No Performs char related calculations with pan integral extension Interpret char to Select whether to interpret the char without qualifier as a unsigned char unsigned char This corresponds to the qu option of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qu Interprets the char without qualifier as a unsigned char No Does not specify interpreting the char without qualifier as a unsigned char Optimize branch Select whether to optimize branch instructions instruction This corresponds to the qj option of the compiler Default Yes qj How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qj Optimizes branch instructions Does not specify optimizing branch instructions R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 177 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Replace fixed code to library Size precedence optimization Select whether to replace the fixed code with the library This corresponds to the ql option of the compiler Default Yes Do not replace ql1 How to change
188. Page 21 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 10 Project Tree Panel After Adding Folder src Project Tree PS uPD SFO5868_46 Microcontroller A Fin Configurator Design Tool Ay CA7BKO Build Tool che FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool jl File Mai Bam ani sub asm de link dr Remark The location of the file added below the File node depends on the current file display order setting See 2 3 6 Change the file display order for the method of changing the file display order Cautions 1 If the paths differ you can add source files with the same name Note however that if the setting of the output file name is left as the default the output files will have the same name which will prevent the build from running correctly for example when adding D sample1 func c and D sample2 func c the default output file name for these files is both func rel To avoid this problems set the output file name for each of those files to a different name with the individual build options for the source files Changing the name of the C source file is made with the Object file name property in the Output File category from the Individual Compile Options tab Changing the name of the assembler source file is made with the Object file name property in the Output File category from the Individual Assemble Options tab See 2 12 2 Set build options at the fil
189. RESS CODE 0000H 0002H CSEG AT CODE SAMPM 0000H 0002H gap 0002H 00O7EH CSEG 0080H 0020H CSEG CSEG SAMPM 0080H 0013H CSEG SAMPS 0093H 001AH gap OOADH 7F53H MEMORY LRAM BASE ADDRESS FACOH SIZE 0020H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SIZE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS gap MEMORY RAM BASE ADDRESS FBOOH SIZE 0500H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SIZE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS gap FBOOH 03H DATA FE20H 0003H DSEG AT DATA SAMPM FE20H 0003H gap FE23H OODDH gap Not Free Area FFOOH 0100H R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 440 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE kd nkd Description format nkd Interpretation when omitted kd Function The kd option outputs a link directive into a link list file The nkd option disables the kd option Application Use the kd option to output a link directive file into a link list file Description If the nkm nkp and nkl options are all specified the link list file cannot be output If the nkm option is specified the link directive file cannot be output into a link list file If both the kd and nkd options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the np option is specified the kd option is invalid Example of use To output a link directive file into a link list file kO map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel dk0O
190. Restriction 0 and 20 to 32767 decimal number Tab width Specify the tab width of the list file This corresponds to the lt option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to 8 decimal number R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 202 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Header title Specify the header of the assemble list file A string containing double byte characters and single byte spaces can be specified This corresponds to the Ih option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Directly enter to the text box Up to 60 single byte characters 80 double byte characters 5 Others Other detailed information on assembly are displayed and the configuration can be changed Kanji character code of Select the Kanji character code of the source source This corresponds to the zs ze and zn options of the assembler Shift_JIS zs Select from the drop down list Unspecified Interprets the source as not containing kanji codes zn Use Self programming Select whether to use self programming This corresponds to the self option of the assembler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes self Even if th
191. S R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 534 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format help h Abbreviated form Function The help command outputs a help message on the display Description The help message is a list of explanations of the subcommands Specify the help command or the option to see these when executing the librarian Example of use To output a help message on the display describe as Subcommands create add delete replace pick list help exit Usage subcommand option masterLBF option transaction option transaction OMFname LBFname modulename lt create gt create masterLBF transaction lt add gt add masterLBF transaction lt replace gt replace masterLBF transaction lt pick gt pick masterLBF modulename lt list gt list option masterLBF modulename option p output public symbol np no output public symbol o filename specify output file name lt delete gt delete masterLBF modulename R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 535 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format exit e Abbreviated form Function The exit subcommand exits the librarian Description Use this subcommand to exit the libraria
192. SFOS88_ 48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool ET Code Generator Design Tool A CATEKO Build Tool cas FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Bs File ae Startup c_ Alash c de link_flash dr R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 66 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Set the build options for the flash area project Select the build tool node on the project tree and set each of the build options on the Property panel a Set variables relocation options Set the variables relocation options to generate a variables information file and use it to allocate variables Select the Variables Relocation Options tab In the Output File category set the Output variables information file property to Yes to generate an empty variables information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property Remark Ifa variables information file with the same name already exists the build will be configured to use it Figure 2 86 Output folder for variables information file Property in Flash Area Output variables information file Jutput folder for vanables information file Variables information file name 2 rojecthl amez vii Set the Output folder for var
193. Set the margin for the common area on the Margin for common area property in decimal numbers The range that can be specified for the value is 65536 to 65536 default 1000 Set the margin for the bank area on the Margin for bank XX area property in decimal numbers The range that can be specified for the value is 65536 to 65536 default 500 This property is displayed corresponding to the numbers of banks XX 00 to 15 Remark If a positive value is specified on the above property each area is relocated and considered to become small by the specified value as a margin If a negative value is specified each area is relocated and considered to become large by the specified value as a margin Set the relocation destination for each file Specify the relocation destination for each C source file Select a C source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the project tree Select the relocation destination on the Select common bank area property in the Memory Bank category You can select any of items below R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 54 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS No specification The memory bank relocation support tool automatically determines the optimum area and relocates the program code there Common area Relocates the program codes to the common area in build processing Bankxx Relocates the program codes to bankXX in build processing This item is
194. Size dialog box or a stack size specification file The stack usage tracer has not acquired any stack information for this function Other than the above a Context menu Select a function in this area and then right click with the mouse The context menu described below appears Adjust Stack Size Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function Sort List by Changes the function display order in the list display area Sort by function name Icon Type Sort by icon display priority High Jj to Low H Stack Size Sort by total stack size Additional Margin Sort by additional margin 5 Message display area Display operation logs of the stack usage tracer R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 309 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Caution Assembly files The stack usage tracer calculates total stack size by collecting information from the assembly files output by the C compiler as intermediate files with debugging information added As a consequence in order to obtain stack information at the function level using the stack usage tracer it is necessary to configure the compiler options to output Assembly files with debugging information Timing of static analysis The stack usage tracer performs static analysis upon startup and displays the calling relationship betw
195. Suite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE rs nr Description format Interpretation when omitted nr Function The rs option specifies to assign an static auto variable automatically to the saddr area The nr option disables the rs option Application Use the rs option to assign a static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether sreg has been declared Description Variables to be assigned change depending on the value of n and the specification of m Variable Types to Be Assigned to saddr Area When n 1 char unsigned char When n 2 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used When n 4 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers Structure union array All variables The sreg declared variable is assigned to the saddr area regardless of the rs option specification The variable assigned to the saddr area by specifying this option is handled in a similar way to a sreg declared auto variable Example of use To assign the char or unsigned char type static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether sreg has been declared describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 rs1 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 339 of 570 Apr 01 2011 C
196. TER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 8 Memory Bank Relocation Support Tool The memory bank relocation support tool outputs the following files Function information file Replacement information file Object information file Reference information file 3 8 1 Function information file The function information file contains information for allocating C source files to the optimum area common area or bank area To configure the function information file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab In the Output File category select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property and then select Yes on the Output function information file property Specify the output destination in the Output folder for function information file property and the Function information file name property It is also shown on the project tree under the File node 1 Oxxxx 78K0O Series C Compiler 1 Vx xx Function Information File 2 file1000 3 c 3 C 4 1000 5 file1000 3 1 asm2 asm 5 bank0_1 1 asm3 asm 5 common2 1 asm2 asml 5 bDankl 1 l asm3 asm2 5 bank2 1 6 Code Size Information COMMON 25707 bytes R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 121 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BU
197. TRN or EXTBIT Undefined symbol Symbol reference format Display the symbol reference format left aligned EXT External reference symbol declared by EXTRN SADDR attribute EXTB External reference symbol declared by EXTBIT saddr bit PUB External reference symbol declared by PUBLIC Blank Local symbol segment name macro name module name Undefined symbol Cm Defined segment name Displays a segment name that a symbol is defined left aligned Definition reference line Displays the definition reference line number number Definition line xxxxx Reference line xxxxx A A 1 blank EXTRN declaration EXTBIT declaration PUBLIC declaration xxxxx 3 2 5 Error list An error list stores the error messages output when the assembler is started up PASS1 Start 1 ERROR ASM 2 26 RA78KO 3 error 5 Illegal operand 1 ERROR ASM 2 32 RA78KO 3 error 5 Illegal operand PASS2 Start 1 ERROR ASM 2 26 RA78KO 5 Illegal operand 1 ERROR ASM 2 29 RA78KO 5 Undefined symbol reference DTSA 1 ERROR ASM 2 29 RA78KO 4 5 Illegal expression 1 ERROR ASM 2 32 RA78KO 5 Illegal operand 1 ERROR ASM 2 37 RA78KO 5 Undefined symbol reference F 1 ERROR ASM 2 37 RA78KO 4 5 Illegal expression R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 108 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number
198. The Il option specifies the number of lines per page in each type of list file Application Use the ll option to change the number of lines per page in each type of list file Description The range number of lines that can be specified with the Il option is 20 to 65535 If Il0 is specified no page breaks will be made If the number of lines is omitted the number of lines per page is 66 lines 65535 lines in the case of console output If the list file is not specified the Il option is invalid Example of use To specify 20 as the number of lines per page in the cross reference list file prime xrf describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c x 1120 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 362 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format lt number of characters Interpretation when omitted It8 Function The lt option specifies the basic number of characters for outputting a horizontal tabulation HT code in the source file replacing it with several blanks Spaces in each list tabulation processing Application Use the lt option to reduce the number of characters per line by reducing the number of blanks per HT code for example when a small number of characters per line has been specified for lists via the lw option Description The range number of characters that can be specified with the It option
199. The functions for processing by the following type specifications are available for the 78KO extended functions Description The type specifications of the z option is as follows Po The characters after before the line feed code are interpreted as a comment Interprets the kanji code in comments as EUC Interprets comments as not containing kanji codes sd char unsigned char type argument and return value are not int extended R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 370 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE te Functions not in the ANSI standard are invalid The portion of functions in the ANSI standard are valid Specifically the following tasks are performed The following are no longer reserved words callt callf noauto norec sreg bit ooolean asm endasm The trigraph sequence 3 character representation is valid The compiler defined macro __STDC ___is regarded as 1 The following warning is output for a int type bit field CC78KO warning W0787 Bit field type is not int If w2 is specified for the qc zp zc zi zl options the following warnings are output CC78KO warning W0029 QC option is not portable CC78KO warning W0031 ZP option is not portable CC78KO warning W0032 ZC option is not portable CC78KO warning W0036 ZI option is not portable CC78KO warning W0037 ZL option is not portable If w2 is speci
200. Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE On chip debug specification The on chip debug specification option is as follows gO gO Description format go size Interpretation when omitted On chip debug is not used Function The go option specifies whether on chip debug is used or not Application Use the go option to change the size of the debug monitor area Description If the size is omitted it is assumed that 256 has been specified See QB MINI2 On Chip Debug Emulator with Programming Function U18371EJ for details about the size of the debug monitor area An abort error occurs if something other than a numerical value is specified When the go option is specified the area of addresses 02H to 03H and the area from 8FH to the specified size 1 are the debug monitor area and segments cannot be allocated there An error occurs if this option is specified for a device that does not have an on chip debug function Example of use Reserve addresses 8FH to 18FH 256 bytes 1 byte as the debug monitor area C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel go256 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 461 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Security ID specification The Security ID specification option is as follows gi gi Description format gisecurity ID Interpretation when omitted A security ID is not set Functio
201. WINDOW REFERENCE Select the type of the static variable to be allocated in the saddr area This corresponds to the rs option of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Size of char rs1 Yes Size of char short int rs2 Yes Size of char short int long rs4 Yes Structure union array rsm Yes Size of char and structure union array rsim Yes Size of char short int and structure union array rs2m Yes Size of char short int long and structure union array rs Allocates char and unsigned char types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short
202. XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0 error F4006 File not found sample lmf Program aborted In the above example a non existent load module file is specified An error occurs and the object converter aborts the object conversion 2 A non existent object convert option is specified C gt o0c78k0 k0O 1lmf a 78K0 Object Converter Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0 error F4018 Option is not recognized a Please enter OC78K0 if you want help messages Program aborted In the above example a non existent object convert option is specified An error occurs and the object converter aborts the object conversion R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 497 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set object convert options from CubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Object Convert Options tab You can set the various object convert options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 32 Property Panel Object Convert Option Tab Property A CAFOKO Property El Hex File Output hes file Yes Output folder for hes file 2B UildM odeN ame Hex file name FrojectN ame hex Hex fi
203. Yes Size of char short int long and structure union array rs Allocates char and unsigned char types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Does not allocate static variables to the saddr area The detailed information on list files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output preprocess list Select whether to output the preprocess file file This corresponds to the p option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Sel
204. a cannot be directly called To solve this execution jumps to the branch table in the flash area Execute the jump instruction to the relevant function from that table and jump to the intended function Figure B 9 From Boot Area to Flash Area In boot area In flash area void void func_rom1 void func flashi void void void func_rom2 void fung flash2 void fune Flashi func flash Execution jumps to the branch table of Branch table flash area br 11 fine flesh br It Tune flash2 In the same manner as functions this is relevant to referencing external variables A global variable defined in the flash area cannot be referenced from the boot area Therefore an external variable of the same name can be defined in both the boot area and flash area Each of these external variables is referenced only from the respective areas To call function in the boot area from the flash area When a function in the boot area is called from the flash area the contents of the boot area are not changed Therefore a function in the boot area can be directly called from the flash area R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 470 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 10 From Flash Area to Boot Area In boot area In flash area void void func_roml void func _flashl void func _rom2 void func _rom2 void void func flash2 void A function
205. a is file name generated This corresponds to the zf option of the linker If this field is blank a link error occurs Be sure to specify the boot area load module file name If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different When this property is specified the setting of the Security ID property in the Device category form Common Options tab is invalid How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters 6 Message The detailed information on messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed Warning level Select the warning display level under linking This corresponds to the w option of the linker Particular Outputs detailed warning messages output w2 7 Stack The detailed information on the stack are displayed and the configuration can be changed Generate stack solution Select whether to generate a stack solution symbol symbol This corresponds to the s option of the linker If a C source file is added to the project and Yes is selected in the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category from the Compile Options tab this property is always
206. a library file is specified for input the module to which an input object module file refers is retrieved from the library and handled as an input module 3 Determination of location addresses for input segments The linker determines location addresses for each segment of an input module If location attributes for a segment are specified in the source file the segment is located according to those attributes The linker can also specify location attributes in the link directive file of the linker 4 Correction of object codes When location addresses are buried in object codes the linker corrects the object code according to the location address determined in 3 above B 3 3 Method for manipulating 1 Linker startup The following two methods can be used to start up the linker a Startup from the command line X path name gt 1k78K0 Aoption object module file name Aoption path name Current folder name Ik78k0 Command name of the linker R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 425 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE option Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the linker When specifying two or more link options separate the options with a blank space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the link options See B 3 4 Option for details about link options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation
207. a to allocate the members consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address No Inserts the align data to allocate the members consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 247 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Allocate automatic variables to saddr area Select the type of the automatic variable to be allocated in the saddr area This corresponds to the rk option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No on the Use static model property in the Memory Model category from the Compile Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Size of char rk1 Yes Size of char short int rk2 Yes Size of char short int long rk4 Yes Structure union array rkm Yes Size of char and structure union array rk1m Yes Size of char short int and structure union array rk2m Yes Size of char short int long and structure union array rk Allocates char and unsigned char types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigne
208. ace tabs are replaced by a single white space character CENESAS Page 97 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS ltem Description Format Number C source file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted c is attached as the file type extension Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 13 on the next line Error list file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted cer is attached Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 13 on the next line 7 Parameter file contents Outputs the parameter file contents Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 13 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character 8 C source This is the input C source image Contents after column 80 are not wrapped to the next line 9 Error message number Outputs error numbers in the nnnn format F is output if is an abort error E if it is a fatal error C if is an Internal error and W if it is a warning nnnn the error number is displayed as a 4 digit decimal number no zero suppression O lt Error message Outputs error messages Contents after column 80 are not wrapped to the next line lt Target device for this compiler Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file 12 D
209. acro ProjectName Replaces with the project name This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property is selected Default ProjectName hex How to change Directly enter to the text box Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 215 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Hex file format Select the format of the hex file to be generated This corresponds to the k option of the object converter This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property is selected Default Intel expanded hex format kie How to change Select from the drop down list estriction Intel standard hex Specify the Intel standard hex format as the format ki format of the hex file to be generated Intel expanded hex Specify the Intel expanded hex format as the format kie format of the hex file to be generated Motorola S type Specify the Motorola S type format standard format standard address as the format of the hex file to be address km generated Motorola S type Specify the Motorola S type format 32 bit format 32 bit address address as the format of the hex file to be kme generated Expanded Tektronix hex Specify the expanded Tektronix hex format as format kt the format of the hex file to be generated R Select whether to split up the file into separate hex format files one for the boot area and one for other areas wh
210. al axis are specified at the same time Table B 7 Precedence of Assemble Options Location marked with NG If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example The Iw and lf options are invalid C gt ra78k0O cF051144 kOmain asm np lw80 1f Location marked with A If all three of the options in the horizontal axis are specified at the same time the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example Ifthe nka nks and nkx options are specified at the same time the p option Is invalid C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm p nka nks nkx Blank area If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is valid As with the o no options if two options for which n can be added to the beginning of the option name are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example The no option is specified after the o option so the o option is invalid and the no option is valid C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm o no Options not described in Table B 7 Precedence of Assemble Options are not particularly affected by other options However if the help specification option is specified all of other option specifications become invalid R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 386 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device type specification The device type specificat
211. alue of the property having the same name contained in the corresponding tab will be changed accordingly Category from Common Options Tab Corresponding Tab Frequently Used Options for Compile category Compile Options tab Frequently Used Options for Assemble category Assemble Options tab Frequently Used Options for Link category Link Options tab Frequently Used Options for Object Convert category Object Convert Options tab R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 161 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 4 Property Panel Common options Tab Property A CA SEO Property El Build Hode Build mode El Output File Type andPath Output file type Intermediate file output folder El Frequently Used Options for Compie Perform optimization Additional include paths Sistem mclude paths Macro definition Frequently Used Options for Assemble Additional include paths Sistem include paths Macro definition Frequently Used UO ptions for Link Using libraries Additional library paths Output folder Output fle name El El DefaultB uild Execute Module Load Module File 4B uildM ode ames fes Standard qee Additional include pathe O System tclide pathe O Macro definition 0 Additional include paths 0 Sistem include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Using libranes O Additional library paths 0 Build ode anes 4Projecth ame s Init Frequently Use
212. ame If this is blank the function information file is not output This property is not displayed when No in the Output function information file property is selected Default ProjectName fin How to change Directly enter to the text box Up to 259 characters Specify the folder for saving the replacement information file Output folder for replace ment information file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 228 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Replacement information Specify the replacement information file name file name Use the extension txt If the extension is omitted txt is automatically added The following macro nam
213. ample Build Mode Settings Batch Build Build Option List 2 When running a clean of the active project Select the project and then select Clean active project from the context menu Figure 2 119 Clean active project Item I E sample Project JE oFO7aF0568 48 H A Pin Configurator i FH Code aks i LA Clean sample A CASED Build To em F8KO Simulator E Open Folder with Explorer Program Analyze add Ei File H Build sample Ty FE Save Project and Development Tools as Package E ale Rename Property R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 86 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 Estimate the Stack Capacity To estimate the stack capacity use the the stack usage tracer The stack usage tracer performs a static analysis and displays the functions called by a function in a tree format as well as stack information for each function function name total stack size frame size additional margin and file name in list format 2 17 1 Starting and exiting To start the stack usage tracer from the Main window select the Tool menu gt gt Startup Stack Usage Tracer After the stack usage tracer finishes starting up it will display the function call relationship and stack information for each function in the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window Figure 2 120 Starting Up Stack Usage Tracer el sample S
214. an be changed This category is not displayed for library projects R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 167 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output hex file Select whether to output the hex file This corresponds to the o option of the object converter Output folder for hex file Specify the folder for saving the hex file This corresponds to the o option of the object converter If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Hex file name Specify the hex file name This corresponds to the o option of the object converter The extension can be freely specified The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name This property is displayed only when Yes in
215. an set the specified order of the paths to the compiler To change the display order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the path names Remarks 1 Move the mouse cursor over a file name to display a tooltip with the absolute path of that file 2 Newly added system include paths are added next to the last path of the list 3 When the path names are dragged and dropped the multiple path names which are next to each other can be selected together b Button R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 278 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Moves the selected path to down Remark Note that above buttons are disabled when any path is not selected Function buttons OK Sets the specified order of the paths to the compiler as the display order in the Path list dis olay area and closes this dialog box Cancels the specified order of the paths and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 279 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is being edited on the Editor panel Remark The target file name is displayed on the title bar Figure A 31 File Save Settings Dialog Box main c Save Settings Encode i k Japanese Shift J15 w New line code 2 keep cu
216. and category node is selected Note that rename is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 151 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu 1 When the Project node is selected Build active project Rebuild active project Clean active project Open Folder with Explorer Add Subproject Add New Subproject Add File Add New File Add New Category Set selected project as Active Project Save Project and Development Tools as Package Paste Rename Property Builds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not built Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuilds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not rebuilt Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Cleans the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not cleaned Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Opens the folder that contains the project file of the selected project with Explorer Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects and files to the project Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to the project Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to the project Opens t
217. and the configuration can be changed Select whether to build the selected file Set as build target Default How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Builds the selected file Does not build the selected file Set individual compile option Select whether to set a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected C source file This property is displayed only when a C source file is selected on the Project Tree panel and Yes is selected in the Set as build target property How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Sets a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected C source file Does not set a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected C source file Set individual assemble option Select whether to set an assemble option that differs from the project settings to the selected assembler source file This property is displayed only when an assembler source file is selected on the Project Tree panel and Yes is selected in the Set as build target property How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Sets a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected assembler source file Does not set a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected assembler source file File type Display the type of the selected file Display th
218. annot be used for file names and path names in parameter files 4 Using assembler source as output When a C source file contains descriptions that use assembly language such as asm blocks or _ asm statements the load module file creation procedure sequence is compile assemble and then link Note the following if you want to use the C compiler to first output an assembly source file and then assemble it rather than directly output an object file as with files written in assembly language and the like If the C source contains asm blocks and __ asm statements specify the a or sa option to enable assembly descriptions and assemble the output assembler source When using CubeSuite from the Property panel on the Compile Options tab in the Asseembly File category for the Output an assemble file property specify to output assembler source files or for sources for which only assembler source files are output on the Individual Compile Options tab in the Asseembly File category set the Output an assemble file property to output assembler source files When using CubeSuite the assembler is started regardless of compile options o no when the output of assembler source files is specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 132 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS 5 Generation of stack decision symbols specification option s To secure a stack area specify t
219. ard build option see 2 15 8 Set the current build options as the standard for the project is set to the default value when the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category is changed Default When selecting Yes zf on the Output objects for flash property Yes For flash area When selecting No on the Output objects for flash property Yes Normal How to change Select from the drop down list from the Select from the drop down list down list Restriction Yes Normal Links the object module file provided with the compiler This item is not displayed when Yes zf in the Output objects for flash property is selected Yes For boot area Links the object module file for the boot area provided with the compiler This item is not displayed when Yes zf in the Output objects for flash property is selected Yes For flash area Links the object module file for the flash area provided with the compiler This item is not displayed when No in the Output objects for flash property is selected No Does not link the object module file provided with the compiler R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 181 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use fixed area used by Select whether to use the fixed area RAM used by standard libraries brk sork malloc calloc standard library realloc free exit rand srand div Idiv strtok atof strtod mathemat
220. area Specifies 12 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 13 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 14 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 15 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 16 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Page 245 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use static model Specify the extension method when the static model is used extended extension This corresponds to the zm option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Use static model property in the Memory Model category from Compile Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Only use common area for Uses only the common area for args and auto vars zm1 arguments and auto variables Yes Only use saddr area for args Uses only the saddr area for and auto vars zm2 arguments and auto variables Does not use the static model extension Use prologue epilogue Select whether to use a library for the prologue epilogue routines of a function library This corresponds to the zd option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes zf in the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category from the Compile Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the general option How
221. ariable LIB78KO Current path if environmental variable LIB78KO is not specified Function The i option specifies that a library file is to be input from the specified path Application Use the i option to search a library file from a certain path Description The i option is only valid when a library file name is specified by the b option without including a path name Two or more i options can be specified Two or more path names can be specified at once by separating them with A space cannot be entered before or after Up to 64 path names can be specified per link If two or more path names are specified library files will be searched in a specified sequence An error will not occur even if no library file exists in the specified path An abort error occurs if the path name is omitted If a library file is specified by the b option without including a path name the linker will search paths in the following sequence 1 The path specified by the i option 2 Path specified by environmental variable LIB78KO 3 Current path Caution Anerror occurs if a library file with the specified name does not exist in any of these paths Example of use To search and read a library file from folders C lib1 and C lib2 in that order describe as R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 452 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To read a library
222. ariable to a register and assigns it to the saddr area n 1 2 The scope assigning a register variable differs depending on the value of nas follows fnis omitted it is interpreted as n 2 When n 1 Assigns norec argument and auto variable to the saddr area When n 2 Assigns norec argument auto variable and register variable to the saddr area po Optimizes branch instructions Assigns the optimization options automatically according to the precedence of speed code size The assigned option differs depending on the value of nas follows When nis omitted it is interpreted as n 2 When n 1 Speed precedence It is assumed that the qcjvw option has been specified When n 2 Default It is assumed that the qcjlvw option has been specified When n 3 Code size precedence It is assumed that the qcjl4vw option has been specified When n 4 Code size precedence It is assumed that the qcjl5vw option has been specified Outputs the object using HL B This type is valid only when the sm option is specified Outputs the object using HL bit w n Designs for the effective use of the registers by changing the execution order in an expression and n 1 2 outputs an efficient code i e changing the execution order of the right subexpression and left subexpression in an expression with two terms Consequently the results of execution may differ depending on whether this option is added this is
223. ark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 41 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 1 Add a user library Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Adding a user library is made with the Using libraries property in the Library category Figure 2 46 Using libraries Property Additional library paths Additional library paths O System library paths System library paths 0 If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 47 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Text uzer lib Enter the library file name in Text with one name per line You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 64 line If you click the OK button the entered library files are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 48 Using libraries Property After Setting Library Files Using hbrarnes 1 user lib ystem lbraries L Additional library paths Additional library paths O System library paths System library paths U To change the library files you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Using libraries property in the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Commo
224. as replace k0 lib m2 rel lt Before module replacement gt kO lib ome lt After module replacement gt kO lib Because the new module m2 is registered after the module m2 in the library file is deleted m2 is last in order in the library file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 531 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format pickAlibrary file nameA Amodule name A A pAlibrary file nameA Amodule name A A Abbreviated form Function The pick subcommand retrieves a specified module from an existing library file Description The retrieved module becomes an object module file with the file name under which it was registered in the library file An error occurs if the specified module does not exist in the library file If an error occurs processing is interrupted However if an error occurs when two or more modules are specified the modules retrieved before the module which caused the error become valid and are saved onto a disk Example of use To retrieve module m2 from the library file kO lib describe as pick kO 1ib m2 rel lt Before module retrieval gt kO lib lt After module retrieval gt kO lib m2 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 532 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format list Aoption Alibrary file
225. as Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers office equip
226. as for the absolute assemble list file If the output file name is omitted when the e option is specified the output file name will be assemble list file name elv If only the primary name of the output file name is specified the list converter will add elv to the file name as the file type and output the file If the drive name is omitted when the e option is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive If both the e and ne options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To create an error list file sSample elv describe as C gt lcenv78k0 kOmain prn esample elv The contents of the error list file sample elv is as follows RA78KO warning W6701 Load module file is older than object module file kOmain I1mf kOmain rel Passl start RA78KO error F6105 Segment name is not found is load module file DATA R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 547 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Parameter file specification The parameter file specification option is as follows f Description format Interpretation when omitted Options or input file names can only be input from the command line Function The f option inputs options and input file names from a specified file Application Use the f option when the information required to start up the list converter w
227. at the file level 58 2 13 Prepare for Using On chip Debugger 61 2 14 Prepare for Implementing Boot flash Relink Function 63 2 14 1 Prepare the build target files 63 2 14 2 Set the boot area project 63 2 14 3 Set the flash area project 66 2 15 Make Settings for Build Operations 70 2 15 1 Set the link order of files 70 2 15 2 Change the file build order of subprojects 71 2 15 3 Display a list of build options 71 2 15 4 Change the file build target project 71 2 15 5 Adda build mode 73 2 15 6 Change the build mode 75 2 15 7 Delete a build mode 76 2 15 8 Set the current build options as the standard for the project 77 2 16 Runa Build 78 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files 80 2 16 2 Runa build of all files 81 2 16 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations 81 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes 83 2 16 5 Compile assemble individual files 84 2 16 6 Stop running a build 85 2 16 7 Save the build results to a file 85 2 16 8 Delete intermediate files and generated files 85 2 17 Estimate the Stack Capacity 87 2 17 1 Starting and exiting 87 2 17 2 Check the call relationship 88 2 17 3 Check the stack information 89 2 17 4 Check unknown functions 90 2 17 5 Change the frame size 91 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 93 3 1 C Compiler 93 3 1 1 Assembler source file 93 3 1 2 Error list file 96 3 1 3 Preprocess list
228. ate library option is specified C gt 1b78k0 a R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 518 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Librarian Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78KO error F5018 Option is not recognized z Usage LB78KO options In the above example a non existent create library option is specified An error occurs and the librarian aborts the librarian execution 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set create library options from CubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Create Library Options tab You can set the various create library options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 34 Property Panel Create Library Options Tab Property A CASO Property El Output File Output folder Build ode amez Output file name FProjectN amet lib El List File Output list file No Others Output folder Species the folder to which the generated libraries are sawed The following macro names are available as embedded macros buildModeN ame Replaces with the build mode name Common Oo 4 Compile Op 4 Assemble N B 5 4 Option 1 Types The create library options are detailed instructions for the operation of the librarian The types a
229. ategory Figure 2 21 Output file name Property For Library File E Output File lk Ce ATTE Output fle name test lib 2 4 2 Output an assemble list The results of the assembly are output to the assembler list file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel To output the assemble list select Yes p default on the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category Figure 2 22 Output assemble list file Property Output assemble list file Becube list converter Output with assemble list info Yeg Output with symbol list Mo Output with cross reference ligt Mo Output with form feed control code Mo Number of characters imn 1 line 12 Number of lines on 1 page BE Tab width E Header title Remarks 1 See 3 2 2 Assemble list for the assemble list R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 30 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 If you select No np on the Output assemble list file property when performing assembly only to output an object module file you can reduce the assembly time 2 4 3 Output map information Map information information on the location of segments is output to the link list file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output a link list file is made with the Link List category Fig
230. ation file and select Remove from Project from the context menu Figure 2 56 Project Tree Panel After Generating Load Module File Project Tree 2 a A sample Project BE uPDrSF0S88_48 Microcontroller E A Pin Configurator Design Tool j Code Generator Design Tool a EKO Build Tool cee FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File ral Build tool generated Files ima sample Irn map sample rap hex sample hex sym sample sym Fi Startup c_ main c veil sample vi 2 Editing and using an auto generated variables information file Users can edit a variables information file Below is the procedure for editing the generated variables information file in 1 Generating a variables information file automatically and allocating variables and functions by the user and using that file to allocate variables a Edit the variables information file Edit the variables information file generated automatically in 1 Generating a variables information file automatically and allocating variables and functions Remark See 3 7 1 Variables information file for details about the format of the auto generated variables information file Describe the variables information file according to the following format R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 48 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Variable information static variable and const variable variable
231. bcommand processing Specify subcommand Subcommand processing Specify exit subcommand Exit librarian Up to 128 characters can be specified per line If all the required operand data will not fit on 1 line use amp to continue specification on the next line Specification can be continued up to 15 lines b Startup from a subcommand file A subcommand file is a file in which librarian subcommands are stored If a subcommand file is not specified when the librarian is started up multiple subcommands must be specified after appears By creating a subcommand file these multiple subcommand files can all be processed at once A subcommand file can also be used when the same subcommand is specified repeatedly each time library formation is performed When using a subcommand file describe lt before the file name Start up the librarian from a subcommand file as follows X gt 1b78k0A lt subcommand file name Aoption Be sure to add this when specifying a subcommand file subcommano file name File in which subcommands are stored Remark Create the subcommand file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a subcommand file are as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 517 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Subcommand name operand data Subcommand name operand data When repeating one subcommand describe amp at the end of each line to
232. be as C gt cec78k0 cF051144 prime c sa Output example is shown below R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 352 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78K0 C Compiler Vx xx Assembler Source Date xXx XXX XXXX Time xXX XX XX Command CFO051144 prime c sa In file prime c Asm file prime asm Para file SPROCESSOR F051144 SDEBUG SNODEBUGA SKANJICODE SJIS STOL_ INF O3FH 0400H 02H 020H OOH SDGS FIL NAM file 022H OFFFEH USEH 067H DOLE OOH SDGS AUX FIL prime c SDGS MOD NAM prime OOH OFFFEH OOH O77H OOH OOH EXTRN Printi EXTRN _ RTARGO EXTRN isrem EXTRN _putchar PUBLIC mark PUBLIC _ main CODE CSEG _main SDGL 1 14 push hl INF 1 4 push ax INF 1 4 push ax INF 1 4 push ax INF 1 4 push ax gt INF 1 4 movw ax sp INF 2 8 movw hl ax INF 1 4 bf_main line 9 int i prime k count line 10 line 11 count 0 SDGL O 4 mov a 00H 0 INE 2 4 mov hl a count INF 1 4 5 mov hl 1 a count INF 2 8 9 line 12 line 13 for i 0 i lt SIZE i SDGL O 6 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 353 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE mov hl 6 mov hl 7 L0003 mov a hl xch a X mov a hl cmpw ax 014H orl CY Ger
233. beSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Message area Show messages related to folders selected in this dialog box 2 Folder location area Select a folder to set in the caller of the dialog box By default the folder set in the caller is selected Remark When the area is blank or the path which does not exist is entered C Documents and Settings user name My Documents is selected instead Function buttons Make New Folder Creates a new folder in the root of the selected folder The default folder name is New Folder The designated folder path is set to the area that this dialog box is called from R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 297 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area dialog box This dialog box is used to select the variables information file for boot area to set in the caller of the dialog box Figure A 41 Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area Dialog Box Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area o Loki C DefaultBuild My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer 3 File name 4 Atte k Files of type Vanables information file for boot area vf ka The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open gt Pm Function buttons O
234. beSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Help specification The help option is as follows Description format Interpretation when omitted No display Function The option outputs a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the subcommands See these when executing the librarian Description When the option is specified all other options are invalid Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Example of use To output a help message on the display describe as C gt l1b78k0 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 525 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Librarian Vx xx XX XXX xx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation Subcommands create add delete replace pick list help exit Usage subcommand option masterLBF option transaction option transaction OMFname LBFname modulename lt create create masterLBF transaction lt add gt add masterLBF transaction lt delete gt delete masterLBF modulename lt replace gt replace masterLBF transaction lt pick gt pick masterLBF modulename lt list gt list option masterLBF modulename option p output public symbol np no output public symbol o filename specify output file name R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page
235. beSuite and about the main build functions 2 1 Overview This section describes how to create a load module and user library 2 1 1 Create a load module The procedure for creating a load module is shown below 1 2 3 4 5 6 Create or load a project Create a new project or load an existing one Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about creating a new project or loading an existing one Set a build target project Set a build target project see 2 15 Make Settings for Build Operations If there is no subproject the project is always active Remarks 1 If there is no subproject in the project the project is always active 2 When setting a build mode add the build mode see 2 15 5 Add a build mode Set build target files Add or remove build target files and update the dependencies see 2 3 Set Build Target Files Remarks 1 See 2 7 1 Add a user library for the method of adding a user library to the project 2 Also you can set the link order of object module files and library files See 2 15 1 Set the link order of files Specify the output of a load module Select the type of the load module to be generated see 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File Set build options Set the options for the compiler assembler linker and the like see 2 5 Set Compile Options 2 6 Set Assemble Options 2 7 Set Link Options Run a build Run a build see 2 16 Runa Build The f
236. ble Options tab will be changed to Yes kx Set the Output function information file property to Yes to generate an empty function information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the Files node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for function information file property and the Function information file name property Remark If a function information file with the same name already exists the build will be configured to use it Figure 2 62 Output function information file Property Function information file name Output folder for replacement information file Replacement information file name Output folder for object information file Object information file name Output folder for reference information file Reference information file name Project ames fin Buld ode annie Project amez replace tut BuldMHodeN ame 4Projecth ame _objinto bet BuldMH ode ame 2Projecth ame _retinfo bat R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 2rCENESAS Page 52 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 63 Project Tree Panel After Generating Function Information File Project Tree UPDFSFOS4 _ 80 Microcontroller A CATSKO Build Tool ee FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a Q File Fi Startup c_ main c fini sample fin The settings of the output folder and file of the function information file a
237. ble lists and cross reference lists Error list file File containing error information generated during assembling I O files Temporary file File created automatically by the assembler for RAXxxxx n assembly purposes n 1 to 4 Temporary files are deleted when assembling ends B 2 2 Functions 1 Conversion of assembly language into machine language The assembler reads source files and converts them from assembly language files into machine language files B 2 3 Method for manipulating 1 Assembler startup The following two methods can be used to start up the assembler a Startup from the command line X path name gt ra78k0 Aoption source file name Aoption ra78k0 Command name of the assembler option Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the assembler When specifying two or more assemble options separate the options with a blank space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the assemble options See B 2 4 Option for details about assemble options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks source file name File name of source to be assembled Enclose the file name of a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks m Example To output an error list file KOmain era describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm e np b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data
238. bols generated by the compiler are also output to the variables information file but you should leave these commented out Variables information file sreg L0003 2 1 2 t08 c const function information callt Changing the extension of a library file or load module file If you use the variables information file generator do not change the extension of library files lib or load module files Imf If you change these variables that are not eligible for processing may be output 11 Hex output method of bank supported products In the bank supported products addresses are seen in two types of view bank number CPU address and the flash memory real address Hex Format Bank 5BFFFH BANKS 16K bytes 58000H 4BFFFH BANK4 16K bytes 48000H 3BFFFH BANKS 16K bytes 38000H ad BANKS 16K bytes 2BFFFH 1BFFFH BANK2 16K bytes BANK4 16K bytes 28000H 18000H ee BANKS 16K bytes 1BFFFH 13FFFH BANK1 16K bytes BANK2 16K bytes 18000H oe OFFFFH BANK1 16K bytes 0C000H OBFFFA OBFFFH BANKO 16K bytes BANKO 16K bytes 08000H 08000H 07FFFH 07FFFH Common 32K bytes Common 32K bytes 00000H 00000H bank number CPU address flash memory real address Hex Format Bank R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CE NESAS Page 135 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS The assembler references an address based on the bank number CPU address so the user is con
239. box Caution For projects that the selected build mode does not exist the build mode is duplicated from DefaultBuild with the selected build mode name and the build mode is changed to the dupli cated build mode Remarks 1 The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild See 2 15 5 Add a build mode for the method of adding a build mode 2 You can change the name of the build mode by selecting the build mode from the build mode list and clicking the Rename button However you cannot change the name of DefaultBuild R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 75 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 7 Delete a build mode Deleting a build mode is performed with the Build Mode Settings dialog box Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The dialog box opens Figure 2 102 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode Build odes Build mode list DetaultB uild BuildMode2 Duplicate Apply to All Delete Rename Select the build mode to be deleted from the build mode list and click the Delete button The Message dialog box below opens Figure 2 103 Message Dialog Box Question O0732001 Delete build mode BuildModes L tance To continue with the operation click the OK button in the dialog box The selected build mode is deleted from the project Caution You cannot delete DefaultBuild R20UT
240. build are displayed on the Output panel After the batch rebuild is complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened Note that this buttons is disabled when any project is not selected Closes this dialog box and deletes the files built in the respective build modes set for the selected projects The execution result of the clean are displayed on the Output panel After the clean is complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dia log was opened Note that this buttons is disabled when any project is not selected Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 287 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Go to the Location dialog box This dialog box is used to move the caret to the designated location Figure A 35 Go to the Location Dialog Box Go to the Location 1 Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Go To Description of each area 1 Line number area Specify the line number decimal number or symbol name of the location to which the caret is moved You can directly enter the characters into the text box or select from the input history in the drop down list maxi mum numbers of the history
241. category From the Create Library Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Other additional options in the Others category In the General External Tools category of the Option dialog box check Require options at start up in the New registration area Then the dialog box automatically opens when an external tool is launched from Tool menu Description of each area 1 String area Input characters in one line By default this dialog box opens with its edit box reflecting the current value of the property selected to call the dia log box Line break is not allowed Remark Up to 32767 characters can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following mes sages are shown in the toolchip More than maximum number of restriction in the prop The characters exceeds the maximum number of erty that called this dialog box characters cannot be restriction in the property that called this dialog box specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 272 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Reflects the entered characters to the property that called this dialog box then closes the dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered characters to the property that called this dialog
242. ce comments Description If the sa option is specified the li option is invalid Example of use To add the C source file in the include file to the assembler source file prime asm with C source comments describe as C gt cec78k0 cF051144 prime c sa li R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 365 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Warning output specification The warning output specification option is as follows W W Description format w level Interpretation when omitted w1 Function The w option specifies whether or not a warning message is output to the console Application Use w option to specify whether or not a warning message is output to the console Detailed messages can also be output Description The levels of the warning message are as follows Level Description Eoo No warning messages are output C Normal warning messages are output Detailed warning messages are output If the e or se option is specified the warning messages are also output to the error list file If the level 0 is specified the warning messages are not output to the console and the error list file when e or se is specified Example of use If the w option is omitted the compiler assumes that the w1 option is specified and outputs normal warning messages C gt cc78k0O cF051144 prime c R20UT0555EJ
243. ceed 256 bytes when a char short unsigned short int or unsigned int array that is allocated to the saddr area is referenced with an unsigned char variable Does not specify swapping the order of formula operations Select whether to automatically assign automatic variables to a register and the saddr area Assign automatic variables to register or This corresponds to the qv option of the compiler saddr area Default Yes qv How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qv Assigns automatic variables to a register and the saddr area automatically No Does not specify assigning automatic variables to a register and the saddr area automatically Select whether to assign register variables to registers and assign them also to the saddr area Assign register variables to register and saddr This corresponds to the qr option of the compiler area How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Automatic variables Assigns auto variables and norec arguments to and norec argument registers and assigns them also to the saddr qr area Yes Automatic and Assigns auto variables register variables and register variables and norec arguments to registers and assigns them norec argument qr2 also to the saddr area Does not specify assigning register variables to the saddr area R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 176 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 AP
244. char This corresponds to the zi option of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zi Interprets int and short descriptions as char Does not interpret int and short descriptions as char Interpret long as int Select whether to compile by interpreting long descriptions as int This corresponds to the zl option of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zl Interprets long as int Does not interpret long as int Disable an int extension Select whether to disable the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the for function return values of functions This corresponds to the zb option of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zb Disables the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the return values of functions No Enables the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the return values of functions 9 Memory Model The detailed information on the memory model are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 186 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 Use static model R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This corresponds to the sm option of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Yes 0 byte common area sm0 Yes 1 b
245. classify files into the created category node by dragging and dropping the file 2 3 6 Change the file display order You can change the display order of the files and category nodes using the buttons on the project tree Figure 2 15 Toolbar Project Tree Panel Proiect Tree 2 a 3 HR EBF i sample Project JFS uPD SF0S88_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool ad Code Generator Design Tool A CAFSKO Build Tool co FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File zj Build tool generated Files inf sample Innk map sample map hex sample hex sym Sample rri Startup F main c Select any of the buttons below on the toolbar of the Project Tree panel Sorts category nodes and files by name 18 Ascending order B Descending order laa Ascending order Sorts category nodes and files by timestamp a Descending order Efl Ascending order ae Descending order Displays category nodes and files in the specified order by the user default You can change the display order of the category nodes and files arbitrarily by dragging and dropping them R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 25 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 7 Update file dependencies When you perform a change changing include file paths adding an include statement of the header file to the C source file and assembler source file etc that effect
246. clicked The check box is not selected by default Function buttons Sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and closes this dialog box If Reload the file is selected sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and reloads the file And then closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the settings of the encoding and newline code and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 281 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Order dialog box This dialog box is used to display object module files and library files to input to the linker and configure these link order Figure A 32 Link Order Dialog Box Link Order main rel Sshern rel usr lib Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu Description of each area 1 File list display area Show the file list to input to linker a File Display the following file name lists in input order to linker Object module files that are generated from the source file registered in the selected main project or sub project Object module files that are directly added to the project tree in the selected mai
247. complete the variables information file cannot be output Both the vo and vx options cannot be specified at the same time Example of use To output a variables information file info vfi describe as C gt vf78k0 main rel sub rel voinfo vfi R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 559 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Vacant saddr area specification The vacant saddr area specification option is as follows VS Description format vs size Interpretation when omitted vs0 Function After allocating variables to the saddr area via this tool an alignment error may occur during compilation or linking due to the relationship between processing order and alignment In this situation performing allocation with a mar gin in the saddr area can avoid this error The vs option specifies the margin size of the saddr area Application Use the vs option to avoid allocation errors during compilation or linking after allocating variables to the saddr area via this tool Description Specify the margin size number of bytes of the saddr area as size It can be specified in decimal hexadecimal or binary numbers Up to 192 in decimal numbers can be specified An error occurs if 193 or more is specified An error occurs if the specified amount of vacant area is greater than the actual amount of vacant area If the vo option is specifi
248. convert options Select the Object Convert Options tab Select No on the Split hex file property in the Hex File category default Figure B 16 Split hex file Property in Boot Area E Hex File Output hes file Yeg Output folder for hes file B uildModeN amez Hex file name FP rojecthl ames hex R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 475 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE lt 7 gt Runa build of the boot area project When you run a build of the boot area project a load module file is created A hex file is also created If a variables information file is generated it will be input into the compiler automatically and a build will be executed again Remark The variables information file generated in lt 3 gt Set variables relocation options is overwritten by running a build Figure B 17 Created Files for Boot Area Project Tree LA boot Project H a i A CAFSKO Build Tool cis FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool d i File E tl Build tool generated Files imr boot Inf map book map hex book hex sym book sym ee Startup c_ boot c ar link_boot dr wril book Fi R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 476 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE lt 8 gt Create the flash area project Create a project for the boot area and add the build target files to the project Fig
249. cs Corporation RA78K0 error F2006 File not found sample asm Program aborted In the above example a non existent source file is specified An error occurs and the assembler aborts assembly 2 A non existent assemble option is specified C gt ra78k0 kOmain asm z 78KO Assembler Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0 error F2012 Missing parameter z Please enter RA78K0 if you want help messages Program aborted In the above example a non existent assemble option is specified An error occurs and the assembler aborts assembly R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 383 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set assemble options from CubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Assemble Options tab You can set the various assemble options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 4 Property Panel Assemble Option Tab Property A CATOKO Property El Debug Informaton Add debug information fes Local symbols info and assembler debugging into El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths U Sistem mclude paths System mclude paths O Macro definition Macro detinitian 0 El Output File Outp
250. ct Create a project for the boot area and add the build target files to the project Figure B 11 Boot Area Project Project Tree BET post Proiect JE uPDF8FO58e_48 Microcontroller A Fin Configurator Design Tool ay i Code Generator Design Tool A CASK Build Tool ci FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a Q File FY Startup c_ boot c ar link_boot dr lt 2 gt Set the build options for the boot area project Select the build tool node on the project tree and set each of the build options on the Property panel lt 3 gt Set variables relocation options Set the variables functions relocation options to generate a variables information file and use it to allocate variables and functions Select the Variables Relocation Options tab In the Output File category set the Output variables information file property to Yes to generate an empty variables information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property Remark Ifa variables information file with the same name already exists the build will be configured to use it Figure B 12 Output folder for variables information file Property in Boot Area Jutput tolder tor vanables information file 20 UNM Oden ame Variables information fil
251. ct the entered path to the property that called this dialog box then closes the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 277 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE System Include Path Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer the system include paths specified for the compiler and set their specified sequence Figure A 30 System Include Path Order Dialog Box system Include Path Order The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile cate gory and System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category From the Compile Options tab System include paths in the Preprocess category From the Assemble Options tab System include paths in the Preprocess category Description of each area 1 Path list display area This area displays the list of the system include paths specified for the compiler a Path This area displays the list of the system include paths in the specified sequence for the compiler The default order is the order that the files are registered to the project By changing the display order of the paths you c
252. ctions and enables some of the functions of the ANSI standard Enables non ANSI standard functions R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 243 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Disable an int extension Select whether to disable the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the for function return values of functions This corresponds to the zb option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zb Disables the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the return values of functions No Enables the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the return values of functions 7 Memory Model The detailed information on the memory model are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 244 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 Use static model R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This corresponds to the sm option of the compiler No cannot be selected in this property When No is selected this property is not displayed Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Yes 0 byte common area sm0 Yes 1 byte common area sm1 Yes 2 bytes common area sm2 Yes 3 bytes common area sm3 Yes
253. cts are added their settings are not made R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 77 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 Runa Build This section explains operations related to running a build 1 Build types The following types of builds are available Table 2 1 Build Types Type Build Out of build target files runs a build of only updated files See 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files Rebuild Runs a build of all build target files See 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build Runs a build in parallel with other operations See 2 16 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations Batch build Runs builds in batch with the build modes that the project has See 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remarks 1 Builds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are built in the order that they are displayed on the project tree see 2 15 2 Change the file build order of subprojects 2 lf there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a build rebuild or batch build then all these files are saved 2 Display execution results The execution results of the build output messages of the build tool are displayed in each tab on the Output panel Build rebuild or batch build All Messages tab and Build Tool tab Rapid build Rapid Build tab Figure 2 107 Build Execution Results Build Rebuild or Batch Build
254. d Figure 2 96 Active Project ana Tree _ sample Project JE UPDVSFOS88_ 48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool Eil Code Generator Design Tool A CAFSKO Build Tool che FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a A CAT8KO Build Tool cee FAKED Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a l File Remarks 1 Immediately after creating a project the main project is the active project 2 When you remove a subproject that set as the active project from a project the main project will be the active project R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Apr 01 2011 Page 72 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 5 Adda build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the build you can collec tively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and macro definition settings every time The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild Add a build mode according to the purpose of the build The method to add a build mode is shown below 1 Create a new build mode Creating a new build mode is performed with duplicating an existing build mode Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box
255. d To stop running a build rebuild or batch build click on the toolbar 2 16 7 Save the build results to a file You can save the execution results of the build output messages of the build tool that displayed on the Output panel Select the Build Tool tab on the panel and then select Save Output Build Tool As from the File menu The Save As dialog box opens Figure 2 117 Save As Dialog Box Save As O DeFaultBuild Mu Recent D sample ib Documents MMi Documents 2 My Computer a File name Output Build Tool tst t My Network Save as type Text Files txt s In the dialog box specify the file to be saved and then click the Save button 2 16 8 Delete intermediate files and generated files You can delete all the intermediate files and generated files output by running a build hereafter referred to as clean Running a clean is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 15 4 Change the file build target project R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 85 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 When running a clean of the entire project From the Build menu select Clean Project Figure 2 118 Clean Project Item Build fi Build Project FF Shift F7 Rebuild Froject tad Clean Project T Rapid Build oe Update Dependencies Build sample Rebuild sample Clean sample Update Dependencies of s
256. d Options for Object Convert Output hes file Output folder for hes file Hes file name Hes file format Device Build Method Yersion Select Hotes Others Build mode Yeg BulldM odeh ane Project amez hex Intel expanded hes format kie Selects the build mode name to be used during build q Commo PPPOE reiiiretriir iris i A Compile Assemble A Link Opti 4 Object Co Variables Memory R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 162 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Build Mode The detailed information on the build mode is displayed and the configuration can be changed Build mode Select the build mode to be used during build Note that this property is not applied to Reset All to Default from the context menu Default DefaultBuild How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction DefaultBuild Builds with the default build mode that is set when a new project is created Build mode that is added Builds with the build mode that is added to the to the project other than project other than DefaultBuild DefaultBuild 2 Output File Type and Path The detailed information on output file types and paths are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output file type Select the type of the file to be generated during build The file type set here is subject to debugging F
257. d by converting the load module file into hexadecimal object format These files are used during mask ROM development and PROM program use Symbol table file File containing the symbol information included in sym each module of an input files Error list file File containing error information generated C0C during object conversion R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 481 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 4 2 1 2 3 Functions How the object converter handles extended space When a code is output to segments located in extended memory space the object converter generates a separate hex file for each space To output a separate hex file to each space specify the space for both memory and merge directives in the link directive file See CubeSuite 78K0 Coding for details about the link directive The object converter also generates a symbol table file for each space when symbols having ADDRESS or BIT attributes are defined for segments located in extended space All symbols having NUMBER attributes are output to symbol table file generated for normal space The file types of the hex files and symbol table files generated for extended space are shown below Table B 12 Output File Types for Extended Space Normal Space Extended Space Flash memory self rewriting mode support The object converter can create separate hex files in the boot area and flash area
258. d in the tree display area list display area to an output result file Functions in the same manner as when Save Call Chain with Maximum Stack from Selected Function is selected from the File menu Recalculates the total stack size Function in the same manner as when Recalcu late Stack Size is selected from the View menu Forcibly stop the action of the stack usage tracer e g recalculating the total stack size Functions in the same manner as when Stop is selected from the View menu Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional mar gin recursion depth and callee functions for the function selected in the tree dis play area list display area Functions in the same manner as when Adjust Stack Size is selected from the Option menu Displays the help of this window Functions in the same manner as when sk78k0 Help is selected from the Help menu 3 Tree display area The calling relationship of the functions is shown in tree format The table below shows the meaning of the icon displayed to the left of the string representing the function name The function directly called by a given function with the largest total stack size Information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modi fied via the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file The stack usage tracer has not acquired any stack information for this function O
259. d int enum long unsigned long all pointer types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointer structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Does not allocate automatic variables to the saddr area R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 248 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Allocate static variables to saddr area Select the type of the static variable to be allocated in the saddr area This corresponds to the rs option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list 11 List File Restriction Yes Size of char rs1 Yes Size of char short int rs2 Yes Size of char short int long rs4 Yes Structure union array rsm Yes Size of char and structure union array rs1m Yes Size of char short int and structure union array rs2m
260. d to start up the librarian a Startup from the command line X path name gt 1b78k0 Aoption lo78k0 Command name of the librarian option Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the librarian When specifying two or more create library options separate the options with a blank space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the cre ate library options See B 5 4 Option for details about create library options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks Example To specify 20 as the number of lines per page and specify 80 as the number of characters per line in a list file describe as C gt 1b78k0 1120 lw80 When the librarian is started up an execution startup message appears on the display R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 516 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Librarian Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation After an asterisk specify a librarian subcommand create k0 lib add kO lib kOmain rel kOsub rel exit When input of subcommands is finished processing of each subcommand begins When processing of one subcommand is complete appears again on the screen and the librarian waits for the next subcommand to be entered The librarian repeats this operation until the exit subcommand is entered Specify subcommand Su
261. dd a page break after the contents of an assemble list file are printed Description If the np option is specified the If option is invalid If both the lf and nlf options are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Cautions A control instruction FORMFEED NOFORMFEED with the same function as the lf and nlf options can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASAFORMFEED ASANOFORMFEED Example of use To insert a form feed code at the end of an assemble list file kKOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm p lf R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 410 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error list file output specification The error list file output specification options are as follows e ne e ne Description format e Loutput file name ne Interpretation when omitted ne Function The e option specifies the output of an error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The ne option disables the e option Application Use the e option to save an error message into a file Use the e option to specify the location to which an error list file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the e option is specified th
262. dded to the same level as the selected file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node at the same level as the selected file You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project Removes the selected file from the project The removed file is not deleted from the file system in this operation Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copies the selected file to the clipboard When the file name is in editing the characters of the selection are copied to the clipboard Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected file The actual file is also renamed When the selected file is added to another projects it is also renamed Property Displays the selected file s property on the Property panel R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 155 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 6 When the Build tool generated files
263. de using HL B addressing when the index used for the reference of the char unsigned char type arrays and char unsigned char type pointers is an unsigned char type variable This corresponds to the qe option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No on the Use static model property in the Memory Model category is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Yes qe Generates the code using HL B addressing No Does not specify generating the code using HL B addressing R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 178 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output object using Select whether to output an object using HL bit HL bit instruction This corresponds to the qh option of the compiler Optimize for debugging Select whether to perform the optimization for debugging This corresponds to the qg option of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Performs the optimization for debugging Does not specify performing the optimization for debugging Note The results of the calculation when the qc option is set are as follows Calculation Target Calculation Result unsigned char type variable and unsigned char type variable unsigned char type unsigned char type variable and signed char type variable unsigned char type signed char type variable and signed char type variable Constants from 128 to 25
264. defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified However this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 241 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use whole include paths Select whether to compile using the include path specified in the Additional include paths specified for build tool property in the Preprocess category from the Compile Options tab of the build tool to be used This corresponds to the i option of the compiler The paths are added to the i option according to the following sequence Paths specified in the Additional include paths property Paths specified in the Additional include paths in the Preprocess category from the Compile Options tab Paths specified in the System include paths in the Preprocess category from the Compile Options tab How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Compiles using the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used No Does not use the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used Macro definition Specify the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with on
265. dit characters in one line Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Path Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to edit or add the path System Include Path Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer the system include paths specified for the compiler and set their specified sequence File Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is editing on the Editor panel Link Order dialog box This dialog box is used to display object module files and library files to input to the linker and configure these link order Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to do build rebuild and clean process in batch with the build mode that each project has Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area This dialog box is used to select the variables information file for boot area dialog box to set in the caller of the dialog box Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the boot area load module file to set in the caller of the dialog box Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 139 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPE
266. e Select whether to output the error list file Output error list file This corresponds to the e and se options of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Without C source e Outputs the error list file without C source Yes With C source se Outputs the error list file with C source Does not output the error list file Select whether to output the cross reference list file Output cross reference list file This corresponds to the x option of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes x Outputs the cross reference list file Does not output the cross reference list file Select whether to output a form feed code into the end of list files preprocess list file error list file and cross reference list file Output with form feed control code This corresponds to the lf option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes If Outputs a form feed code into the end of the list files No Does not output a form feed code into the end of the list files Number of characters in 1 line Specify the number of characters in each li
267. e V1 00 00 CENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation R20UT0555EJ0100
268. e category Specify the output destination in the Output folder for object information file property and the Object information file name property Itis also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node 1 Object File Information Table 2 FILE 3 SEGMENT 4 SEGMENT 5 FUNCTION 6 GLOBAL NAME NAME SIZE SIZE SYMBOL Bytes Bytes sOl rel file1000_3 rel CODE _file1000 3 asm2 rel BANKOO _bankoO_ 1 asm3 rel _common2 BANKO1 _bank1_1 BANKO2 _bank2_1 Total Code Size 7 45695 Byte s 8 Library File Information Table 9 FILE 10 SEGMENT 11 SEGMENT 12 FUNCTION 13 GLOBAL R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 125 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS SYMBOL XIMUL REL LCODE iumul ismul RTARGO REL RTARGO _ RTARGO _ RTARG1 _ RTARG2 _ RTARG3 _ RTARG4 _ RTARGS5 _ RTARG6 _ RTARG7 CPR1 FPRS FPRXP FPRXD FPRXS FPRFP FPRF1 FPRF2 Total Code Size 14 45820 Byte s Item Description Format Number a SS 5 Code size Outputs the code size of the global function defined in the file ee No assembler source file is output for assembler source files Cn ed Total size of segments at Outputs the total size of the segments to which the files is to be relocated relocation destination R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 126 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00
269. e e option specifies the output of an error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The ne option disables the e option Application Use the e option to specify the location to which an error list file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the e option is specified the output file name will be nput file name elk If the drive name is omitted when the e option is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive If both the e and ne options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To create an error list file kKO elk describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel dkO dr ek0O elk An error has occurred in the contents of the link directive file kO dr The contents of the error list file kO elk is as follows kO dr 3 RA78KO error E3102 Directive syntax error R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 450 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Library file specification The library file specification option is as follows b Description format Interpretation when omitted None Function The b option specifies that the specified file is to be input as a library file Application The linker retrieves the module referenced by the input module from a library file and joins only
270. e preprocess list file No Does not expand the line directive into the preprocess list file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 250 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output line numbers Select whether to output line numbers into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kn option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kn Outputs line numbers into the preprocess list file Does not output line numbers into the preprocess list file Select whether to output the error list file Output error list file This corresponds to the e and se options of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Without C source e Outputs the error list file without C source Yes With C source se Outputs the error list file with C source Does not output the error list file Select whether to output the cross reference list file Output cross reference list file This corresponds to the x option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes x Outputs the cross reference list file Does not output the cross refere
271. e prime c to the error list file prime cer describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c se Output example is shown below R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 357 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO C Compiler Vx xx Error List Command CF051144 prime c se In file prime c Err file prime cer Para file t7 define TRUE 1 define FALSE 0 define SIZE 200 char mark SIZE 1 void main void prime i i 3 printf sed prime Date xXxX XXX XXXX Time XX XX XX xxx CC78K0 warning W0745 Expected function prototype count if count 8 0 1 xxx CC78KO warning W0745 Expected function prototype for k i prime k lt SIZE k prime R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 358 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Cross reference list file creation specification The cross reference list file creation specification options are as follows X Description format x output file name Interpretation when omitted No cross reference list file is output Function The x option specifies the output of a cross reference list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The cross reference list file is valuable for checking the referencing frequency definition and referenced point of a symbol
272. e s option for the largest vacant area in which no segment is allocated The linker then generates public symbol _ STEND which holds the start address of the largest vacant area as its value and public symbol _ STBEG which holds the end address 1 as its value These symbols are handled as publicly declared NUMBER attribute symbols and are registered at the end of the linker s symbol table When these symbols are output to a link list file the module name column is left blank If the largest vacant area is 10 bytes or smaller a warning message is output If no vacant area exists a warning message is output and both STEND and _ STBEG hold the end address 1 as their values If area name is omitted it is assumed that RAM has been specified If both the s and ns options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To reserve a stack area in memory area RAM describe as However the linker will assume that a segment of size 310H in RAM area and a segment of size D8H allocated in the saddr area are input C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel s R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 435 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE FEFFH 8H free FEF8H FEF7H Segment size D8H FE20H FE1FH This position FE10H FE1FH is the 10H free Memory area RAM FEOFH The following stack symbols are generated _ STEND FE10H _ STB
273. e the option specified last is valid Example The no option is specified after the o option so the o option is invalid and the no option is valid C gt cc78k0O cF051144 e sample c o no Options not described in Table B 4 Precedence of Compile Options are not particularly affected by other options However if the help specification option h is specified all of other option specifications become invalid R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 329 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device type specification The device type specification option is as follows C Description format cdevice type Interpretation when omitted Cannot be omitted Function The c option specifies the target device for performing compilation Application Be sure to specify the c option The CA78KO performs compilation for the target device and generates an object code for that device Description See CubeSuite Operating Precautions for the target devices that can be specified by the c option and the corresponding device type When CA78KO is used device files are required Cautions The c option cannot be omitted However if the following description is in the C source file the specification from the command line can be omitted pragma pc device type If different devices are specified in the C source file and command line the
274. e zd option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes zf in the Output objects for flash property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zd Uses a library for the prologue epilogue routines of a function No Does not use a library for the prologue epilogue routines of a function R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 188 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 10 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output common object Select whether to output the objects common to the various devices file for various devices This corresponds to the common option of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Yes common Yes common Outputs the objects common to the various devices ae not specifies outputting the objects common to the a devices 11 Assembly File The detailed information on assembly files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble file Select whether to output the assembly file This corresponds to the a sa and li options of the compiler If Yes is selected on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category from the ea Bank Relocation Options tab this property will be changed to Yes With no C source info a How to change Select from the d
275. e 283 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Figure A 33 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode Apply to All Build mode list DefaultB uild nase BuildMode H c Delete Rename Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Build Mode Settings Description of each area 1 Selected build mode area Show the build mode selected in the Build mode list area a Button Apply to All Sets the build mode of the main project and all subprojects of the currently opened project to the currently displayed build mode 2 Build mode list area Show all the build modes that exist in the currently opening project main project and subproject in a list Current build mode in the selected project is selected by default The current build modes of all projects are same the build mode is selected by default If they are not same DefaultBuild will be selected Note that the DefaultBuild is the default build mode and is always shown at the top R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 284 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE
276. e Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box Tree display for recursive functions The window s tree display area only displays up to the second call of a recursive function Consequently the third and subsequent calls are hidden Library functions bsearch exit and qsort The stack usage tracer treats bsearch exit and qsort as unknown functions even if they are in a library file pro vided by the build tool Consequently if you are using these functions you must set the relevant information e g recursion depth and callee functions in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box Callee functions The stack usage tracer only allows the following types of callee functions to be added in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box functions contained in C source files and functions that are explicitly called not called using a pointer Consequently the All Functions section of the Adjust Stack Size dialog box only displays functions meeting the above conditions R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 310 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Functions called by multiple functions The stack usage tracer treats the stack information of functions called by multiple functions as unique Conse quently it is not possible to change the stack information for such functions depending on which function is calling them Example If you select function sub called by funci in the tree display area and open the
277. e compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 180 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Macro undefinition Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the u option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro undefinition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified 5 Startup The detailed information on the startup are displayed and the configuration can be changed Use standard startup Select whether to link during linking the object module file provided with the compiler in which routine the standard startup routine is written However when any C source file is added to the project the object module file provided with the compiler is not linked The value of this property stored as the stand
278. e expanded Mark H indicates that all the items are col lapsed You can expand collapse the items by clicking these marks or double clicking the category name Mark indicates that only the hex number is allowed to input in the text box See the section on each tab for the details of the display setting in the category and its contents 3 Property description area Display the brief description of the categories and their contents selected in the detailed information display change area 4 Tab selection area Categories for the display of the detailed information are changed by selecting a tab In this panel the following tabs are contained see the section on each tab for the details of the display setting on the tab a When the Build tool node is selected on the Project Tree panel Common Options tab Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab Link Options tab Object Convert Options tab Create Library Options tab Variables Relocation Options tab Memory Bank Relocation Options tab b When a file is selected on the Project Tree panel Build Settings tab for C source file assembler source file link directive file variables information file function information file object file and library file Individual Compile Options tab for C source file Individual Assemble Options tab for assembler source file File Information tab Note This tab is also displayed when Yes is selected in t
279. e file 6 Device file version Displays the version number of the input device file Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 8 Number of warnings Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 3 1 3 Preprocess list file The preprocess list file is an ASCII image file that contains results of C source preprocessing only When specifying the k option a preprocess list file can be used as a C source file unless n has been specified as the processing type When the kd option is specified the list with define expansion is output To configure the preprocess list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Compile Options tab Select Yes p on the Output preprocess list file property in the List File category The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property If PAGEWIDTH is 80 the result is as follows 78KO C Compiler V 1 x xx Preprocess List Date 2 xx XXX xxxx Page 3 xXxxx Command 4 cF051144 prime c p lw8s0 In file 5 prime c PPL file 6 prime ppl Para file 7 A 9 define TRUE 9 define FALSE 9 define SIZE 9 9 char mark SIZE 1 9 10 Target chip uPD78F0511 44 11 Device file Vx xx 7 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev
280. e generator BE Include file Variables information file Link directive file Librarian O Memory bank support tool Memory bank support tool support tool Linker Library file Load module file Function information file Hex file Absolute assemble list file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 12 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 Features The features of the build tools are shown below Optimization function You can generate efficient object module files by performing optimizations such as prioritizing code size or execu tion speed when compiling ROMization function ROMization is processing that locates in ROM the initial values for external variables that have initial values and copies them to RAM when the system is executed The CA78KO provides a program startup routine with ROMization processing so you can eliminate the effort to code ROMization processing at startup Remark See CubeSuite 78K0 Coding about the ROMization function Macro function When you write the same instructions multiple times in the assembler source file you can define that instructions as a single macro name Remark See CubeSuite 78KO Coding about the macro function R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 13 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the build procedure using Cu
281. e internal ROM does not exist at the 8100H address no error is output for the ALL 8100H description No If the internal ROM does not exist at the 8100H address an error is output for the ALL 8100H description Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before assemble processing before assemble Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before assemble processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 203 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after assemble processing after assemble Use the call instruction to specify a batch
282. e is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank the replacement information file is not output This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default ProjectName _replace txt How to change Directly enter to the text box Up to 259 characters Output folder for object Specify the folder for saving the object information file information file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Object information file Specify the object information file name name Use the extension txt If the extension is omitted txt is automatically added The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with th
283. e level for how to set the individual build options 2 If source files with the same name are added the target file cannot opened during debugging 3 Ifa file with an extension of dr or dir is added to the project it is treated as a link directive file It is also treated as a link directive file if it is added below the Startup node When adding a link directive file to the project if a link directive file has already been added then only the latest link directive file to be added is targeted by a build any such files added prior to this one will not be targeted When setting a link directive file that is not targeted by a build as a build target if other link directive files have also been added then the file will be targeted by the build and the others will not be targeted 4 Up to 5000 files can be added to the main project or subproject However up to 1000 souce files can be added When a new file is added an empty file is created in the location specified in the Add File dialog box By double clicking the file name on the project tree you can open the Ediior panel and edit the file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 22 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The files that can be opened with the Editor pane are shown below C source file c Assembler source file asm Header file h inc Link directive file dr dir Variables information file vfi Function info
284. e location to which an absolute assemble list file is output or to change its file name Description An abort error occurs if the same device is specified for the file name as for the error file If the output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the output file name will be assemble list file name p If only the primary name of the output file name is specified the list converter will add p to the file name as the file type and output the file If the drive name is omitted when the o option is specified the absolute assemble list file will be output to the cur rent drive Example of use To output an absolute assemble list file Sample p describe as C gt lenv78k0O kOmain prn osample p 1k0 1mf R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 546 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error list file output specification The error list file output specification options are as follows e ne e ne Description format e Loutput file name ne Interpretation when omitted ne Function The e option specifies the output of an error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The ne option disables the e option Application Use the e option to save an error message into a file Description An abort error occurs if the same device is specified for the file name
285. e macro name per line The def part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the general option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified Macro undefinition Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the u option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro undefinition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified 5 Message The detailed information on messages are displayed and the configuration can be changed Verbose mode Select whether to display the execution status of the compiler to the Output panel during build This corresponds to the v option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Displays the execution status of the compiler duri
286. e name 2 rojecthl ame vii Set the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property to change the output folder and file name of the variables information file If the Variables information file property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 474 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE lt 4 gt Set compile options Select the Compile Options tab Select No on the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category Figure B 13 Memory Model Category in Boot Area Use prologueepilogue library Ho Next select Yes For boot area on the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category Figure B 14 Use standard startup routine Property in Boot Area Yes For boot area lt 5 gt Set link options Select the Link Options tab In the Device category if you select Yes zb on the Set flash start address property the Flash start address property is displayed Specify the start address of the flash memory area here The range that can be specified for the value is 0 to FFFF Figure B 15 Device Category in Boot Area El Device Use on chip debug Ho Set flash start address hogt area load module tle name lt 6 gt Set object
287. e output file name will be input file name era If the drive name is omitted when the e option is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive If both the e and ne options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To output an error list file KOmain era describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm ekOmain era 78KO Assembler Vx xx XX XXX Xxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation PASS1 Start kOmain asm 31 RA78KO error E2202 lllegal operand PASS2 Start kOmain asm 26 RA78KO error E2312 Operand out of range byte kOmain asm 31 RA78KO error E2202 lllegal operand Target chip uPD78F0511 44 Device file VxX xx Assembly complete 3 error s and 0 warning s found R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 411 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE The contents of kKOmain era is as follows PASS1 Start kOmain asm 31 RA78KO error E2202 lllegal operand PASS2 Start kOmain asm 26 RA78KO error E2312 Operand out of range byte kOmain asm 31 RA78KO error E2202 lllegal operand R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 412 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Parameter file specification The parameter file specification option is as follows f Description format Interpretation when omitted Options
288. e project name If this is blank the object information file is not output This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default ProjectName _objinfo txt How to change Directly enter to the text box Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 229 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for refer Specify the folder for saving the reference information file ence information file lf a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default How to change BuildModeName Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Reference information Specify the reference information file name file name Use the extension txt If the extension is omitted txt is automatically added The foll
289. e shown in the tooltip The maximum number of build modes that can be set The number of build modes exceed 20 per project subproject is 20 Function buttons Button Function Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 285 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to do build rebuild and clean process in batch with the build mode that each project main project and subproject has Remark Order of the batch build follows the build order of the project which the subproject comes before the main project When more than one build mode is selected for a main project or a Subproject all the selected build modes are built and then the next subproject or main project is built Figure A 34 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Project Build mode Defined macros sample DetaultBuild sample BuildMode sub DefaultB uild sub BuildModez The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Batch Build Description of each area 1 Build mode list area Show the combination list of the names of the main project and the subproject which the currently opening project has and build modes and defined macros which they have a Project Show the main project and
290. e text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Output folder Specify the folder for saving the module that is generated If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 247 characters Specify the load module file name to be output Output file name Use the extension Imf If the extension is omitted Imf is automatically added This corresponds to the o option of the linker The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName Imf has been specified Default ProjectName Imf How to change Directly enter to the text box Up to 259 characters 6 Frequently Used Options for Object Convert The detailed information on frequently used options for object conversion are displayed and the configuration c
291. e type of the selected file type of the selected file Default C source when C source file is selected Assembly source when assembler source file is selected Link directive when link directive file is selected Variable information when variables information file is selected Function information when function information file is selected Object when object file is selected Library when library file is selected How to change Changes not allowed 2 Memory Bank The detailed information on the memory bank is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when a device with a memory bank installed is specified as the microcontroller and Yes is selected in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category on the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab and a C source file is selected on the Project Tree panel R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 234 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select common bank Select the area to relocate the program codes in build processing area Default No specification How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction No specification The memory bank relocation support tool automati cally determines the optimum area and relocates the program code there Common area Relocates the program codes to the common area in build processing Bankxx Relocates the program cod
292. e you perform object conversion describe the options in the parameter file and specify the f option Description An abort error occurs if the file name is omitted Nesting of parameter files is not permitted An abort error occurs if the f option is specified within a parameter file The number of characters that can be described within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space a tab or the line feed code LF Options and input file names within a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last is valid The characters following or are all assumed to be comments up to the line feed code LF or EOF An abort error occurs if two or more f option is specified Example of use Perform object conversion using a parameter file 78k0 poc The contents of the parameter file 78k0 poc is as follows parameter file kO lmf osample hex ssample sym r Enter the following from the command line C gt 0c78k0 kO 1lmf 78k0 poc R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 507 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Hex format specification The hex format specification options are as follows ki kie kt km kme ki kie kt km kme Description format Interpretation when omitted kie Function Th
293. ecified CO lt Labels for symbol information Outputs function label information information starts with creation This information is output only when the debug information output option has been specified _ oO Target device for this compiler Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file 20 Displays the version number of the input device file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 95 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number 21 Size clock Outputs size and clock for output instructions Information starting with INF If the number of clocks cannot be determined for an output instruction clocks are output in the following format clock 1 clock 2 Clock 1 The number of clocks when accessing the internal high speed RAM area Clock 2 The number of clocks when accessing the area other than the internal high speed RAM area This is ignored when accessing peripheral hardware that generates waits because the number of wait clocks is unknown Function information start Indicates start of function information Function information file Outputs target source file name with full path Information starting with FILE name Function information Outputs function name and defined line number as decimal code Information definition function starting with FUNC
294. ect Set to Default Build Option for Project in the context menu Remark The configuration of the standard build option takes effect to the whole project main project and Subproject i Sort files and categories You can sort files and category nodes in order of the file name time stamp or the user definition by the following procedure Select one of the buttons in the toolbar The following table explains the buttons is selected default by default Sorts files and category nodes in order of their names ER Ascending order pii Descending order Fale Ascending order Sorts files and category nodes in order of their time stamp Descending order Et Ascending order Ec Descending order Sorts files and category nodes in order of the user definition default You can change the display order by dragging and dropping the file and category node j Display the file while editing When the file added to the project is edited in the Editor pane and the file is not saved once the file name is u n followed by When the file is saved is deleted k Display the source file in boldface that the individual build option is set The source file icon whose option is different from the project general option individual compile option individual assemble option is changed to a different one from the normal icon The file with project general option The file with individual build option 1 Highligh
295. ect from the drop down list Restriction Yes p Outputs the preprocess list file Does not output the preprocess list file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 249 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Not output comments Select whether to disable to output comments into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kc option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kc Does not output comments into the preprocess list file Outputs comments into the preprocess list file Select whether to expand the define directive into the preprocess list file Expand define preprocessor directive This corresponds to the kd option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kd Expands the define directive into the preprocess list file No Does not expand the define directive into the preprocess list file Expand if ifdef ifndef preprocessor directive Select whether to perform output by expanding if ifdef and ifndef directives into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kf option of t
296. ect node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add File from the context menu The Add Existing File dialog box appears Select files to add Copy the file using windows explorer and the like and then point the mouse to this area Select Paste from the Edit menu Drag files using windows explorer and the like and then drop them at the location in this area where you want to add the files to Remark Ifthe files are dragged from the windows explorer and the like and then dropped in the blank Space under the lower project tree it is regarded as dropped in the Main project lt 2 gt When new files are added Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the File menu The Add File dialog box appears Designate the file to create Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box appears Designate the file to create Remark A blank file is created at the location designated in the Add File dialog box b Remove the file from a project You can remove files from the project by one of the following procedure The removed files are not deleted from the file system in this operation Select the file you want to remove from the project Then select Remove from Project from the Project menu R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00
297. ed nr Function The r option specifies how to assign a program to the memory The nr option disables the r option Application Use the r option to specify how to assign a program to the memory Description The process types that can be specified by the r option are shown below Process type specification cannot be omitted A fatal error F0012 occurs if the specification is omitted e Assigns a bit field from the most significant bit MSB d n m Assigns an external variable external static variable except for the const type variable automatically n 1 2 4 to the saddr area regardless of whether there is a sreg declaration or not See rd nr for details k n m In a static model assigns a function argument and auto variable except for the static auto variable n 1 2 4 automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether there is a sreg declaration or not See rk nr for details s n m Assigns a static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether sreg has been n 1 2 4 declared See rs nr for details C Does not insert any align data to allocate a 2 byte or more structure member In other words performs packing structure Remark Two or more process types can be specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 334 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If the nr option is specified the
298. ed the vs option is valid Example of use To specify the margin size of the saddr area as 10 bytes in decimal numbers describe as C gt v 78k0O main rel sub rel voinfo vfi vs10 To specify the margin size of the saddr area as OAH bytes in hexadecimal numbers describe as C gt vi78k0 main rel sub rel voinfo vfi vs0AH To specify the margin size of the saddr area as 1010B bytes in binary numbers describe as C gt v 78k0 main rel sub rel voinfo vfi vs1010B R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 560 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ROM RAM usage output specification The ROM RAM usage output specification option is as follows VX VX Description format VX Interpretation when omitted ROM RAM usage is not output to the standard output Function The vx option outputs ROM RAM usage after the linking to the standard output Application Use the vx option to output ROM RAM usage after the linking Description Both the vx and vo options cannot be specified at the same time ROM RAM usage output example is shown below When the default memory area name is used xxx Memory Area Information ROM xxxxxH byte s real data RAM xxxxxH byte s real data xxx Memory Area Information in ROM ROM XXXXXH byte s xxx Memory Area Information in RAM RAM XXXXXH byte s R20UT0555EJ010
299. ed by pressing the keys CTRL C key The path in which the temporary file is created is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the t option 2 Path specified by environmental variable TMP when the t option is omitted 3 Current path when TMP is not set Caution When 1 or 2 is specified if the temporary file cannot be created in the specified path an abort error occurs Example of use To output a temporary file to folder C tmp describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel tC tmp R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 455 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To output a temporary file to folder D temporary files describe as R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 456 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device file search path specification The device file search path specification option is as follows ey Description format Interpretation when omitted The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 Path registered in the device file installer 2 Path by which the Ik78k0 exe was started up 3 Current folder 4 The environmental variable PATH Function The y option reads a device file from the specified path Application Use the y option to specify a path where a device file exi
300. ed by standard library Yeg O O H HAH A Library Use standard library eS Not use multiply and divide instructor Na Use standard 0 library supported floating point data Mo Use multiple and divider Yeg Using standard libraries Using standard libranies 3 Message Extension Memory Model OutputFie Assembly File Function Information Fie V anables Information Fie Data Control List File Others Add debug informabon Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the q option AH AAA Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 33 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 1 Perform optimization with the code size precedence Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To perform optimization with the code size precedence select Yes Code size qx3 or Yes Code size Best qx4 on the Perform optimization property in the Optimization category No is selected by default If you select Yes Code size Best qx4 then addition to the settings of Yes Code size qx3 common code is placed in subroutines and the library for the stack access is used Figure 2 27 Perform optimization Property Code Size Precedence
301. ed when the category node is dropped in the main project or subproject 2 The category node is copied not moved when the it is dropped between the different project or in the main project or Subproject in same project Note that the individual option set in each file contained in the category node is not retained Add folders You can add folders from Explorer or the like by the following procedure The folders are added under the File node The folders are added as categories Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it over its destination The Add Folder and File dialog box opens Specify the file types and subdirectory levels in the folder to add Caution You cannot drag and drop folders and files into this area simultaneously Modify the display order of the subprojects placed in order of build The subproject is displayed in order of build from the top Therefore the order of build can be changed by changing the display order of the subprojects The project must be built from the subproject then the main project Configure the standard build option When the standard build option is changed the property is displayed in boldface in the Property panel R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 148 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE You can change the standard build option to the current setting cancel boldface by the following procedure Select the Build tool node and then sel
302. eed the line length are output beginning at column 11 on the next CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number Output object module file Outputs the specified file name name If the file type is omitted ref is attached Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 11 on the next line 10 Print file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted prn is attached Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 11 on the next line 3 2 2 Assemble list The assemble list outputs the results of the assemble with error messages if errors occur To configure the assemble list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Assemble Options tab Select Yes p on the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category Assemble list 1 ALNO 2 STNO 6 ADRS 8 OBJECT 5 SOURCE STATEMENT 1 1 2 2 SAMPM 0006 R220000 CALL CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code 00000000 MOV DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 7 ERROR E2202 STNO 31 0 Illegal operand 000D 00 000E 0427 0010 EB Segment informations 9 ADRS 10 LEN 11 NAME 0003H DATA 0002H CODE 0017H CSEG Target chip 12 uPD78XXX Device file 13 Vx xx Assembly complete 14 1 error s and
303. een func tions and function level stack information in its main window Consequently changes to the calling relationship between functions or function level stack information e g adding files changing compiler options or modifying the source code will not be reflected in this window Functions analyzed The stack usage tracer only analyzes functions contained in assembly files with debugging information output by the C compiler as intermediate files and in library files provided by the build tool Consequently functions in assembly files written by the user and library files created by the user are not analyzed For this reason the infor mation for these files must be set using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box Icon display colors Display priorities High E to Low _ are assigned to icons displayed in the tree display area list display area in the window Consequently you must be aware that even if the Jj icon function called directly by same func tion with greatest total stack size is displayed information with relatively low priority such as the E icon frame size unknown will be hidden by the GUI Determining the maximum stack size When the stack usage tracer searches for the path with the largest stack size it assumes that functions that are not analyzed have a stack size of zero Consequently when determining the maximum stack size you must make sure that there are no functions under Unknown Functions in the Stack Siz
304. egment It is displayed in hexadecimal format without zero suppression Segment size Displays the segment size It is displayed in hexadecimal format without zero suppression Target device for this Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source assembler file m N wa R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 105 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 2 3 Symbol list A symbol list outputs the symbols including local symbols defined in a source To configure the symbol list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Assemble Options tab Select Yes ks on the Output with symbol list property in the Assemble List category Symbol Table List 1 VALUE 2 ATTR 3 RTYP 4 NAME 1 VALUE 2 ATTR 3 RTYP 4 NAME CSEG CSEG CSEG CODE Sie Tt EXT CONVAH DSEG DATA FE20H ADDR HDTSA OH ADDR PUB MAIN MOD SAMPM OH ADDR PUB START FE21H ADDR STASC Item Description Format Number 1 Symbol value Displays a value with a symbol Outputs a right aligned hexadecimal number with zeros suppressed 2 Symbol attributes Displays the symbol attributes left aligned CSEG Code segment name DSEG Data segment name BSEG Bit segment name MAC Macro name MOD Module name SET Symbol defined by SET directive NUM NUMBER attribute symbol
305. egory Figure B 23 Boot area load module file name Property in Flash Area El Device Use on chip debug Ho Set user option byte Ho Boot area load module file name _ Aboot D efaultB uldi boot Imt lt 13 gt Set object convert options Select the Object Convert Options tab Select Yes zf on the Split hex file property in the Hex File category R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 478 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 24 Split hex file Property in Flash Area El Hex File Output hex file Yes Output folder for hes file AB uildM odeN anes Hex file name 2 rojecth amez Hex Split hex file lt 14 gt Run a build of the flash area project When you run a build of the flash area project a load module file which implements the relink function is created The boot area hex file the same content as the file created by building the boot area project and flash area hex file are also created Figure B 25 Created Files for Flash Area Project Tree A CASED Build Tool che FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 5 A File El ral Build tool generated Files imt Flash lnF map flash map hx Flash bib bef Flash hic sym Flash syn Fi Startup c_ flash fe link_Flash dr wil Flash fi e How to change the branch table address When setting the branch table s start address to other than 2000H also change the inter
306. egory name is in editing the contents of the clipboard are inserted Rename You can rename the selected category node Property Displays the selected category node s property on the Property panel R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 157 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property panel This panel is used to display the detailed information on the Build tool node file or category node that is selected on the Project Tree panel by every category and change the seitings of the information Figure A 3 Property Panel Property 1 9 A CA SKO Property El Build Hode Build mode El Output File Type andPath Output file type Intermediate file output folder El Frequently Used Options for Compie Perform optimization Additional include paths Sistem include paths Macro definition Frequently Used O ptions for Assemble Additional include paths Sistem include paths Macro definition Frequently Used O ptions for Link Using libraries Additional library paths Output folder Output file name El El Default uild Execute Module Load Module File BulldM odeh anes fes Standard qeue Additional include pathe O Sistem include pathe O Macro detinition O Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Using libranes O Additional library paths 0 Bb uildM ode anes 2Projecth ame Init Frequently Used Options for Object Convert
307. elected project or subproject from the project The subproject files or the file themselves are not deleted from the file system Save Project and Development Saves a set of the this product and the project by copying them in a folder Tools as Package b Build The Build menu shows menu items for the build process and others Build Project Builds the project The subproject is also built when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Rebuilds the project The subproject is also rebuilt when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Cleans the project The subproject is also cleaned when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rapid Build Toggles the rapid build function between enabled default and disabled Update Dependencies Updates the dependency of the file in the project to build The dependency of the file in the subproject to build is also updated when the subproject is added to the project Build active project Builds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not built Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Rebuilds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not rebuilt Note that this m
308. en clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 222 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Other additional options Input the librarian options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the librarian options group How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 223 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Variables Relocation Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the variables information file generator categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Output File 2 Margin 3 ROM RAM Amount Information Figure A 10 Property Panel Variables Relocation Options Tab Property A CA aEO Property El Output File Output variables information file No El ROM SARAH Amount Infomation Output ROM AAAM usage No Output variables information he Selects whether to output a variables information file by using the file variables information file generator If Yes is selected in this field executes commands in the following order The compiler
309. en specifying boot area ROM program linking for a product with built in flash memory Split hex file This corresponds to the zf option of the object converter Do not set this property for a device that does not have a flash ROM area self programming function This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zf Splits the file into separate hex files one for the boot area and one for other areas No Does not split the file into separate hex files one for the boot area and one for other areas 2 Hex File Filling The detailed information on hex file filling are displayed and the configuration can be changed Fill free memory space The unnecessary code may be written to address to which the hex format object is not output Specify whether to write a code in advance to prevent the program runaway by accessing the address This corresponds to the u option of the object converter This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property in the Hex File category is selected Default Yes u How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes u Writes a code in advance to address to which the hex format object is not output No nu Does not write a code in advance to address to which the hex format object is not output R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 2
310. enu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Cleans the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not cleaned Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Update Dependencies of active Updates the dependency of the file in the active project to build project Stop Build Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation Build Mode Settings Opens the Build Mode Settings dialog box to modify and add to the build mode Batch Build Opens the Batch Build dialog box to batch build Build Option List Lists the currently set build option in the Output panel R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 143 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Toolbar Buttons used in build process are displayed a Build toolbar Build tooloar shows buttons used in build process Builds projects The subproject is also built when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuilds projects The subproject is also rebuilt when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean in operation 3 Panel display area The following panels are displayed in this area Project Tree panel Property panel Editor panel Output panel See the each pa
311. er 3 File name 4 arthetrnork Files of type Boot area load module file Inf vw Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Link Options tab Boot area load module file name in the Device category Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set in the caller of this dialog box exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown 3 File name area Specify the file name to set in the caller of the dialog box 4 Files of type area Specify the file type to set in the caller of the dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 300 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Boot area load module file Imf Boot area load module file default All files All the formats34 Function buttons Button Function Sets the specified file in the caller of the dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 301 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name
312. er Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file LibraryFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under the library generation processing The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before making library processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after library generation processing after making library Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Y LibraryFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under the library generation processing The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after making library processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears wh
313. er specification than 64 KB using the file Help specification e Outputs a help message on the display 2 Precedence For the compile options shown in the following table the precedence is explained in a case where two or more options along the vertical axis and options along the horizontal axis are specified at the same time Table B 4 Precedence of Compile Options R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 328 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Location marked with NG If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example The rd and g options are invalid C gt cc78k0 cF051144 e sample c no rd g Location marked with A If an option in the horizontal axis is not specified the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example The p option is specified so the k option is valid C gt cc78k0 cF051144 e sample c p k Location marked with OK The last option on the horizontal or vertical axis to be specified takes precedence Example The d option is specified last so the u option is invalid and the d option takes precedence C gt cc78k0 cF051144 e sample c utest dtest 1 Blank area If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is valid As with the o no options if two options for which n can be added to the beginning of the option name are specified at the same tim
314. er files link directive file variables information file function information file object module file or library file that has been added to the project are updated When a build target file has been added to or removed from the project When the link order of object module files and library files has changed When the properties of the build tool or build target files are changed If a rapid build is enabled it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operations To enable disable a rapid build select Rapid Build from the Build menu A rapid build is enabled by default R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 81 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 112 Rapid Build Item When Rapid Build Is Valid Build fy Build Project F7 Um Rebuild Project Shift F7 Gd Clean Project Rapid Build ow Update Dependencies Build sample t Rebuild sample al Clean sample mg Update Dependencies of sample P 1 Ta Le Build Mode Settings EL Batch Build Ly Build Option List Figure 2 113 Rapid Build Item When Rapid Build Is Invalid Build fy Build Project F7 fe Rebuild Project Shift F7 ied Clean Project FO Rapid Build oy Update Dependencies H Build sample H Rebuild sample E Clean sample ag Update Dependencies of sample as Py D Build Mode Settings El Batch Build P Build Option List Remarks 1 After editing source files it i
315. eration of the C compiler The types and explanations for compile options are shown below Table B 3 Compile Options Device type specification Specifies the type of the target device Object module file creation Specifies the output of an object module file specification Memory assignment Specifies how to assign a program to the memory specification Specifies to assign an external variable external static variable automatically to the saddr area Specifies to assign a function argument and auto variable except for the static auto variable automatically to the saddr area FS Specifies to assign an static auto variable automatically to the saddr area Optimization specification Specifies optimization types Debug information output Specifies the output of the C source level debugging information Specifies the output of the preprocess list file Specifies the processing for the preprocess list specification Preprocess list file creation specification Preprocess specification Performs macro definitions Invalidates macro definitions Reads an include file from a specified folder Specifies the output of the assembler source file k U I I I Assembler source file creation specification n D Error list file creation Specifies the output of the error list file specification n D Cross reference list file creation Specifies the output of the cross reference list file lw S
316. erter from a parameter file as follows X gt lcnv78k0 Ainput file name A fparameter file name f Parameter file specification option R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 541 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE parameter file name A file which includes the data required to start up the list converter Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows Al option Aoption If the input file name is omitted from the command line only 1 input file name can be specified in the parameter file The input file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all list convert options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file kO plv using an editor and then start up the list converter parameter file kOmain 1k0 1mf ekO elv C gt ra78k0O f kOmain pra 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the list converter is started up an execution startup message appears on the display List Conversion Program for RA78KO Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation Passl start Pass2 start b Execution end message If it detects no list conversion errors resulting from the list conversion the list converter outputs the following message to the display and
317. es variable Variable information variable If a variable is defined in the boot area and referenced by the flash area then for the boot area boot is output Function information start Indicates start of function information Function information is output in the order of priority from highest to lowest Since functions in the flash area callt functions and static functions cannot be allocated to the saddr area comments out these variables by adding a semicolon to the beginning of the line R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 119 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number Function information function Outputs the function name name Function information number Outputs the number of references of the function of references Function information Outputs the reference type of the function reference type normal 1 changes from the normal area to the callt area sreg 0 Already allocated to the callt area 18 Function information file Outputs the target source file name surrounded by quotation marks name Although static functions are output global functions are not for the boot area boot is output 19 Function information function If a function is defined in the boot area and referenced by the flash area then R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 120 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAP
318. es to bankXX in build pro cessing This item is displayed corresponding to the numbers of banks XX 00 to 15 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 235 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Individual Compile Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on a C source file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Compile Options tab If the settings are changed from the Compile Options tab the properties are displayed in boldface Remark This tab is displayed only when Yes in the Set individual compile option property in the Build category from the Build Settings tab is selected Debug Information Data Control List File Others 1 2 Optimization 3 Optimization Details 4 Preprocess 5 Message 6 Extension 7 Memory Model 8 Output File 9 Assembly File 10 11 12 Figure A 19 Property Panel Individual Compile Options Tab Property c main c Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information fes 4dd to both assembly and object filel q2 El Optimization Perform optimization fes Standard que Preproces Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified tor build tool es Macro definition Macro detinition O Macro undefinitior Macro undefinitian 0 Message Extension Memo
319. ese options specify the format of a hex file to be output Application Use these options to specify the format of a hex file to be output from among Intel standard Intel extended Extended tektronix Motorola S type standard address and Motorola S type 32 bit address Description This section describes each option Intel standard OH to FFFFH up to 64 KB Intel expanded OH to FFFFFH up to 1 MB Extended tektronix OH to FFFFFFFFH up to 4 GB Motorola S type standard address OH to FFFFFFH up to 16 MB Motorola S type 32 bit address OH to FFFFFFFFH up to 4 GB Example of use To specify a hex file to be output as the Motorola S format standard address describe as C gt o0c78k0 kO 1lmf km R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 508 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device file search path specification The device file search path specification option is as follows ey Description format Interpretation when omitted The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 Path registered in the device file installer 2 Path by which the oc78k0 exe was started up 3 Current folder 4 The environmental variable PATH Function The y option reads a device file from the specified path Application Use the y option to specify a path where a device file exists De
320. ex gt yETSkO exel Memory Area Information BOM 17H byte s real data BAM OH byte s real data Memory Area Information in ROM BOM 17H bytets l Memory Area Information in PAM OH bytets Build endedtError 0 Warning 0 Ended Success 1 Projects Failed 0O Projects Tuesday April 7 010 7 48 56 Build Tool R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 50 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 Set Memory Bank Relocation Options To set options for the memory bank relocation support tool select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various memory bank relocation options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 60 Property Panel Memory Bank Relocation Options Tab Property A CAFS Property El Output File Use memor bank relocation support tool Mo Use memory bank relocation support tool Selects whether to execute the memory bank relocation support tool afrer build processing IF Yes is selected in this field the following properties changes automatically 1 Compiler Options tab gt Assembly File category gt Output assemble file property value changes to ves With no C source mtoll al Compiler Options tab Debug Information category gt Add debug information property value changes Yes 4dd to both a
321. executed before object convert processing before object convert Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with absolute path of the input file under object convert processing ObjectConvertedFile Replaces with absolute path of the output file under object convert processing The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before object convert processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after object convert processing after object convert Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFi
322. ext box or by the button Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box BuildModeName is set by default BuildModeName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the build mode name 2 Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Output file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box ProjectName lib is set by default ProjectName lib is an embedded macro It is replaced to the project name R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 45 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 Set Variables Relocation Options To set options for the variables information file generator select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Variables Relocation Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various variables relocation options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 53 Property Panel Variables Relocation Options Tab Property A CATOKO Property El Output File Output variables information file No El RO0HZRAH Amount I nfomaton Output ROM AAAM usage Meo Output variables information fle Selects whether to output a variables information file by using the file variables information file generator If Yes is selected in this feld executes commands in the following order The compiler and the assembler are executed twice by one build processing The orde
323. f the function displayed in the tree display area with the largest total stack size to an output result file CENESAS Page 306 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save All Call Chains from Every Opens the Save As dialog box for saving all call chains of all functions dis Root played in the tree display area to an output result file Load Stack Size Specification Opens the Open dialog box for loading a stack size specification file File Save Stack Size Specification Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the results of the operations made in File the Adjust Stack Size dialog box e g changes to function information to a stack size specification file Exit sk78k0 Closes this window Remark The output result file can only be saved in text format txt or CSV format csv b View menu Recalculate Stack Size Recalculates the total stack size Functions in the same manner as the button Forcibly stop the action of the stack usage tracer e g recalculating the total stack size Functions in the same manner as the x button c Option menu Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Opens the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box to display Function Lists a list of functions with unknown frame size functions for which information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modified and functions for which the stack usage tracer has forcibly se
324. f use To search C tmp dev read the device file describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 yC tmp dev R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 373 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Static model specification The Static model specification option is as follows SM Sm Description format sm n n 1 to 16 Interpretation when omitted Normal model n 0 Function Specifies the sm option while compilation The object when the sm option is specified is called a static model and the object when the sm option is not specified is called a normal model Normally the instruction accessing a static area is shorter and can be executed faster than the instruction accessing a stack frame Therefore an object code can be shortened and execution speed can be improved Interrupts can be serviced faster This is because the saving returning of arguments and variables that use the saddr area i e register variables in the interrupt function arguments automatic variables in the norec function arguments of the run time library is not performed in the static model whereas it is performed in the normal model Memory capacitance is saved since data is shared with two or more leaf functions Application Use the sm option to improve the object execution speed and make interrupt servicing faster and change a normal model to a static model Description
325. fied for each pragma statement the following warning is output CC78KO warning W0849 pragma statement is not portable If w2 is specified for an __asm statement the following warning is output and the assemble output is performed CC78K0 warning W0850 Asm statement is not portable If w2 is specified for an asm to endasm block the following error is output CC78KO error E0801 Undefined control etc m n Enables use of extend specifications for a static model n 1 2 Up to 6 arguments can be described in int size and up to 9 arguments can be described in char size Enables description of structure union return value for 1 2 byte structure union arguments and function return values The _ KREGxx utilization method is changed by the value of n If nis omitted it is interpreted as n 1 When n 1 Uses KREGxx as the shared area only for leaf function When n 2 Performs saving restoring KREGxx and allocates argument and automatic variable to KREQGxx Replaces the processing routines before and after the function with a library Outputs a warning message for ql4 and processes as ql3 Automatically adds a pascal function modifier Outputs objects for flash Regards int and short descriptions as char The compiler defined macro FROM_INT_ TO CHAR is regarded as 1 Regards long descriptions as int The compiler defined macro FROM_INT_TO_INT is regarded as 1 Note s e and n cannot be s
326. fied value as a margin This property is displayed corresponding to the numbers of banks XX 00 to 15 How to change Directly enter to the text box 65536 to 65536 decimal number R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 230 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Message The detailed information on messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed when No on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category is selected Verbose mode Select whether to display the execution status of the memory bank relocation support tool to the Output pane during build How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Displays the execution status of the memory bank reloca tion support tool during build No Does not display the execution status of the memory bank relocation support tool during build R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 231 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Settings tab This tab shows the detailed information on each C source file assembler source file link directive file variables infor mation file function information file object file and library file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Build 2 Memory Bank Figure A 12 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selectin
327. file 99 3 1 4 Cross reference list file 100 3 2 Assembler 103 3 2 1 Assemble list file headers 103 3 2 2 Assemble list 104 3 2 3 Symbol list 106 3 2 4 Cross reference list 107 3 2 5 Error list 108 3 3 Linker 110 3 3 1 Link list file headers 110 3 3 2 Map list 111 3 3 3 Public symbol list 112 3 3 4 Local symbol list 113 3 3 5 Error list 114 3 4 Object Converter 115 3 4 1 Error list 115 3 5 Librarian 116 3 5 1 Library information output list 116 3 6 List Converter 117 3 6 1 Absolute assemble list 117 3 6 2 Error list 117 3 7 Variables Information File Generator 118 3 7 1 Variables information file 118 3 8 Memory Bank Relocation Support Tool 121 3 8 1 Function information file 121 3 8 2 Replacement information file 122 3 8 3 Object information file 125 3 8 4 Reference information file 127 CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS 128 4 1 C Compiler 128 4 1 1 C source file 128 4 2 Assembler 130 4 2 1 kOmain asm 130 4 2 2 kOsub asm 131 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS 132 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 139 A 1 Description 139 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 319 B 1 C Compiler 319 B 1 1 I O files 320 B 1 2 Functions 321 B 1 3 Method for manipulating 323 B 1 4 Option 327 B 2 Assembler 380 B 2 1 I O files 380 B 2 2 Functions 381 B 2 3 Method for manipulating 381 B 2 4 Opti
328. file kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0 lmf pkO map e tc tmp C gt 1k78k0 f k0 plk R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 426 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the linker is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78KO Linker Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation b Execution end message If it detects no link errors resulting from the link the linker outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the host operating system Target chip uPD78xxx Device file VxX xx Link complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found If it detects a link errors resulting from the link the linker outputs the number of errors and warnings to the display and returns control to the host operating system Target chip uPD78xxx Device file VxX xx Link complete 1 error s and 0 warning s found If the linker detects a fatal error during linking which makes it unable to continue link processing the linker outputs a message to the display cancels linking and returns control to the host operating system Anon existent object module file is specified C gt 1k78k0 sampl rel samp2 rel 78KO Linker Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0O error F3006 File not found sampl re
329. file example call a bat processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after assemble processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the assemble options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the assemble options group How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 204 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the linker categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 2 3 4
330. file name Change the file name on the Project Tree panel How to change Changes not allowed Relative path Display the relative path of the file from the project folder Default The relative path of the file from the project folder How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path Display the absolute path of the file Default The absolute path of the file How to change Changes not allowed Save with absolute path Select whether to save the file location with the absolute path Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Saves the file location with the absolute path Saves the file location with the relative path R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 261 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Last update Display the time and date on which this file was changed last Default File updated time and date How to change Changes not allowed Writable Select whether to enable writing to the file Default Yes when the file is write enabled No when the file is not write enabled How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Enables the file to write Does not enable the file to write 2 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Memo Add memos to the file Add one item in one line The added memos are displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items H
331. fin N Map file map Symbol table file sym Hex file hex Axb hxf Text file txt Note Only devices with a memory bank installed Remark You can use one of the methods below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag the file and drop it into the Editor panel Select the file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Copies the selected file or category node to the clipboard While editing the file name or the category name the characters of the selection are copied to the clipboard Note that this menu is only enabled when the file or category node is selected Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below the selected node on the project tree While editing the file name or the category name insert the contents of the clipboard Note that this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project when multiple files and category nodes are selected and when the build tool is in operation Rename You can rename the selected project subproject file and category node Press the Enter key to confirm the rename Press the ESC key to cancel When the file is selected the actual file name is also changed When the selected file is added to other project those file names are also changed Note that this menu is only enabled when the project subproject file
332. fined by the d option Description Up to 30 macro definitions can be disabled at once by separating them with A space cannot be entered before or after A macro definition that can be disabled by the u option is one that has been defined by the d option A macro name defined by define in a C source file or a system macro name of the CA78KO cannot be disabled by the u option If the same macro name is specified in both the d and u options the option specified last is valid Example of use The d option that is specified first is ignored and the u option that is specified last is valid the macro definition for TEST thus becomes invalid C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c dTEST TIME 10 uTEST R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 348 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format ifolder folder two or more folders can be specified Interpretation when omitted It is assumed that the following folders have been specified 1 Folder with source fileN t 1 2 Folder specified by environmental variable INC78KO 3 C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78KO V x xx inc78koNe 2 Notes 1 Ifthe include file name is specified with double quotation marks in the include statement folders with source files are searched first If the include file name is specified with lt gt search is not performed 2 This is an example
333. for the code located in the flash memory when the self rewriting mode of the flash memory is used To output separate hex files specify the object convert option zf The file type is as follows Table B 13 File Type When zf Option Is Specified File File Type Output file at program side other than boot area ROM Hex files The hex file output by the object converter can be input to a hex loader such as a PROM programmer or a debugger The following is the hex file of the sample program O200000080007E gt 1000800011201A1620FE9A93 001421 FE63958462B3 gt LOOOID0095FAFE617131809AA40073617131809A82 ODOOA0N00A40072AF4D8D020D070D3 0OAFA8 00000001FF R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 482 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE a Intel standard hex file format Figure B 27 Intel Standard Format End record Note The data record is repeated here Data record Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number 2 digits Number of bytes in the code stored in the record A maximum of 16 bytes can be stored Location address offset The start address offset of the code displayed in the record is shown as a 4 digit hexadecimal Record type Fixed at 00 Code Max 32 digits The object code is shown one byte at a time with the higher 4 bits and lower 4 bits separated A maximum of 16 bytes can be expressed in the code Check sum
334. formation on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category of the File node Build tool generated files node and Startup node is not displayed Memo Add memos to the category of files Add one item in one line The added memos are displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 memos can be specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 263 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Editor panel This panel is used to display edit text files source files See CubeSuite 78KO Coding for details about this panel Figure A 23 Editor Panel main c eo This function implements main function S44 Parameters aS More amp T Returns Ba Morne iui a1j S2 roid maini void 53 ji aq f Start user code Do not edit comment generated here 96 int local a local b local c a7 int result 35 unsigned long i 104 local a iii E e R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 264 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output panel This panel is used to display the message that is output from the build tool Messages are shown individually
335. function name in the flash area is specified in the boot area by using the pragma ext_func directive a branch table is created The address of this branch table is specified by the user R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 471 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Specify the address as follows by using pragma ext_table when a load module of the boot area and a load module of the flash area are created pracma ext table 0x2000 When execution branches to the body of a function the actual function address is obtained by referencing the offset of the ID number from the beginning of the created branch table and then execution branches The example is shown below func _flasho func flashi If the above two C functions are allocated to the flash area and they are called from the boot area describe as follows in the C source file for the boot area pragma ext func func flasho 1 pragma ext func func _flashl 2 It is recommended to describe these pragma ext_func directive in one file and include this file in all source files by using the include directive in order to prevent missing descriptions or the occurrence of contradictions i e to prevent the error of specifying the different ID numbers for the same function name or specifying the same ID number for the different function names An image of relink function is shown below lt 1 gt C source file for the b
336. fy the additional include paths during compiling Additional include paths The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of the compiler is searched The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the compiler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified However this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 164 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE System include paths The include paths which the system set during compiling are displayed The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name
337. g and ga option Application Use the o option to specify the location to which an object module file is output or to change its file name Specify the no option when performing assembly only to output an assemble list file This will shorten assembly time Description Even if the o option is specified when a fatal error occurs the object module file cannot be output If the drive name is omitted when the o option is specified the object module file will be output to the current drive If the output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the output file name will be nput file name rel If both the o and no options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To output a hex file Sample rel describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm osample rel R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 388 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Forced object module file output specification The forced object module file output specification options are as follows j nj j nj Description format Interpretation when omitted nj Function The j option specifies that the object module file can be output even if a fatal error occurs The nj option disables the j option Application Normally when a fatal error occurs the object module file cannot be output When you wish to
338. g C Source File Property c_ main c Property El Build Set as build target Set individual compile option El Memory Bank Select commonbank area No specication Set as build target Selects whether to Guild this file Property dl aami man asm Property El Build Set as build target Set individual assemble option Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Property dir mk dir Property El Build Set as build target Set as build target Selects whether to build this file File Information R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 232 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 15 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting Variables Information File Property vill sample vfi Property El Build Set as build target Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Set as build tanget Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Property rel obj rel Property El Build Set as build target Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Property b user lib Property El Build Set as build tanget Set as build target Selects whether to build this file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 233 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Build The detailed information on the build are displayed
339. g other than a level is specified after the w option Only levels 0 1 and 2 can be specified The output levels are as follows 0 No warning message is output 1 A normal warning message is output 2 A detailed warning message is output Example of use To output a detailed warning message describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel w2 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 459 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Boot area ROM program linking specification for a product with built in flash memory The boot area ROM program linking specification option for a product with built in flash memory is as follows zb zb Description format Interpretation when omitted No link specification Function The zb option specifies the start address of the flash memory area Description Specify boot area ROM program linking for a product with built in flash memory and specify the start address of the flash memory area The range that can be specified for the value is OH to OFFFFH An error occurs if the address is omitted Caution Do not specify this option for a device that does not have a flash memory area self programming function Example of use To specify 2000H as the start address of flash memory area describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel zb2000h R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 460 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite
340. gress and closes this dialog box Note that if the process termination is impossible this button is disabled R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 289 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment All settings made via this dialog box are saved as preferences for the current user Figure A 37 Option Dialog Box Ej Laan i General Display Text Editor Font and Color a External Tools 5 Build 7 Debug Gy Update Others User Informatior E i The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Category selection area Select the items to configure from the following categories General Font and Color category Configure the fonts and colors shown on each panel General External Tools category Configure the startup of external tools General Build Debug category Configure building and debugging R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 290 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Update category Configure update Other User Information category Configure user information Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about categories
341. h ffile Input option or source module file name from specified file ga nga Output assembler source debug information to object file Not dname data name data Define name with data common Create the common object module file for 78k0 self Use Self programming zs ze zn compati nocompati Change source regulation zZ8S SJIS code usable in comment ze EUC code usable in comment zn no multibyte code in comment Use macro for DIVUW ROR4 ROL4 ADJBA ADJBS CALLF DBNZ Not Show this message DEFAULT ASSIGNMENT 0 ne p ka nks R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 nkx lw132 1166 nlf 1t8 g nj ga CENESAS Page 423 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 3 Linker The linker inputs a number of object module files output by the 78KO assembler determines a location address and outputs them as a single load module file The linker also outputs list files such as a link list file and an error list file If a link error occurs an error message is output to an error list file to clarify the cause of the error When an error occurs the load module file will not be output Figure B 5 I O Files of Linker Object module file Library file Link directive file Parameter file Temporary file LS Linker Load module file Link list file Error list file B 3 1 I O files The I O files of the linker are shown below See 3 3 Linker fo
342. hat 8 has been specified If ItO is specified tabulation processing will not be performed and a tabulation code will be output If the np option is specified the lt option is invalid Cautions A control instruction TAB with the same function as the lt option can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASATABAnumber of tabs Example of use To reference an assemble list file Sample orn when the It option is omitted describe as C gt ra78k0O cF051144 sample asm The contents of sample prn is as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 408 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assemble list OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT To specify 1 blank entered by the HT code describe as C gt ra78k0O cF051144 sample asm 1t1l The contents of sample prn is as follows Assemble list OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT SAMPM Remark The number of blanks entered by the HT code is 1 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 409 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If nlif Description format nlf Interpretation when omitted nlf Function The lf option inserts a form feed FF code at the end of an assemble list file The nlf option disables the lf option Application Use the If option to insert a form feed code if you wish to a
343. hat references to them are counted and output to the file as comments Variables for which sreg has already been specified are not eligible for allocation However that references to them are counted and output to the file as comments static variables are not eligible for allocation whether they are inside a file or a function However that references to them are counted and output to the file as comments Variables not defined in the C source are not eligible for allocation e g definitions in the assembler source or runtime libraries They are also not output to the output file Variables defined in the boot area and referenced by the flash area are not eligible for allocation However that references to them are counted and output to the file as comments They are also not output to the output file The following variables can be allocated to odd addresses Variables with a size of 1 byte char unsigned char enumeration type structure and union Arrays of variables with a size of 1 byte char unsigned char Arrays of variables of enumeration type structure and union with a size of 1 byte and having 1 element 3 Function information a Reference counting The variables information file generator counts the number of times reference symbols are referenced during relocation resolution However all functions are excluded from allocation specification targets and they are output as a comment
344. he Build Settings tab on the Property panel Select No on the Set as build target property in the Build category Figure 2 12 Set as build target Property Remark The files that can be applied this function are C source files assembler source files link directive files variables information files function information file object files and library files 2 3 5 Classify a file into a category You can create a category under the File node and classify files by the category This makes it easier to view files added to the project on the project tree and makes it easier to manage files according to function To create a category node select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add New Category from the context menu Figure 2 13 Add New Category Item For File Node Add Eile TOL Add New File A CASED Build Tool che FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a File ax Startup 3 Mi hew category R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 24 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 The default category name is New category To change the category name you can use Rename from the context menu of the category node 2 You can also add a category node with the same name as an existing category node 3 Categories can be nested up to 20 levels You can
345. he Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Compile Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Assemble Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Link Options tab Additional include paths in the Library category From the Individual Compile Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category Description of each area 1 Path edit area Edit or add the path a Path One path per one line Edit or adds the path by directly entering the path Path can be designated in multiple lines Designate a path at a line By default the contents of the text box that opened this dialog box are reflected in this area Path can be added by one of the following method R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 276 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Click the Browse button and then select folders in the Browse For Folder dialog box Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer Caution If an extremely long absolute path is specified as a relative path an error could occur when clicking the OK button In this case designate the absolute path Remark Up to 10000 lines are allowed Up to the maximum characters that are limited by the Windows OS are allowed When the i
346. he Output assemble file property in the Assembly File category from the Individual Compile Options tab R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 159 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c When the category node File node Build tool generated files node or Startup node is selected on the Project Tree panel Category Information tab Remark When multiple components are selected on the Project Tree panel only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed If the value of the property is modified that is taken effect to the selected components all of which are common to all Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Cancels the previous edit operation of the value of the property While editing the value of the property cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clip board Copies the selected characters of the property to the clip board While editing the value of the property inserts the contents of the clip board While editing the value of the property deletes the selected character string Select All While editing the value of the property Selects all the characters of the selected property Context menu Cancels the previous edit operation of the value of the property While editing the value of the property cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clip board Copies the selected characters of the property to the clip
347. he Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Adds a new category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Sets the selected project to an active project Saves a set of the this product and the project by copying them in a folder This menu is always disabled You can rename the selected project Displays the selected project s property on the Property panel R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 152 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 When the Subproject node is selected Build active project Builds the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Rebuilds the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Cleans the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folde
348. he Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Create Library Options tab Select Yes on the Output list file property in the Error List category The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node Remark See B 5 1 I O files for details about input and output files of the librarian 3 5 1 Library information output list The library information output list outputs data on the modules in a library file 78KO librarian 1 Vx xx Date 2 xx xxx xxxx Page 3 xxxx LIB FILE NAME 4 li 5 XX XXX XXXX 6 0001 7 kOmain rel 8 xxX XXX XXXX NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS 6 0002 7 k0sub rel 8 XX XXX XXXX 9 CONVAH NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS Item Description Format Number oe Date of list creation Date of list creation Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format CZ Number of pages Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Library file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted lib is attached as the file type extension K Date of library file creation Date of library file creation Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format CEN Module serial number Numbers are assigned starting with 0001 Module name Displays the module name If the fi
349. he additional include paths during assembling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of the assembler is searched The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified However this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 165 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE System include paths The include paths which the system set during assembling are displayed The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project
350. he compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kf Performs output by expanding if ifdef and ifndef directives into the preprocess list file No Does not perform output by expanding if ifdef and ifndef directives into the preprocess list file Expand include preprocessor directive Select whether to perform output by expanding include directives into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the ki option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes ki Performs output by expanding include directives into the preprocess list file No Does not expand the include directive into the preprocess list file Expand line preprocessor directive Select whether to perform output by expanding line directives into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kl option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kl Performs output by expanding line directives into th
351. he link option s during linking When using CubeSuite The setting is performed in Stack category from the Link Options tab on the Property panel When using CubeSuite the s option is automatically attached when the source file specification includes the C source 6 Using the object converter Use the object converter by specifying the r address sort of object and u filling value specification options When using CubeSuite on the Property panel from the Object Convert Options tab configure the Hex File Filling property in the Hex File category These options are specified by default An abort error occurs if a ROM code is ordered work known as across processing or tape out when the addresses of the objects are not sorted Therefore be sure to specify r do not cancel the specification 7 Object filling value specification option u If starting address is specified by the object convert option u filling is started from the start address or the address where the code is located whichever is lower Filling is not performed for the SFR area FFOOH to FFFFH Description format is described below ufilling valuel start address size Remark may be omitted 8 Include file dependence relationship During checking of dependence relationships of include files with CubeSuite condition statements such as if and comments are ignored Therefore include files not required for build are mistaken as requ
352. he variables relocation options are detailed instructions for the operation of the variables information file genera tor The types and explanations for variables relocation options are shown below Table B 31 Variables Relocation O Classification o Despina Variables information file output Specifies the output of a variables information file specification Vacant saddr area specification e ea Specifies Specifies the margin size of the saddr area 0 margin size of the saddr area ROM RAM usage output specifi Outputs ROM RAM usage after the linking to the standard output cation R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 558 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Variables information file output specification The variables information file output specification option is as follows VO VO Description format vooutput file name Interpretation when omitted This option cannot be omitted except when specifying vx option Function The vo option specifies the output of a variables information file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application Use the vo option to specify the output of a variables information file Description The default file type is vfi output file name which includes a path name can be specified Even if the vo option is specified when an error occurs before linking is
353. hen omitted None no file is output Function The p option specifies the output of a preprocess list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name If the p option is omitted no preprocess list file is output Application Use the p option to output the source file after preprocess processing is executed according to the k option process type or to change the output destination or the output file name of the preprocess list file Description If the output file name is omitted when the p option is specified the output file name will be input file name ppl If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the p option is specified the output file name will be output file name ppl If the drive name is omitted when the p option is specified the preprocess list file will be output to the current drive Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To output the preprocess list file Sample ppl describe as C gt cc78k0O cF051144 prime c psample ppl R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 344 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE k Description format k process type two or more types can be specified Interpretation when omitted fln Function The k option specifies the processing for the preprocess list Application
354. iables information file property and the Variables information file name property to change the output folder and file name of the variables information file If the Variables information file property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree b Set compile options Select the Compile Options tab Select Yes zf on the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category Figure 2 87 Output objects for flash Property in Flash Area O Memory Model MT Tes zf Next select Yes For flash area on the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category Figure 2 88 Use standard startup routine Property in Flash Area fes For flash areal Next add the created variables information file for the boot area in 2 14 2 Set the boot area project to the flash area project Specify the variables information file for the boot area on the Variables information file for boot area property in the Variable Information File category R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 67 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 89 Variables information file for boot area Property in Flash Area O Yanables Information Fie m _ Abooth D efaultBuild boot wti c Set link options Add the created boot area load module file in 2 14 2 Set the boot a
355. ibrary file name lib to be used other than the standard libraries Add one file in one line The library files are searched from the library path This corresponds to the b option of the linker The specified library file name is displayed as the subproperty Using libraries number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 166 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Additional library paths Specify the search folder to be used other than the standard libraries The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder The library files are searched from the library path If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the linker The specified library path name is displayed as the subproperty Additional library paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use th
356. ibrary paths 0 System library paths System library paths 0 Device Message Stack Link List Error List Others Add debug informabon Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g option El common 4 j Memory ka R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 428 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 3 4 Option 1 Types The link options are detailed instructions for the operation of the linker The types and explanations for link options are shown below Table B 9 Link Options Specifies the output of a load module file Load module file output specification z Forced load module file output Forces the output of a load module file specification I Debug information output Specifies that debug information is to be added to a load module file specification I Stack decision symbols Automatically generates public symbols for stack decision Inputs the specified file as a link directive file Specifies the output of a link list file I i generation specification I Link directive file specification Link list file output specification O a 3 Link list file information Outputs a map list into a link list file specification nkm x ok Outputs a link directive file into a link list file nkd Outputs a public symbol list
357. ical functions and floating point runtime library If these functions will not be used the RAM can be conserved by selecting No This property is not displayed when No in the Use standard startup routine property is selected Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the fixed area used by the standard library Does not use the fixed area used by the standard library Using standard startup Displays the file name of the standard startup routine objects used during linking in the current routine settings Nore This property is not displayed when No in the Use standard startup routine property is selected Default Using startup routine file name How to change Changes not allowed Note Naming rules of startup routine files are as follows sO0 lt model gt lt lib gt lt flash gt rel lt modek When the memory model is the normal model When the memory model is the static model lt lib gt When the fixed area used by the standard library is not used When the fixed area used by the standard library is used lt flash gt When the standard object is generated S When the object for the boot area is generated es When the object for the flash area is generated 6 Library The detailed information on the library are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 182 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite
358. ified last is valid If the np option is specified the kp option is invalid Example of use To output a public symbol list into a link list file kO map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel g pk0O map kp The contents of kO map is as follows 78KO Linker Vx xx Date XX XXX XXXX Page Command kOmain rel kOsub rel g pk0O map kp Para file Out file kOmain 1lmf Map file k0O map Direc file Directive Tink information 3 output segment s 2FH byte s real data R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 443 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 23 symbol s defined kee Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000H SIZE 8000H 78KO Linker Vx xx Date XxX XXX XXXX Page 2 xxx Public symbol list MODULE ATTR VALUE NAME SAMPM ADDR 0000H MAIN SAMPM ADDR 0080H START SAMPS ADDR 0093H CONVAH Target chip uPD78xxx Device file VxX xx R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 444 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE kl nkl Description format nkl Interpretation when omitted nkl Function The kl option outputs a local symbol list into a link list file The nkl option disables the kl option Application Use the kl option to output a local symbol list into a link list file Description If the nkm nkp and nkl optio
359. ified via the c option 9 Debug information Outputs DEBUG control Output is either DEBUG or NODEBUG 10 Debug information control of Outputs NODEBUGA control assembler Output is NODEBUGA lt Kanji type information Outputs the kanji code 2 byte code type Output is KANJICODE SJIS KANJICODE EUC or KANJICODE NONE NO lt Tool information Outputs tool information version number error information specified options etc information starts with TOL_INF ice lt Symbol information Outputs symbol information information starts with DGS This information is output only when the debug information output option has been specified Even then it is not output if the g1 option has been specified Assembler source Outputs an assembler source file containing the compilation results Line number Outputs the C source module file s line numbers as right aligned decimal value with zeros suppressed C source This is the input C source image Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 16 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 Line number information Outputs the line number for line number entry information starts with DGL Ol OD N lt This information is output only when the debug information output option has been specified Even then it is not output if the g1 option has been sp
360. igure 2 30 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line F Browse Subfolders are automatically included Enter an include path per line in Path One path per one line You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 64 line Remark You can also specify the include path by dragging and dropping from Explorer or the like or by the Browse button Select the Subfolders are automatically included check box before clicking the Browse button to add all paths under the specified one down to 5 levels to Path One path per one line If you click the OK button the entered include paths are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 31 Additional include paths Property After Adding Include Paths Additional include paths De Macro detinition Macro definition 0 Macro undetinitian Macro undetinition 0 To change the include paths you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties automatically Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Additional include paths property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 35 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 4 Set a macro definition Select the build tool node
361. ild i executed in parallel with edit When rapid build is made effective we recommend diligently saving a file by Chrl S after the file is edited Observe registered files changing Enable Break Sound Initialize Settings Enable the rapid build Nte feature default o Do not use the rapid build feature Note This feature automatically begins a build when the source file being edited is saved Enabling this feature makes it possible to perform builds while editing source files If this feature is used we recommend saving frequently after editing source files R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 292 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Observe registered files changing This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected Start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like F Do not start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like default Remark This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected Cautions 1 The rapid build will not finish if this item is selected and the files to be built have been reg istered for automatic editing or overwriting e g by commands executed before or after the build If the rapid build does not finish unselect this item a
362. ile p Highlight the project that has been changed The file component that is added to the project and the property of the project component are changed the project name is followed by and is displayed in boldface The boldface is canceled when the project is saved The project that has not been changed E sample Project The project that has been changed E sample Project q Highlight the active project The active projects is underlined Non active project Fi sample Project Active project Lit sample Project R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 150 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE r Run the editor Open the file with the specific extension in the Editor panel When an external editor is specified to use in the Option dialog box open the file with the external editor Other files are opened with the application associated with the OS Caution The files with the extensions that are not associated with the OS are not displayed You can open the editor by one of the following procedure Double click the file Select the file and then select Open from the context menu Select the file and then press the Enter key The files that can be opened in the Editor pane are as follows C source file c Assembler source file asm Header file h inc Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vfi Function information file
363. ile This corresponds to the ka option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the assemble list information into the assemble list file No nka Does not output the assemble list information into the assemble list file Output with symbol list Select whether to output the symbol list information into the assemble list file This corresponds to the ks option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes ks Outputs the symbol list information into the assemble list file No Does not output the symbol list information into the assemble list file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 201 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output with cross Select whether to output the cross reference list information into the assemble list file reference list This corresponds to the kx option of the assembler If Yes is selected on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab this property will be changed to Yes kx This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble l
364. iler error messages e 2 I O files Temporary file Intermediate file for compiling nn The file is renamed to an appropriate name when file name fixed compiling ends without error and is deleted when compiling ends in error Function information fileN File specifying where the functions are allocated 3 to Notes 1 The file type of the variables information file cannnot be omitted The default file type of the variables information file output by the variables information file generator is vfi 2 The following 4 file types are available for error list files File Type Description cer Error list files with C source corresponding to c files output by specifying the se option R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 320 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE File Type Description her Error list files with C source corresponding to h files output by specifying the se option Error list files with C source corresponding to files other than the above output by specifying the se option Error list files without C source corresponding to all of the source files output by specifying the e option 3 Only devices with a memory bank installed B 1 2 Functions 1 Optimization method Optimization is performed to create efficient object module files in the CA78KO The supported optimization methods are shown below Table B 2 Optimization Method
365. ill not fit on the command line When specifying options repeatedly every time you perform list conversion describe the options in the parameter file and specify the f option Description An abort error occurs if the file name is omitted If only the primary name of the output file name is specified the list converter will add plv to the file name as the file type and open the file Nesting of parameter files is not permitted An abort error occurs if the f option is specified within a parameter file The number of characters that can be described within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space a tab or the line feed code LF Options and input file names within a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last is valid An abort error occurs if two or more f option is specified The characters following or are all assumed to be comments up to the line feed code LF or EOF Example of use Perform list conversion using a parameter file kO plv The contents of the parameter file kO plv is as follows parameter file kOmain 1k0 1lmf ekO elv Enter the following from the command line C gt lenv78k0 f k0 plv R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 548 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Hel
366. in boot area can be directly Branch table called from flash area br func flashl br func flash2 In the same manner as functions this is relevant to referencing external variables A global variable defined in the boot area cannot be referenced from the flash area 3 Realizing relink function This section describes specifically how to realize the relink function a Project of CubeSuite To realize the relink function a boot area and flash area must be separately created This means that only the flash area is modified after the boot area has been created after a program has been stored in ROM When creating a project with CubeSuite therefore divide the projects as follows Project to be allocated to the boot area Project to be allocated to the flash area project that may be modified in the future In addition separately prepare a startup routine and link directive file for each project b pragma ext_func directive When calling a function in the flash area from the boot area the name of the function to be called label name and ID number are assigned to the boot area by using the pragma ext_func directive The format of the pragma ext_func directive is as follows pragma ext func function name ID number Specify a positive number as the ID number The different ID number must not be specified for the same function name or the same ID number must not be specified for the different function names When a
367. includes the data required to start up the C compiler Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows A option Aoption If the C source file name is omitted from the command line only 1 C source file name can be specified in the parameter file The C source file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all compile options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file KOmain pcc using an editor and then start up the C compiler parameter file CcF051144 kOmain c e a C gt cc78k0 f kOmain pcc R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 324 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the C compiler is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78KO C Compiler Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation b Execution end message If it detects no compile errors resulting from the C compiler the C compiler outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the host operating system Target chip uPD780xx Device file VX XX Compilation complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found If it detects a compile errors resulting from the C compiler the C compiler outputs
368. ine This setting is common to all the build modes The added memos are displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 11 Others Other detailed information on the build tool are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 170 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output message format Specify the format of the message being built This applies to the messages output by the build tool to be used and commands added by plugins It does not apply to the output messages of commands specified in the Commands executed before build processing or Commands executed after build processing property The following macro names are available as embedded macros Program Replaces with the program name under execution Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution FileName Replaces with the file name being built If this is blank it is assumed that Program Options has been specified Default How to change FileName Directly enter to the text box up to 256 characters or select from the drop down list Restriction FileName Displays the file na
369. ine numbers and symbol information needed in the object module file to be input to the debugger are not output Therefore in source level debugging all of the modules to be linked are compiled by specifying the g option Description The operation differs depending on the value of n as follows No specification It is assumed that the n has been specified Adds debug information information starting with DGS or DGL to the object module file only No debug information is added to the assembler source file This option makes it easier to reference an assembler file Source debugging of object files is available since debug information is added to them Adds debug information to the object module file and the assembler source module file If both the g and ng options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If both the object module file and assembler source module file are not output the g option is invalid Example of use To add assembler source debug information to an object module file prime rel describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c g R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 343 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Preprocess list file creation specification The preprocess list file creation specification options are as follows aap adh p Description format p output file name Interpretation w
370. information local symbol information is to be added to a load module file The ng option disables the g kp and kl option Application Be sure to use the g option when performing symbolic debugging with the source debugger Description If the ng option is specified the public symbol list and local symbol list cannot be output If both the g and ng options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the no option is specified the g option is invalid Example of use To add debug information to a load module file kOsub lmf describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel g R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 434 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Stack decision symbols generation specification The stack decision symbols generation options are as follows S ns S ns Description format slarea name ns Interpretation when omitted NS Function The s option generates the stack decision public symbols _ STBEG and _ STEND The ns option disables the s option Application Use the s option to reserve a stack area Description Specify a memory area name defined by the user or a memory area name defined by default as area name Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are distinguished for area name The linker searches the memory area specified by th
371. ink_flash dr vo wi Flash wFi 2rCENESAS Page 69 of 570 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 Make Settings for Build Operations This section explains operations on a build Set the link order of files Change the file build order of subprojects Display a list of build options Change the file build target project Add a build mode Change the build mode Delete a build mode Set the current build options as the standard for the project 2 15 1 Set the link order of files The link order of object module files and library files is decided automatically but you can also set the order On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu The Link Order dialog box opens Figure 2 93 Link Order Dialog Box Link Order mar rel Sse rel uar lib The names of the following files are listed in File in the order that the files are input to the linker Object module files generated from the source files added to the selected main project or subproject Object module files added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Library files added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Remark The default order is the order the files are added to the project Object module files created from newly added source files and newly added object module
372. int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Does not allocate static variables to the saddr area R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 192 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 Allocate external variables to saddr area APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select the type of the external variable to be allocated in the saddr area This corresponds to the rd option of the compiler This property is not displayed when a file name is set in the Using variables information file property in the Variables Information File category How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction 15 List File Yes Size of char rd1 Yes Size of char short int rd2 Yes Size of char short int long rd4 Yes Structure union array rdm Yes Size of char and structure union array rdim Yes Size of char short int and structure union array rd2m Yes Size of char short int long and structure union array rd Allocates char and unsigned char types external variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used types external variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned lo
373. ion can be changed 1 Debug Information 1 2 Preprocess 3 Output File 4 Assemble List 5 Others Figure A 6 Property Panel Assemble Options Tab Property A CASO Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information El Preprocess Additional include paths Sistem include paths Macro definition El Output File Output common object tile for various devices fes Local symbols info and assembler debugging into Additional include paths 0 Sistem include pathe O Macro detinitian 0 No Output error list file No Assemble List Others Add debug informabon Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option comesponds to the g and ga options Common Compile A Description of each category 1 Debug Information A Link Opti 4 Object Co variables Memory ka The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information being generated Select whether to enable source level debugging by adding debug information to the module This corresponds to the g and ga options of the assembler Default Yes Local symbols info and assembler debugging info How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Assembler debugging info ng ga Yes Local symbols info and assembler debugging info R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 2
374. ion option is as follows C Description format Interpretation when omitted Cannot be omitted Function The c option specifies the target device for performing assembly Application Be sure to specify the c option The assembler performs assembly for the target device and generates an object code for that device Description See CubeSuite Operating Precautions for the target devices that can be specified by the c option Cautions The c option cannot be omitted However if a control instruction 6PROCESSOR with the same function as the c option is described at the beginning of the source command line specification can be omitted ASAPROCESSORA Adevice typeA ASAPCA Adevice typeA Abbreviated form Example of use To specify the uPD78F0511_44 as the target device describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 387 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Object module file output specification The object module file output specification options are as follows 0 NO 0 NO Description format o output file name no Interpretation when omitted oinput file name rel Function The o option specifies the output of an object module file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The no option disables the o j
375. ion to specify a batch file example call a bat The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after build processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 172 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Compile Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the compiler categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed s Debug Information 1 2 Optimization 3 Optimization Details 4 Preprocess 5 Startup 6 Library 7 Message 8 Extension 9 Memory Model 10 Output File 11 Assembly File 12 Variables Information File 13 Function Information File 14 Data Control 15 List File 16 Others R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 173 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 5
376. ions are as follows km nkm kd nkd kp nkp kl nkl km nkm Description format km nkm Interpretation when omitted km Function The km option outputs a map list into a link list file The nkm option disables the kd and km option Application Use the km option to output a map list into a link list file Description If the nkm nkp and nkl options are all specified the link list file cannot be output If the nkm option is specified the link directive file cannot be output into a link list file If both the km and nkm options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the np option is specified the km option is invalid Example of use To output a map list into a link list file kKO map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel pk0O map km The contents of kO map is as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 439 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Linker Vx xx Date xx Xxx XXXX Page 1 Command kOmain rel kOsub rel pkO map km Para file Out file kOmain 1lmf Map file kO map Direc file Directive xxx Tink information 3 output segment s 2FH byte s real data 23 symbol s defined see Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000H SIZE 8000H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SIZE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADD
377. ions are input while compiling When specifying options repeatedly every time you perform compilation describe the options in the parameter file and specify the f option Description Nesting of parameter files is not permitted The number of characters that can be described within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space and a tab Options and input file names within a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last takes precedence The characters following or are all assumed to be comments before the end of the line J Example of use Contents of the parameter file prime pcc parameter file prime c cF051144 aprime asm e x Perform compilation using a parameter file prime pcc C gt cc78k0 fprime pcc R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 368 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Temporary file creation folder specification The temporary file creation folder specification option is as follows ef Description format Interpretation when omitted The temporary files are created in the drive folder specified by the environment variable TMP If the environment variable TMP is not specified the temporary files are created in the current drive and current folder Function The t option s
378. iption format se output file name Interpretation when omitted No error list file is output Function The se option adds the C source file to the error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application Use the se option to output a error list file and a C source file together Description If the output file name is omitted when the se option is specified the output file name will be nput file name cer If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the se option is specified the output file name will be output file name cer If the drive name is omitted when the se option is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive The folder and file name cannot be specified for include files If the file type of the include file is H the error list file with the file type of her is output to the current drive It the file type of the include file is C the error list file with the file type of cer is output In all other cases the error list file with the file type of er is output If an error does not occur the C source is not added In this case the error list file is not created for the include file If the w0 option is specified warning messages cannot be output Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To add the C source fil
379. ired files In the example below header1 h and header5 h are judged as required for build 1 include else include endif define ifdef include else include endif include 0 headerl header2 AAA AAA header3 header4 header5 Dependence l zero Dependence Dependence Dependence Dependence relationship relationship relationship relationship relationship judged to exist to exist to exist to exist judged to exist R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 133 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS During checking of dependence relationships of include files with CubeSuite include statements described after comments are ignored Therefore include files required for build are mistaken as no required files In the example below header6 h and header7 h are judged as no required for build comment include header6 h Dependence relationship judged not to exist comment include header7 h Dependence relationship judged not to exist 9 Using a network If you place the folder in which to create temporary files on a file system that is shared over a network file contention could occur when using certain types of network software causing abnormal operation Avoid this type of contention by properly configuring the options and environment variables When
380. is 0 to 8 If ItO is specified tabulation processing will not be performed and a tabulation code will be output If the number of characters is omitted the number of expansion characters of a tab is 8 If the list file is not specified the lt option is invalid Example of use If the It option is omitted the compiler assumes that the It8 option is specified and the number of blanks entered by the HT code is set to 8 C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c p To specify 1 blank entered by the HT code describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c p 1tl R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 363 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format Interpretation when omitted No form feed code is inserted Function The If option inserts a form feed code at the end of each list file Description If the list file is not specified the lf option is invalid Example of use To insert a form feed code at the end of an assembler source file prime asm describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c a lf R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 364 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format Interpretation when omitted No C sources in the include file will be added Function The li option adds the C source in the include file to the assembler source file with C sour
381. is not displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes If Outputs a form feed code into the end of the link list file No Does not output a form feed code into the end of the link list file Number of lines on 1 Specify the number of lines on 1 page of the link list file page If O is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected Default How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 and 20 to 32767 decimal number 9 Error List The detailed information on the error list is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output error list file Select whether to output the error list file This corresponds to the e option of the linker How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes e Outputs an error list file Does not output the error list file 10 Others Other detailed information on linking are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 212 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before link processing before link processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following macr
382. isplays the version number of the input device file 13 Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 14 Number of warnings Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Error list file with error message only prime CC78K0 warning 4 Expected function prototype prime CC78K0 warning 4 Expected function prototype prime CC78K0 warning 4 No return value prime CC78K0 warning 4 No return value prime CC78K0 warning 4 No return value Target chip 5 uPD78F0511 44 Device file 6 VX XX Compilation complete 7 0 error s and 8 5 warning s found Item Description Format Number 1 C source file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted c is attached as the file type extension Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 98 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS ltem Description Format Number Error message number Outputs error numbers in the nnnn format F is output if is an abort error E if it is a fatal error C if is an Internal error and W if it is a warning nnnn the error number is displayed as a 4 digit decimal number no zero suppression A Error message Outputs error messages oa Target device for this compiler Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the sourc
383. ist file KOmain prn is as follows Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT NAME SAMPM SEERA RARER A ERE AR RRR A HR RR DR HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program main routine pt kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk PUBLIC MAIN START EXTRN CONVAH AT OFE20H 11201A HDTSA 1AH 1620FE HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 402 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format 11 number of lines Interpretation when omitted II66 No page breaks in the case of display output Function The Il option specifies the number of lines per page in an assemble list file Application Use the Il option to change the number of lines per page in an assemble list file Description The range number of lines that can be specified with the Il option is 20 to 32767 An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified If the number of lines is omitted it is assumed that 66 has been specified If the number of lines specified is 0 no page breaks will be made If the np option is specified the Il option is invalid Cautions A control instruction LENGTH with the same function as the Il option can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below Example
384. ist file property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kx Outputs the cross reference list information into the assemble list file No Does not output the cross reference list information into the assemble list file Output with form feed control code Select whether to output a form feed code into the end of list files This corresponds to the If option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes If Outputs a form feed code into the end of the list files No Does not output a form feed code into the end of the list files Number of characters in 1 line Specify the number of characters in each line of the list file This corresponds to the Iw option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default 132 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 72 to 2046 decimal number Number of lines on 1 page Specifies the number of lines on 1 page of the list file If O is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default How to change Directly enter to the text box
385. ist file can be understood at a glance Description Up to 60 characters can be specified in the title The character string cannot include blank spaces If more than 61 characters are specified the first 60 characters will be valid and no error message will be output A kanji and hiragana 2 byte character is calculated as two characters If the maximum number of characters per line is 119 or less the length of the effective character string changes as follows Effective length Max number of characters per line 60 An abort error occurs if he character string is not specified If the np option is specified the Ih option is invalid If the Ih option is omitted the title column of the assemble list file will be blank The character set that can be described in the title column is as follows In Command Line In Parameter File Can be described if enclosed in Can be described Interpreted in the same way as in the command line even if enclosed in Can be described if enclosed in Cannot be described Assumed to be a comment Can be described Cannot be described Assumed to be a comment double quotation mark Cannot be described as a valid Cannot be described as a valid character character Cannot be described Can be described However it is interpreted as the end of the character string R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 405 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPEN
386. ith the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Commands executed before compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 252 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after compile processing after compile processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lInputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog b
387. ithout rebuilding the program in the boot area By creating load module files for the boot area and flash area you can implement the relink function The method to implement the relink function is shown below Remark See B 3 5 Boot flash relink function for details about the relink function and how to implement it 2 14 1 Prepare the build target files 1 Prepare the link directive files Prepare link directive files for the projects for both the boot area and flash area Remark You can use the same link directive file with the boot area and flash area but since the description will become complicated it is recommend to use a separate link directive file for each area 2 Describe the pragma ext_func directive Describe the pragma ext_func directive in the C source file With the ext_func directive specify the ID value for the target function the actual function exists in the flash area and is called from the boot area Remark In order to prevent description mistakes and inconsistencies between source files it is recommend that you organize the ext_func directive description in a single file and regardless of the boot area or flash area include that file in all the C source files 2 14 2 Set the boot area project 1 Create the boot area project Create a project for the boot area and add the build target files to the project Figure 2 78 Boot Area Project Project Tree E F i eee boot Project PS uPD SF05868_46
388. ize Remarks 1 Ifthe unknown function is written in assembly language then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe unknown function is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Apr 01 2011 Page 313 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Ifthe unknown function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe unknown function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name 2 Adjusted Functions Display a list of functions for which information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modified intentionally via the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file This area generally dis plays modified adjusted functions in the following format function name total stack size frame size additional margin Remarks 1 If the adjusted function is written in assembly language then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe adjusted function is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to
389. ize of char and structure union array rk1m Yes Size of char short int and structure union array rk2m Yes Size of char short int long and structure union array rk Allocates char and unsigned char types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointer types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointer structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Does not allocate automatic variables to the saddr area R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 191 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 Allocate static variables to saddr area APPENDIX A
390. k relocation support tool Memory Bank Relocation Options tab 2 12 2 Set build options at the file level You can individually set compile and assemble options for each source file added to the project 1 When setting compile options for a C source file Select a C source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel In the Build category if you select Yes on the Set individual compile option property the message dialog box Figure 2 70 Message Dialog Box is displayed Figure 2 69 Set individual compile option Property Figure 2 70 Message Dialog Box Question Q0 703001 Are you sure you want to set the curent compile options to the individial compile options If you click the Yes button in the dialog box the Individual Compile Options tab will be displayed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 58 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 71 Property Panel Individual Compile Options Tab Property c main c Property El Debugintormaton Add debug information esj dd to both assembly and object tilell g El Optimization Perform optimization fes Standard que Preproces Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified tor build tool es Macro definition Macro detinition O Macro undefinitior Macro undefinitian 0 Message Extension Memory Model Output File Assembly
391. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk PUBLIC CONVAH CSEG CONVAH XOR A y A ROL4 HL hex lower code load CALL SASC MOV B A store result XOR A A ROL4 HL hex lower code load CALL SASC MOV C A store result RET kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkk i subroutine convert ASCII code input Acc lower 4bits lt hex code output Acce lt ASCII code kkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SASC CMP A 0AH check hex code gt 9 BC SSASC1 ADD A 07H bias 7H SASC1 ADD A 30H bias 30H RET END R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 131 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS This chapter provides notes for using CubeSuite and CA78KO commands 1 2 Kanji code 2 byte code classification To use a source containing EUC code set the environmental variable LANG78K to euc or specify the ze option When using CubeSuite on the Property panel configure the Kanji character code of source property in Extension category from the Compile Options tab for C source file or the Kanji character code of source files property in the Others category from the Assemble Options tab for assembler source If the specified Japanese character encoding scheme differs from the encoding scheme used in the source an error might occur during building or some of the code might be incorrectly processed
392. ks Function The ks option outputs a symbol list followed by an assemble list into an assemble list file The nks option disables the ks option Application Use the ks option to output a symbol list Description If the nka nks and nkx options are all specified the assemble list file cannot be output If the ks and kx options are specified at the same time ks is ignored If both the ks and nks options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the np option is specified the ks option is invalid Example of use To output a symbol list followed by an assemble list file into an assemble list file KOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm ks The contents of kOmain prn is as follows Symbol Table List ATTR RTYP NAME RTYP NAME CSEG CONVAH HDTSA SAMPM STASC R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 398 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE kKx nkx Description format nkx Interpretation when omitted nkx Function The kx option outputs a cross reference list followed by an assemble list into an assemble list file The nka option disables the kx option Application Use the kx option to output a cross reference list when you wish to know where and to what degree each symbol defined in a source file is referenced in the source or when you wi
393. l A File Sx Startup Drop the file here Caution To add a startup routine drop a file onto the Startup node See 2 3 1 Set a startup routine for details about using a startup routine b Add a folder Drag a folder from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty space below the project tree The Add Folder and File dialog box opens Remark You can also add multiple folders to the project at the same time by dragging multiple folders at same time and dropping them onto the project tree Caution When a folder with the name that is more than 200 characters is dropped the folder is added to the project tree as a category with the name that 201st character and after are deleted R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 19 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 7 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file c Header file h mc Assemble file asm Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vf Library file lib Object file rel Test file twt Sublolder level to search In the dialog select the file types to add to the project specify the number of subfolder levels to add and then click the OK button Remark You can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are
394. l RA78K0O error F3006 File not found samp2 rel Program Aborted In the above example a non existent object module file is specified An error occurs and the linker aborts the link Anon existent link option is specified C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel z R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 427 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Linker Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78KO error F3018 Option is not recognized z Please enter LK78KO if you want help messages Program Aborted In the above example a non existent link option is specified An error occurs and the linker aborts the link 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set link options from CubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Link Options tab You can set the various link options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 6 Property Panel Link Option Tab Property A CAFOKO Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information El Input File El Output File Output folder B uildModeN amez Output file name 2Projecth ame Imt Force linking against error No Library Using libraries Using librarnies 0 System libraries System libranes O Additional library paths Additional l
395. l option How to change Directly enter to the text box 0 to 8 decimal number Header title Specify the header of the assemble list file A string containing double byte characters and single byte spaces can be specified This corresponds to the Ih option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box Up to 60 single byte characters 30 double byte characters 5 Others Other detailed information on assembly are displayed and the configuration can be changed Kanji character code of Select the Kanji character code of the source Source This corresponds to the zs ze and zn options of the assembler Configuration of the general option Select from the drop down list Use Self programming Select whether to use self programming This corresponds to the self option of the assembler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes self Even if the internal ROM does not exist at the 8100H address no error is output for the CALL 8100H description No If the internal ROM does not exist at the 8100H address an error is output for the CALL 8100H description R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 259 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE
396. le Replaces with absolute path of the input file under object convert processing ObjectConvertedFile Replaces with absolute path of the output file under object convert processing The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after object convert processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 218 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Other additional options Input the object convert options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the object convert options group How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 219 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Create Library Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the librarian categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Output File 2 List File 3 Others Caution This tab is displayed only for library projects Figure A 9 Property Panel C
397. le property to Yes The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 96 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Error list file with C source 78KO C Compiler V 1 x xx Error List Command C file 5 prime c 6 prime cer 7 Err file Para file define TRUE define FALSE Hdefine SIZE mark SIZE 1 void main int i prime k cont 0 kkk CC78K0 error 9 E0711 1 lt SIZE i lt SIZE for i mark i prime printf CC78K0 warning 11 Target chip uPD78F0511 44 12 Device file Vx xx Compilation complete 10 Undeclared 9 W0745 13 1 error s Date 2 XX XXX XXXX Time 3 XX XX XX 4 cF051144 prime c se count cont function main i TRUE 3 i i i1 3 z6d prime 10 Expected function prototype and 14 5 warning s found ltem Description Format Number e R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 Displayed in x yz format System date Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format System time Displayed in HH MM SS format Outputs the command line contents following CC78K0 Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 13 on the next line One or more white sp
398. le property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Directly enter to the text box 0 to 8 decimal number 16 Others Other detailed information on compilation are displayed and the configuration can be changed Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before compile processing before compile Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Commands executed before compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 196 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after compile processing after compile proce
399. le format Intel expanded hes format kie Split hes file MHo Hex File Filling Fill free memor space Yesf ul Filing value HEX FF Filing start address HEX Filling size byte Hen Symbol T able Error List Others Output hex file Select this option to generate a hex file This option corresponds to the o option 1 common A B 4 4 Option 1 Types The object convert options are detailed instructions for the operation of the object converter The types and explanations for object convert options are shown below Table B 24 Object Convert Options Hex file output specification Specifies the format of a hex file Symbol table file output Specifies the output of a symbol table file specification Object address order sort Sorts hex format objects in order of address specification Object filling value specification Outputs a specified filling value as an object code for an address area to which no hex format object has been output Error list file output specification R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 498 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ee e rea a e oa Motorola S type format 32 bit address Device file search path Reads a device file from a specified path specification File separate output Splits the file into separate files one for the boot area and one for specification for built in flash other areas memory product Help specification E Outpu
400. le include paths specified for build tool ves Macro definition Macro detinitian 0 Output File Assemble List Others Add debug informaton Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g and ga options You Build Settings File Information can set assemble options for the assembler source file by setting the necessary properties in this tab Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Assemble Options tab by default Remark You can also set assemble options for assembler source files created from C source files Select a C source file on the project tree and select the Individual Compile Options tab on the Property panel If you select Yes on the Output assemble file property in the Assembly File category the Individual Assemble Options tab is displayed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 60 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 13 Prepare for Using On chip Debugger To use the on chip debugger you must set the on chip debug user option byte and security ID 1 Setting the on chip debug 2 3 The on chip debug function of the microcontroller is enabled by setting the on chip debug Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Set the on chip debug in the Device category If you select Yes go on the Use on chi
401. le is renamed to an appropriate name when the compiling ends without error If compiling ends in error the temporary files are deleted R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2CENESAS Page 319 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 1 1 I O files The I O files of the C Compiler are shown below See 3 1 C Compiler for details about output files Table B 1 I O Files of C Compiler Type rll Input files C source file Source file written in the C language user C created file Include file File referenced from C source files File written in C language user created file Parameter file File created by the user when the user wants to specify multiple commands that cannot be specified in the command line when the C compiler is run Variables information file File which specifies the allocation destinations of variables Output files Object module file Binary image file containing machine language information relocatable information related to the location address of the machine language and symbol information Assembler source file ASCII image file of the object code output by the compiler Preprocess list file List file output by the preprocess instructions such as include ASCII image file Cross reference list file List file containing the function name and variable name information used in the C source file Error list file List file containing the source file and comp
402. le type is omitted ref is attached as the file type extension Date of module creation Date of module creation Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 116 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number 9 Public symbol name Display the public symbol name 10 a of public symbols Displays the number of public symbols defined in the module defined in module Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 3 6 List Converter The list converter outputs the following lists Output List File Name Output List Name Absolute assemble list file Absolute assemble list Error list file Error list To configure the absolute assemble list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Assemble Options tab Select Yes on the Execute list converter property in the Assemble List category To output the error list file in the Assemble List category set the Output list converter error list file property to Yes e The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property Remark See B 6 1 O files for details about input and output files of the list converter 3 6 1 Absolute assemble list The absolute assemble lis
403. lf nlt Add Form Feed at end of the link map file Not s memory area ns Create stack symbol in specified memory area Not g ng Output symbol information to load module file Not ydirectory Set device file search path j nj Create load module file if fatal error occurred Not w n Change warning level n 0 to 2 zbaddress Create Boot file address flash start address go n Change On chip debug program size n 256 to 1024 giid Set Security ID Show this message DEFAULT ASSIGNMENT o p ne km kd nkp nkl 1166 nlf ns g nj w1 directive file usage MEMORY memory area name origin value size memory space name MERGE segment name location type definition merge type definition memory area name memory space name example MEMORY ROM 0H 4000H MEMORY RAMA 0H 100H EX1 MERGE CSEG1 ROM MERGE DSEG1 AT 80H R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 467 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 3 5 Boot flash relink function 1 Relink function Some systems are equipped with flash area or detachable ROM To upgrade the version of the program the contents of the flash area may be rewritten or the detachable ROM may be replaced with a new ROM When changing the program even partially basically the project itself is reorganized or rebuilt However it would be convenient if the allocation to be upgraded was limited to the fla
404. location Options tab this property will be changed to Yes p Select from the drop down list Does not output an assemble list file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 200 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Execute list converter Select whether the list converter is executed following the generation of an execution module The list converter is not executed during library generation This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Executes the list converter after the generation of an execution module No Does not execute the list converter after the generation of an execution module Output list converter error list file Select whether to output an error list file during list converter execution This corresponds to the e option of the list converter This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected and when No in the Execute list converter property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes e Outputs an error list file during list converter execution No Does not output an error list file during list converter execution Output with assemble list info Select whether to output the assemble list information into the assemble list f
405. lt Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Yes qg Performs the optimization for debugging No Does not specify performing the optimization for debugging Note The results of the calculation when the qc option is set are as follows Calculation Target Calculation Result unsigned char type variable and unsigned char type variable unsigned char type uone unsigned char type variable and signed char type variable signed char type variable and signed char type variable Constants from 128 to 255 and unsigned char type variable Constants from 128 to 127 and signed char type variable isnad Constants from 0 to 255 with suffix U and signed char type variable unsigned char type 4 Preprocess The detailed information on the preprocess are displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during compiling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder When this option is omitted only the standard folder of the compiler is searched The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the compiler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Additional include paths number of
406. m All Functions intentionally by clicking Adqd Function buttons OK Reflects the settings in the Stack Usage Tracer window save them to the project file prj then close the dialog Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Resets the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function to the default values This button will be grayed out if all the information for the selected function has the default values Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 317 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open dialog box This dialog box is used to open an existing stack size specification file Figure A 48 Open Dialog Box Function buttons 4 E Files of type Stack Size Specification File txt bai Lancel ES The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Stack Usage Tracer window select Load Stack Size Specification File from the File menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder containing the stack size specification file you wish to open 2 List of files This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in Look in area and Files of type area 3 File name area Specify the file name of the stack size specification file to open
407. m MSB This corresponds to the rb option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes rb Assigns the member of the bit field structure from MSB Assigns the member of the bit field structure from LSB Pack structure members Select whether to prohibit from inserting the align data to allocate the members consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address This corresponds to the rc option of the compiler Default No How to change to How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes rc Prohibits from inserting the align data to allocate the members consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address Inserts the align data to allocate the members consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 190 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Allocate automatic variables to saddr area Select the type of the automatic variable to be allocated in the saddr area This corresponds to the rk option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No on the Use static model property in the Memory Model category is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Size of char rk1 Yes Size of char short Int rk2 Yes Size of char short int long rk4 Yes Structure union array rkm Yes S
408. m the variables information file generation the variables information file gen erator outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the host operating system Target chip uPD780xx Device file VxX xx VF check complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found If the variables information file generator detects a fatal error during variables functions information file gener ation which makes it unable to continue variables information file generate processing the variables functions information file generator outputs a message to the display cancels variables information file generation and returns control to the host operating system 78KO Var Func Inf Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation VF78KO error F0006 File not found sampl rel VF78KO error F0006 File not found samp2 rel Program Aborted R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 556 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE In the above example a non existent object module file is specified An error occurs and the variables infor mation file generator aborts the execution Anon existent variables relocation option is specified C gt vfi78k0 main rel sub rel z 78KO Var Func Inf Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation VF78KO error F0018 Option is not recognized z Program Aborted In the above example a no
409. marks object module file name_ File name of object module to be linked Up to 1024 items can be input as an input module Enclose the file name of a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks Example To add debug information to a load module file kO Imf describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0O lmf g b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the linker will not fit on the command line or when the same link option is specified repeatedly each time linking is performed To start up the linker from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the linker from a parameter file as follows X gt 1k78k0 Aobject module file A fparameter file name Parameter file specification option parameter file name A file which includes the data required to start up the linker Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows A option Aoption If the source file name is omitted from the command line only 1 source file name can be specified in the parameter file The source file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all link options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file kO plk using an editor and then start up the linker parameter
410. mble i i Link Opti R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 214 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Hex File The detailed information on hex files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output hex file Select whether to output the hex file This corresponds to the o option of the object converter Output folder for hex file Specify the folder for saving the hex file This corresponds to the o option of the object converter If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Hex file name Specify the hex file name This corresponds to the o option of the object converter The extension can be freely specified The following macro name is available as an embedded m
411. me hex is set by default ProjectName hex is an embedded macro It is replaced to the project name R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 44 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 Set Create Library Options To set options for the librarian select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various create library options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is displayed only for library projects Figure 2 51 Property Panel Create Library Options Tab Property A CASO Property El Output File Output folder BuildM ode amez Output file name Project amet lib El List File Output list file No Others Output folder Species the folder to which the generated libraries are sawed The following macro names are available as embedded macros buildModeN ame Replaces with the build mode name f Memory Ba ka 2 9 1 Set the output of a library file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output a library file is made with the Output File category Figure 2 52 Output File Category Output folder 2b uildModeN anes Output file name ibe Projecth ames a 1 Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder property by directly entering to the t
412. me sub11 Frame Size Cancel Additional Margir Recursion Depth Callee Function List for Indirect Call Callee Functions All Functions sub1 1 4 4 main5 6 4 stab 4 4 sub 52 424 sub1 1 4 4 sub 28 6 4 sample cHsubl 4 4 sub 4 4 4 sube 1 46 1 40 sub 1 4 4 suib3 8 3 subs 4 4 After setting Additional Margin Recursion Depth and Callee Functions click the OK button R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 91 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Using a stack size specification file Below is the procedure for using a stack size specification file Create a stack size specification file Write the functions in the stack size specification file that you would like to set dynamically using the following format function name ADD additional margin RECTIME recursion depth CALL callee function Figure 2 125 Sample Stack Size Specification File Set the frame size of function flib written in assembly language to 50 flib ADD 50 Set the frame size of function sub2 written in C to 100 sub2 ADD 100 Set the recursion depth of recursive function sub3 written in C to 123 sub3 RECTIME 123 From the Stack Usage Tracer window select File menu gt gt Load Stack Size Specification File The Open dialog box opens Specify the stack size specification file then click the Open button R20UT0555E
413. me in the output message FileName Options Displays the file name and command line options in the output message Program Options Displays the program name and command line options in the output message Format of build option list Specify the display format of the build option list see 2 15 3 Display a list of build options This applies to the options of the build tool to be used and commands added by plugins It does not apply to the options of commands specified in the Commands executed before build processing or Commands executed after build processing property The following macro names are available as embedded macros Program Replaces with the program name under execution Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution FileName Replaces with the file name being built If this is blank it is assumed that FileName Program Options has been specified Default FileName Program Options How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 256 characters Specify the folder to which the temporary files generated by each command included in the build tool during execution are saved Temporary folder This corresponds to the t option of each command If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subprojec
414. ment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certai
415. minates the problem of describing ROMization processes for startup See CubeSuite 78K0 Coding about the startup routines a How to store a program on ROM During linking the startup routine object module files and libraries are linked The startup routine initializes the object program lt 1 gt s0 rel These are startup routines when stored on ROM The copy routine for the initialization data is included and the beginning of the initial data is indicated The label _ cstart symbol is added to the start address lt 2 gt cl0 lib These are libraries attached to CA78KO These files include the following libraries Runtime library is appended to the start of the symbol for runtime library names _ is appended to the Start of the symbol name for special library cstart corep cdisp Standard library _ is appended to the start of the symbol for standard library names lt 3 gt lib These are libraries created by a user is added to the symbol head Caution The CA78KO provides various kinds of startup routines and libraries See CubeSuite 78K0 Coding about startup routines and libraries B 1 3 Method for manipulating 1 C compiler startup The following two methods can be used to start up the C compiler a Startup from the command line X path name gt cc78k0 Aoption Csource file name Aoption Current drive name Path name Current folder name cc78k0 Command name of the C compiler
416. n The gi option specifies a security ID Application Use the gi option to set a security ID Description The range that can be specified for the security ID is OH to OH to OFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFH Specify a hexadecimal value that ends with H An abort error occurs if any other value is omitted Specify a security ID within 10 bytes If the specified value is less than 10 bytes the higher bits are filled with O The security ID is set at addresses 85H to 8EH If a security ID is set no segment can be allocated at addresses 85H to 8EH An abort error occurs if this option is specified for a device that does not have a security ID function A security ID can also be specified by defining the segment with relocation attributes shown below in the assembler source file However be sure to specify SECUR_ID as the relocation attribute of the segment Any segment name SECUR_ID 11H Address 22H Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address If specification of the assembler source file and specification of this option are made in duplicate this option takes precedence R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 462 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Cautions If this option is not specified for a device that has a security ID function any code may be allocated Example of use To specify the same
417. n Example of use To exit the librarian describe as exit R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 536 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 6 List Converter The list converter inputs assemble list files and object module files output by the assembler and load module files out put by the linker It embeds actual addresses in the relocatable addresses and symbols in the input file and outputs an absolute assem bly list Figure B 35 I O Files of List Converter Assemble list file Object module file Load module file Parameter file List Converter Absolute assemble list file Error list file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 537 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 6 1 I O files The I O files of the list converter are shown below Table B 28 1 0 Files of List Converter Input files Object module file Binary fils containing relocation information and symbol information regarding machine language information and machine language location addresses Assemble list file File containing assembly information such as prn assemble lists and cross reference lists Load module file Binary image file of the object codes output as a result of linking Parameter file File containing the parameters for the executed commands user created file Output files Absolute assemble list file List file which embed actual addre
418. n Options tab The library files are searched from the library path To add a library path set the Additional library paths property Caution Library files can also be linked by adding them directly to the project In this case the library files are not searched from the library paths because they are linked directly via their absolute paths R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CE NESAS Page 42 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 Set Object Convert Options To set options for the object converter select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Object Convert Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various object convert options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for library projects Figure 2 49 Property Panel Object Convert Options Tab Property A CASE Property El Hex File Output hes file es Output folder for hes file 2B uildModeN amez Hex file name FP rojecthl ame s hex Hex file format Intel expanded hes format kie Split hes file No Hex File Filling Fill free memor space fes u Filling value HEX FF Filing start address HEX Filing size byte HEX Symbol T able Error List Others Output hex file Select this option to generate a hex file This option corresponds to the o option Common s A Memory Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Opti
419. n efficient and easy when performing modular programming Editing of library files The librarian incorporates the following editing functions for library files Addition of modules to library files Deletion of modules from library files Replacement of modules in library files Retrieval of modules from library files See B 5 5 Subcommands for details about these functions Output of library file information The librarian incorporates functions for the editing and output of the following items of information stored in library files Module names Created programs Date of registration Date of update PUBLIC symbol information Caution The librarian performs functions 2 and 3 explained above using subcommands The librarian carries out the process while explaining each subcommand in order See B 5 5 Subcom mands the operation of subcommands The general procedure for creating library files is as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 515 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE START Creation of library file create subcommand Registration of object module file add subcommand Update or retrieval of object add subcommand module file delete subcommand replace subcommand pick subcommand Output of library file information list sulbcommand END B 5 3 Method for manipulating 1 Librarian startup The following two methods can be use
420. n existent variables relocation option is specified An error occurs and the vari ables functions information file generator aborts the execution 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set variables relocation options from CubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Variables Relocation Options tab You can set the various options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 38 Property Panel Variables Relocation Options Tab Property A CATOKO Property El Output File Output variables information file No El ROM SRAM Amount Infomation Output ROM AAAM usage No Output variables information he Selects whether to output a variables information file by using the file variables information file generator If Yes is selected in this field executes commands in the following order The compiler and the assembler are executed twice by one build processing The order 1 Compiler CA 78 0 2 Assemble AA r ek 3 Yarables information file generator F 78k 4 Compile C4 ak0 ma 5 Assemble AA r ak0 6 Linker LK 7SK0 T Object convertel0CrSkK0 Common Compile A Assemble A Link Opti Object Co A R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 557 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 7 5 Option 1 Types T
421. n file generator option object module file name The name of the object module file to generate the variables information file Up to 1024 items can be input as an input module Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the variables information file generator When specifying two or more variables relocation options separate the options with a blank space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the variables relocation options See B 7 5 Option for details about variables relocation options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks Enclose the file name of a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks C Caution Add options specific to the variables information file generator after specifying the same options and object module file name as those specified for the linker Example To output a variables information file info vfi describe as C gt vf78k0 main rel sub rel voinfo vfi b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the variables information file generator will not fit on the command line or when the same variables relocation option is specified repeatedly each time a variables information file is generated To start up the variables information file generator from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the
422. n project or subproject Library files that are directly added to the project tree in the selected main project or subproject By default input order to linkers is the order registered in the project You can change the input order by changing the display order of files Use Up or Down buttons or drag and drop the file name to change the display order R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 282 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Remarks 1 When the mouse cursor is hovered over a file name the path of the file appears in a popup If the file is on the same drive as the project file then it appears as the relative path if it is on the different drive then it appears as the absolute path 2 The object module file that is generated from the newly added source file and newly added object module file are added to the end of the module file list The newly added library file is added to the end of the list 3 When the file is dragged and dropped the multiple files that are next to each other can be selected together b Button Remark Note that above buttons are disabled when any file is not selected Function buttons OK Sets the file input order to linker as the display order of the File list display area and closes this dialog box Cancels the link order settings and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Pag
423. n the Property panel select the following property and then click the button From the Compile Options tab Variables information file for boot area in the Variables Information File cate gory Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set in the caller of this dialog box exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown 3 File name area Specify the file name to set in the caller of the dialog box 4 Files of type area Specify the file type to set in the caller of the dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 298 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Variables information file for boot area vfi Variables information file for boot area Function buttons Sets the specified file in the caller of the dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 299 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the boot area load module file to set in the caller of the dialog box Figure A 42 Specify Boot Area Load Module File Dialog Box Specify Boot Area Load Module File a Lack ir 23 e m C DefaultBuild My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Comput
424. n use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics
425. name A Amodule name A A 1 Aoption Alibrary file name A Amodule name A JA Abbreviated form option public nopublic oAfile name Function The list subcommand outputs information on modules in a library file Description Two or more options can be specified Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the options O An error occurs if output file name is omitted If the file type is omitted it is assumed that nput file name I st is entered public nopublic It can also be specified as p np public specifies the output of public symbol information The nopublic option disables the public option If both the public and nopublic options are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Output a module information in the library file kO lib to the list file kO Ist At this time specify the p option so as to output public symbol information list p ok0 1st k0 lib The contents of the list file kO Ist is as follows 78KO librarian Vx xx DATE XX XXX XxX PAGE 1 LIB FILE NAME k0 lib XX XXX XXXX 0001 mil rel XX XXX XXXX syml sym2 sym3 NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS 0002 m3 rel XX XXX XXXX NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 533 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 0003 m2 rel XX XXX XXXX NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOL
426. nce list file Select whether to output a form feed code into the end of list files preprocess list file error list Output with form feed control code file and cross reference list file This corresponds to the If option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes If Outputs a form feed code into the end of the list files No Does not output a form feed code into the end of the list files Number of characters in 1 line Specify the number of characters in each line of list files preprocess list file error list file and cross reference list file This corresponds to the Iw option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 72 to 132 decimal number R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 251 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00
427. nclude files with CubeSuite condition statements such as if and comments are ignored Therefore include files not required for build are mistaken as required files In the example below header1 h and header5 h are judged as required for build 1 include else include endif define ifdef include else include endif include e 0 headerl h Dependence zero header2 h Dependence AAA AAA header3 h Dependence header4 h Dependence header5 h Dependence relationship relationship relationship relationship relationship judged to exist to exist to exist to exist judged to exist 2 During checking of dependence relationships of include files with CubeSuite include statements described after comments are ignored Therefore include files required for build R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 27 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS are mistaken as no required files In the example below header6 h and header7 h are judged as no required for build Dependence relationship judged not to exist comment include header6 h Dependence relationship judged not to exist comment include header7 h R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 28 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File
428. nction information Vacant area information start Indicates start of vacant area information of the saddr area BASE area and callt area Comments out by adding a semicolon to the beginning of the line Vacant area information start Outputs the start address of the vacant area address Vacant area information size Outputs the size of the vacant area Variable information start Indicates start of variable information Variable information is output in the order of priority from highest to lowest Since const sreg and static variables and variables defined in the boot area that are referenced by the flash area cannot be allocated to the saddr area comments out these variables by adding a semicolon to the beginning of the line Variable information variable Outputs the variable name name Variable information number Outputs the number of references of the variable of references Variable information size Outputs the size of the variable 10 Variable information Outputs the reference type of the variable reference type normal 1 changes from the normal area to the saddr area sreg 0 Already allocated to the saddr area via the sreg specification Variable information file Outputs the target source file name surrounded by quotation marks name Although static variables are output global variables are not Variable information const const is output for const variabl
429. nction information file fin N Function information file Map file map Map file Symbol table file sym Symbol table file Note Only devices with a memory bank installed b In the Output panel The following file types are displayed Text file txt Text format Function buttons Saves the file as the designated file name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 303 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open with Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the application to open the file selected in Project Tree Figure A 44 Open with Program Dialog Box Open with Program o Look n ea 3 Adobe MSN Gaming Zone i altime3o0 NEC Electronics Tools My Recent Common Files NetMeeting Documents 3 ComPlus Applications Network Associates DDF C Online Services 2 ae SS nOHMAT CD Writing Wizard O Outlook Express InstallShield Installation Information C TTERMPRO Desktop Intel Uninstall Information Internet Explorer Windows Media Connect 2 Lhasa 9 Windows Media Player Maruo 9 windows NT 3 Messenger WindowsUpdate microsoft frontpage 9 WinMerge q3 Movie Maker xerox Msn hy Computer My Documents 3 m Fil a ie name Function buttons 4 ittea Files of type The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open
430. nd explanations for create library options are shown below Table B 26 Create Library Options Classification Option Description lw Changes the number of characters printed per line in a list file Changes the number of lines printed per page in a list file List file format specification Inserts a form feed code at the end of a link list file nlf Temporary file creation path t Creates a temporary file in the specified path specification Help specification Outputs a help message on the display I R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 519 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE List file format specification The list file format specification options are as follows lw Il lf nlf lw Description format lw number of characters Interpretation when omitted lw132 80 characters in the case of display output Function The Iw option specifies the number of characters per line in a list file Application Use the lw option to change the number of characters per line in a list file Description The range of number of characters that can be specified with the Iw option is 72 to 260 80 characters in the case of display output An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is speci fied If the number of characters is omitted it is assumed that 132 has been s
431. nd stop the rapid build 2 If this item is selected a file that is registered in the project but does not exist a file grayed out will not be observed even if it is registered again by the Explorer etc To observe the file reload the project file or select this item again after unselecting this item and closing this dialog box 3 Enable Break Sound Beep when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break default w Do not beep when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break 4 Buttons Initialize Settings Return all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Function Initialize All Settings Restore all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 293 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Existing File dialog box This dialog box is used to select existing files to add to projects Figure A 39 Add Existing File Dialog Box Add Existing File Look in TE 4 O BuildMode i C DefaultBuild My Recent O sample ib Documents main t Desktop My Documents PL My Computer 8 File name y RE Function buttons 4 attetrrork P Files of type C source file c st The foll
432. nd then click the Build Rebuild or Clean button Remark The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 83 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 5 Compile assemble individual files You can just compile or assemble for each source file added to the project 1 When compiling a C source file Select a C source file on the project tree and select the Compile from the context menu Figure 2 115 Compile Item a i File yy Startup c_ main Open with Internal Editor Open with Selected Application Open Folder with Explorer Add o Remove From Project Shift Del Copy Crrl iC 2 When assembling an assembler source file Select an assembler source file on the project tree and select the Assemble from the context menu Figure 2 116 Assemble Item Assemble Open Open with Internal Editor Open with Selected Application Open Folder with Explorer Add J Remove from Project Shift Del Copy Crrl C Rename Property R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 Page 84 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 6 Stop running a buil
433. ne of list files preprocess list file error list file and cross reference list file This corresponds to the Iw option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Default 132 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 72 to 132 decimal number R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 195 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Number of lines on 1 Specify the number of lines on 1 page of list files preprocess list file error list file and cross page reference list file If O is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Tab width Specify the tab width of list files preprocess list file error list file and cross reference list file This corresponds to the It option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list fi
434. ned change depending on the value of n and the specification of m Specification of n m Variable Types to Be Assigned to saddr Area When n 1 char unsigned char When n 2 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used When n 4 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers Omitted All variables The register declared variable cannot be assigned The sreg declared variable is assigned to the saddr area regardless of the rk option specification The function argument and auto variable assigned to the saddr area by specifying this option is handled in a similar way to the sreg declared function argument and auto variable Cautions If the sm option is specified the rk option is valid If the sm option is not specified the compiler outputs the warning message and the rk option is ignored Example of use To assign a char or unsigned char type function argument and auto variable except for the static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether there is an sreg declaration or not describe as R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 337 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE C gt cec78k0 cF051144 rkl1 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 338 of 570 Apr 01 2011 Cube
435. nel section for details of the contents of the display R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 144 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Tree panel This panel is used to display the project components such as the build tool source files etc in tree view Figure A 2 Project Tree Panel Project Tree s amp sample Project UPDFSFOS68_ 46 Microcontroller A Fin Configurator Design Tool ES Code Generator Design Tool A CAFSEO Build Tool cs FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program 4nalyzer Analyze Tool File tl Build tool generated Files im sample Int map sample rap hex sample hex 1 sym sample sym ay Startup e main c B E sub Subproject ME UPDFSFOS88_ 48 Microcontroller A CAFSKO Build Tool es FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a G File The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Context menu How to open From the View menu select Project Tree R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 145 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Project tree area Project components are displayed in tree view with the following given node Project name Project Project name hereafter referred to as Project node B
436. nesas Electronics Corporation usage oc78k0O option input file option The option is as follows means omissible ffile Input option or input file name from specified file o file no Create HEX module file with specified name Not s file ns Create symbol table file with specified name Not e file ne Create the error list file with the specified name Not r nr Sort HEX object by address Not uvalue start size nu Fill up HEX object with specified value Not kkind gt Select hex format I intel format IE intel extend format T tex format M s format ME s 32bit format ydirectory Set device file search path Z Create boot hex module file HXB and flash hex module file HXF crcaddress start end start end method init Output CRC operation result value Show this message DEFAULT ASSIGNMENT o s r u0ffh R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 513 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 5 Librarian The librarian edits CA78KO object module files and library files in units of one module It also outputs a list file If a librarian error occurs an error message is Output to the display indicating the cause of the error Figure B 33 I O Files of Librarian Object module file output by the compiler or assembler Subcommand file Temporary file Library file List file B 5 1 I O files The I O files
437. nformation files Application Use the mf option to allocate functions to a bank or common area Cautions Specify the same function information file for all the C source files to be linked Example of use To compile using the function information file funcinf fin describe as C gt cec78k0 cf053664 mffuncinf fin R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 378 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Help specification The help options are as follows h h Description format Interpretation when omitted No display Function The and h options display brief explanations of the options and the help messages such as the default options on the console Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Application The option and its description are displayed See these when executing the compiler Description When the or h option is specified all other options are invalid To view the continuation of a displayed help message press the Enter key To quit the display press any key other than the Enter key and then press the Enter key Example of use Outputs a help message on the console C gt cec78k0 h R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 379 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 2 Assembler The assembler inputs source files w
438. ng all pointers types external variables to the saddr area Allocates structure union and array types external variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char structure union and array types external variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used structure union and array types external variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers structure union and array types external variables to the saddr area Does not allocate external variables to the saddr area The detailed information on list files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output preprocess list Select whether to output the preprocess file file This corresponds to the p option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes p Outputs the preprocess list file Does not output the preprocess list file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 193 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Not output comments Select whether to disable to output comments into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kc option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file p
439. ng build No Does not display the execution status of the compiler during build R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 242 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Warning level Select the warning display level under compiling This corresponds to the w option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction No output w0 Does not output warning messages Normal output Outputs normal warning messages Particular output w2 Outputs detailed warning messages 6 Extension The detailed information on extensions are displayed and the configuration can be changed Allow C format Select whether to allow the use of C format comments comments This corresponds to the zp option of the compiler e tr a Allow nested comments Select whether to allow the nest use of comments _ This corresponds to the zc option of the compiler Kanji character code of Select the Kanji character code of the source source This corresponds to the zs ze and zn option of the compiler Follow ANSI Standard Select whether to disable non ANSI standard functions and enable some of the functions of the ANSI standard This corresponds to the za option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Za Disables non ANSI standard fun
440. not be called in the implicit way such as an indirect function call using a function pointer or a call from object module file library file that do not have source files which can not be known from assemble list file b Set the output of the function information file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab on the Property panel To use the memory bank relocation support tool select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output category Select No on the Output function information file property Figure 2 68 Use memory bank relocation support tool and Output function information file Property Use memory bank relocation support tool Output function information file Output folder for replacement information file build odeN ames Replacement information file name 4Projecth ame_replace tet Output folder for object information file 2b uildModeN ame Object information file name Project ame_objinto bet Output folder for reference information file ZB UildModeN amez Reference information file name 2Projecth ame retinto bet c Run a build of the project Run a build of the project A load module file is generated with the C source files relocated in accordance with the changes made to the relocation destinations Caution Ifa file with an extension of fin is added to the project it is treated as a function information file It is also
441. nput violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Specify a path The field is empty The path is too long Specify a path with a number of The file name including the path is exceeding the characters equal to or fewer than maximum number of character limit defined in the original path restriction in the property that called this dialog box The specified path contains a folder that does not exist The path includes the folder that does not exist The file name or path name is invalid The following The file name with the invalid path is designated characters cannot be used lt gt The characters lt gt cannot be used for the file name and folder name More than maximum number of paths or files specified The number of paths or files which have been input by the caller lines cannot be specified exceeds the maximum number of paths or files specified by the caller b Button Browse Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box When a folder is selected the path is added to Path One path per one line c Subfolders are automatically included After checking this check box designate the path from Browse button and a path is added to Path One path per one line including subfolders up to 5 layers Function buttons Reflects the entered path to the property that called this dialog box then closes the dialog box Does not refle
442. ns are all specified the link list file cannot be output If the ng option is specified the local symbol list cannot be output If both the kl and nkl options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the np option is specified the kl option is invalid Example of use To output a local symbol list into a link list file kO map describe as The contents of kO map is as follows 78KO Linker Vx xx Date XX XXX XXXX Page Command kOmain rel kOsub rel s pkO map kl Para file Out file kOmain 1lmf Map file k0O map Direc file Directive Tink information 3 output segment s 2FH byte s real data R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 445 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 23 symbol s defined kee Memory map SPACE REGULAR 78K0 Linker Vx xx Date xXxX XXX XXXX xxx Local symbol list MODULE ATTR VALUE NAME SAMPM DATA HDTSA STASC CODE CSEG SAMPS CSEG SASC SASC1 Target chip uPD78xxx Device file VxX xx R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 446 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link list file format specification The link list file format specification options are as follows Il lf nlf Description format 1 number of lines Interpretation when omitted II66 No page breaks in the case of display o
443. nship between processing order and alignment In this situation setting the margin in the saddr area can avoid this error This corresponds to the vs option of the variables information file generator How to change Directly enter to the text box O to 192 decimal number 3 ROM RAM Amount Information The detailed information on the ROM RAM usage is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 225 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output ROM RAM usage Select whether to display the ROM RAM usage to the Output panel This su O to the vx option of the variables information file generator Default How to change e from the drop down list Restriction Outputs the ROM RAM usage Does not output the ROM RAM usage R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 226 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Bank Relocation Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the memory bank relocation support tool categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Output File 2 Margin 3 Message Caution This tab is displayed only when a device with a memory bank installed is specified as the microcontroller Figure A 11 Property Panel Memory Bank Relocation Options Tab Property A CA aERO Property El Output File Use memor bank relocation suppor
444. nter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 163 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Frequently Used Options for Compile The detailed information on frequently used options for compilation are displayed and the configuration can be changed Perform optimization Select the type of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the qx option of the compiler Yes Standar qx2 Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Speed Performs optimization with the execution speed precedence qx1 precedence Yes Standard qx2 Performs optimization with both the execution speed and module size precedence Yes Code size Performs optimization with the module size precedence qx3 precedence Yes Code size Performs optimization with top precedence to Best qx4 module size In addition qx3 common code is placed in subroutines and the library for the stack access is used Yes Detail setting The Optimization Details category is shown in the Compile Options tab The option that is selected in the category has the precedence for the optimization When No nq is selected in all the properties in the Optimization Details category the optimization will not be done No nq The optimization will not be done Speci
445. o BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is not displayed when No in the Output variables information file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Variables information file Specify the variables information file name name This corresponds to the vo option of the variables information file generator Use the extension vfi If the extension is omitted vfi is automatically added The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name This property is not displayed when No in the Output variables information file property is selected Default ProjectName vii How to change Directly enter to the text box Up to 259 characters 2 Margin The detailed information on the margin is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed when No in the Output variables information file property in the Output File cate gory is selected Margin for saddr area Specify the Margin for saddr area After allocating variables to the saddr area via the variables information file generator an align ment error may occur during compilation or linking due to the relatio
446. o name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of the assembler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified 3 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output common object Select whether to output the objects common to the various devices file for various devices This corresponds to the common option of the assembler Outputs objects for 78KO Output error list file Select whether to output the error list file This corresponds to the e option of the assembler Does not output the error list file 4 Assemble List The detailed information on the assemble list are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the p option of the assembler If Yes is selected on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category from the Memory Bank Re
447. o names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file LinkedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under link processing The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before link processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after link processing after link processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Y LinkedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under link processing The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after link processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the
448. o the project Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node Add File The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of this node You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project Removes the selected category node from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copy Copies the selected category node to the clipboard When the category name is in editing the characters of the selection are copied to the clipboard R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 156 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project When the cat
449. o the project This section explains operations on setting files in the project 2 3 1 Set a startup routine 1 Using the standard startup routine Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To use the standard startup routine select Yes Normal Yes For boot area Yes For flash area on the Use Standard startup routine property in the Startup category Figure 2 3 Use standard startup routine Property The object file name of the standard startup routine to be used will be displayed on the Using standard startup routine property 2 Using other than the standard startup routine Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To use other than the standard startup routine select No on the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category Yes Normal is selected by default Figure 2 4 Use standard startup routine Property Next add a startup file a file that the startup routine is described to the Startup node on the project tree See 2 3 2 Add a file to a project for the method of adding the file to the project tree R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 17 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 5 Project Tree Panel After Adding Startup File Project Tree E E sample Project PS uPD SF05868_46 Microcontroller A
450. ointer when the bank function mf is not used When n 4 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers Structure union array All variables The sreg declared variable is assigned to the saddr area regardless of the rd option specification The variable that is referenced by an extern declaration is processed as are to be assigned to the saddr area The variable assigned to the saddr area by specifying this option is handled in a similar way to a sreg variable Example of use To assign the char or unsigned char type external variable or external static variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether sreg has been declared describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 rdl R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 336 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE rk nr Description format Interpretation when omitted nr Function The rk option specifies to assign a function argument and auto variable except for the static auto variable automatically to the saddr area The nr option disables the rk option Application In a static model use the rk option to assign a function argument and auto variable except for the static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether there is an sreg declaration or not Description Variables to be assig
451. oject 23 2 3 4 Remove a file from the build target 24 2 3 5 Classify a file into a category 24 2 3 6 Change the file display order 25 2 3 Update file dependencies 26 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File 29 2 4 1 Change the output file name 29 2 4 2 Output an assemble list 30 2 4 3 Output map information 31 2 4 4 Output symbol information 31 2 5 Set Compile Options 33 2 5 1 Perform optimization with the code size precedence 34 2 5 2 Perform optimization with the execution speed precedence 34 2 5 3 Add an include path 34 2 5 4 Seta macro definition 36 2 5 5 Enable C comments 37 2 5 6 Use floating point compatible standard input output functions 37 2 5 7 Change the setting to use the multiplier and divider 37 2 6 Set Assemble Options 38 2 6 1 Add an include path 38 2 6 2 Seta macro definition 40 2 7 Set Link Options 41 2 7 1 Add a user library 42 2 8 Set Object Convert Options 43 2 8 1 Set the output of a hex file 44 2 9 Set Create Library Options 45 2 9 1 Set the output ofa library file 45 2 10 Set Variables Relocation Options 46 2 10 1 Efficiently allocate variables 46 2 10 2 Display ROM RAM usage 50 2 11 Set Memory Bank Relocation Options 51 2 11 1 Relocate C source files to the optimum area 51 2 12 Set Build Options Separately 58 2 12 1 Set build options at the project level 58 2 12 2 Set build options
452. ol values Symbol Attribute Constant defined by the EQU directive Label within a code segment Label within a data segment Bit symbol R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 494 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 31 Formats for Symbol Value When the symbol attribute is NUMBER Constant value 4 digits When the symbol attribute is LABEL Address value 4 digits When the symbol attribute is a bit symbol Upper 13 bits Lower 3 bits Upper 13 bits The relative address from OFEOOH Lower 3 bits Bit position 0 to 7 B 4 3 Method for manipulating 1 Object converter startup The following two methods can be used to start up the object converter a Startup from the command line X path name gt oc78k0 Aoption load module file name Aoption oc78k0 Command name of the object converter option Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the object converter When specifying two or more object convert options separate the options with a blank space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the object convert options See B 4 4 Option for details about object convert options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks load module file name File name of load module to be converted Enclose the file name of a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks
453. ollowing types of builds are available Build see 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files Rebuild see 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build see 2 16 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations Batch build see 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remark _ If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process on the Property panel from the Common Options tab in the Others category set the Commands executed before build processing and Commands executed after build processing properties If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process at the file level you can set R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 14 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS them from the Individual Compile Options tab for a C source file and Individual Assemble Options tab for an assembler source file 7 Save the project Save the setting contents of the project to the project file Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about saving the project 2 1 2 Create a user library The procedure for creating a user library is shown below 1 Create or load a project Create a new project or load an existing one When you create a new project set a library project Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about creating a new project or loading an existing one 2 Set a build target project Set a build target project see 2 1
454. ollows For other than library projects Load module file Imf Link list file map Error list file elk Hex file hex Axb hxf Symbol table file sym Error list file eoc R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 79 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Replacement information file txt Object information file txt Reference information file txt For library projects Library file lib List file Ist Replacement information file txt Object information file txt Reference information file txt Caution The Build tool generated files node is created during build This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after building 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files Out of build target files run a build of only updated files hereafter referred to as build Running a build is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 15 4 Change the file build target project 1 When running a build of the entire project Click on the toolbar 2 When running a build of the active project Select the project and then select Build active project from the context menu Figure 2 110 Build active project Item E Fd sample Project g JE uppvarosea 4ed Build sample A Pin Configurator Tl ild sample Code Generator a A CASED Build To Clean sample 2 FSKO Simulator 0 S
455. on 384 B 3 Linker 424 B 3 1 I O files 424 B 3 2 Functions 425 B 3 3 Method for manipulating 425 B 3 4 Option 429 B 3 5 Boot flash relink function 468 B 4 Object Converter 481 B 4 1 I O files 481 B 4 2 Functions 482 B 4 3 Method for manipulating 495 B 4 4 Option 498 B 5 Librarian 514 B 5 1 I O files 514 B 5 2 Functions 515 B 5 3 Method for manipulating 516 B 5 4 Option 519 B 5 5 Subcommands 527 B 6 List Converter 537 B 6 1 I O files 538 B 6 2 Functions 538 B 6 3 Method for manipulating 541 B 6 4 Option 543 B 7 Variables Information File Generator 550 B 7 1 I O files 550 B 7 2 Functions 551 B 7 3 Variables functions information 551 B 7 4 Method for manipulating 555 B 7 5 Option 558 APPENDIX C INDEX 563 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 1 GENERAL This chapter explains the product overview of the build tool 1 1 Overview The build tool is comprised of components provided by this product It enables various types of information to be con figured via a GUI tool enabling you to generate load module file hex file or library file from your source files according to your objectives The build tool process flow is shown below Figure 1 1 Build Tool Process Flow soure es 7 i w w Assembler source files Assemble list file z Object module files w w Variables information fil
456. on c or the source file is a number starting with 1 that indicates the include file number Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line This line is not output when there is no include file Displays the symbol attributes An external variable is displayed as EXTERN an external static variable as EXSTC an internal static variable as INSTC an auto variable as AUTOnn a register variable as REGnn where nn is the scope value a numerical value that begins with 1 an external typedef declaration as EXTYP an internal typedef declaration as INTYP a label as LABEL a structure or union tag as TAG a member as MEMBER and a function parameter as PARAM Displays the symbol qualifier attributes left aligned A const variable is displayed as CONST a volatile variable as VLT a callt function as CALLT a callf function as CALLF a noauto function as NOAUTO a norec function as NOREC an sreg bit variable as SREG an sfr variable as RWSFR a read only sfr variable as ROSFR a write only sfr variable as WOSFR an interrupt function as VECT Displays the symbol type Types include char int short long and field u is added at the start for unsigned type Additional types include void float double Idouble long double func array pointer struct union enum bit inter and define If the symbol name exceeds 15 characters and fit into a line that name is output as itis If it e
457. on Options tab np LK78K0 438 Compile Options tab np RA78KO 395 Create Library Options tab 22 nq CC78KO0 340 File Information tab 2 nr CC78KO0 334 336 337 339 Individual Assemble Options tab 254 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 565 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 Individual Compile Options tab 236 Link Options tab 205 Memory Bank Relocation Options tab 227 Object Convert Options tab 214 Variables Relocation Options tab 224 Public symbol list 112 Q q CC78K0 340 R r CC78KO0 334 r LCNV78KO 544 r OC78KO0 503 Rapid build 78 81 rd CC78KO0 336 Rebuild 78 81 Relink function 468 replace 531 rk CC78KO 337 rs CC78K0 339 Runa build 78 Runtime library 323 S s LK78K0 435 s OC78K0 502 sa CC78K0 352 Save As dialog box se CC78K0 357 self RA78KO0 421 Set assemble options Set compile options Set create library options Set link options 41 Set memory bank relocation options Set object convert options Set variables relocation options sm CC78K0 374 Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area dialog box 298 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 Standard library 323 Subcommands 527
458. on file generator counts the number of times reference symbols are refer enced during relocation resolution b Vacant area detection The variables functions information file generator detects the start address and size of vacant area in the saddr area after normal allocation c Determining priority The value calculated via the expression below taking into account the code reduction rate per byte deter mines the priority higher values mean higher priority number of references symbol size reference type t Note Reference type normal 1 changing from the normal area to the saddr area reduces code by 1 byte sreg 0 variables already allocated to the saddr area via the sreg specification are not targets for alloca tion R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 552 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example Number of References Symbol Size Reference Type Variable sym3 is not eligible for allocation since it has already been allocated to the saddr area Remark The following variables are excluded from prioritization const variable sreg variable static variable Variables not defined in the C source Variables defined in the boot area and refer enced by the flash area Unreferenced variables d Alignment considerations const variables are not eligible for allocation to the saddr area because they are allocated to the internal ROM area However t
459. on of the object converter This property is not displayed when No nu in the Fill free memory space property is selected How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 1 to OxFFFFF filling start address 0x1 hexadecimal However the compiler s bounds checking will be stricter As a result the actual upper bound during a build may be smaller than this value causing a error during linking 3 Symbol Table The detailed information on the symbol table is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output symbol table file Select whether to output the symbol table file This corresponds to the s option of the object converter How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Outputs the symbol table file Does not output the symbol table file 4 Error List The detailed information on the error list is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 217 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output error list file Select whether to output the error list file This corresponds to the e option of the linker How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes e Outputs an error list file Does not output the error list file 5 Others Other detailed information on object conversion are displayed and the configuration can be changed Commands executed Specify the command to be
460. on the Split hex file property in the Hex File category default Figure 2 83 Split hex file Property in Boot Area E Hex File Output hex file Yes Output folder for hes file Build odeN ame Hex file name 2Projecth ame hex 3 Run a build of the boot area project When you run a build of the boot area project a load module file is created A hex file is also created If a variables information file is generated it will be input into the compiler automatically and a rebuild will be executed again Remark The variables information file generated in a Set variables relocation options is overwritten by running a build R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 65 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 84 Created Files for Boot Area Project Tree gt amp E boot Project pE UPDVSFOS88_ 48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool Code Generator Design Tool A CASK Build Tool che FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a l File ral Build tool generated files mi boot Inf map book rap hex boot hex Sum book sym F Startup e boot c ar link _Bbook dr vil boot vi 2 14 3 Set the flash area project 1 Create the flash area project Create a project for the boot area and add the build target files to the project Figure 2 85 Flash Area Project Project Tree Sgi ef flash Project me UPDF
461. on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel The macro definition setting is made with the Macro definition property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 32 Macro definition Property E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Macro Undetinition Macro Undetinithorn If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 33 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Enter the macro definition in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line You can specify up to 256 characters per line up to 30 line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value If you click the OK button the entered macro definitions are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 34 Macro definition Property After Setting Macros E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 mill Ta Lie i LAT i Macro definition 2 TEST 1 TIME 10 Macro Undetinithon L To change the macro definitions you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Macro definition property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 36 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 5 Enable
462. on the tab categorized by the output tool Figure A 24 Output Panel Start build all Thursday April 2 Start build sample DetfaultBuild gt sre main c gt DefaultBuild sample lmf 1 DefaultBuild sample hex Build endedtError O Warning 0 Ended Success l Projects Failed 0 Projects Thursday April 2 2010 3 13 03 2 Rapid Build Build Tool The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu only available for the Output panel Edit menu only available for the Output panel Context menu How to open From the View menu select Output Description of each area 1 Message area Display messages and the search results output from each tool In build result search result batch search display anew message is displayed deleting the previous message every time build search is done but not the All Messages tab Remark Up to 500000 lines of messages can be displayed If 500001 lines or more of messages are output then the excess lines are deleted oldest first The message colors differ as follows depends on the type of the output message the character color background color is set in General Font and Color category in the Option dialog box Normal message AgAbte Character color Information on something Background color Background color White Warning AagBher Character color Warning for the operation Backgro
463. onds to the ki option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes ki Performs output by expanding include directives into the preprocess list file No Does not expand the include directive into the preprocess list file Expand line preprocessor directive Select whether to perform output by expanding line directives into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kl option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Yes kl How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kl Performs output by expanding line directives into the preprocess list file No Does not expand the line directive into the preprocess list file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 194 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output line numbers Select whether to output line numbers into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kn option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Yes kn How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kn Outputs line numbers into the preprocess list file Does not output line numbers into the preprocess list fil
464. ons for Object Convert category on the Common Options tab R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 43 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 1 Set the output of a hex file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Object Convert Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output a hex file is made with the Output hex file property in the Hex File category To output a hex file select Yes default to not output a hex file select No no Figure 2 50 Output hex file Property Hex file name Project amez Hex Hex file format Intel expanded hes format kie Split hes file Heo Remark If you select No no on the Output hex file property when performing object conversion only to output a symbol table file you can reduce the object conversion time When outputting a hex file you can set the output folder and output file name 1 Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder for hex file property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box BuildModeName is set by default BuildModeName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the build mode name 2 Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Hex file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box ProjectNa
465. oot area include ext def h int boot_a 0x12 int boot_b 0x34 extern int func flashl int extern int func_flash2 int void boot_main void func int k boot_a func_flashl1 boot_a j boot_b func _flash2 boot_b R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 472 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE lt 2 gt C source file for the flash area include ext def h extern void func void void main void func void func _flashl void func _flash2 lt 3 gt ext _def h pragma ext table 0x2000 pragma ext func func _flashl 1 pragma ext func func _ flash2 2 c Startup routine Separately prepare a startup routine for the boot area and a startup routine for the flash area Startup routines are provided for both the boot area and the flash area by the CA78KO Each startup routine must perform the following processing Perform processing to initialize the RAM area to be used for the boot area Branching from the boot area to the startup routine of the flash area Perform processing to initialize the RAM area to be used for the flash area Moving to the processing of the flash area R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 473 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE d How to create the projects specifically lt 1 gt Create the boot area proje
466. opens Figure 2 97 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode pO Build mode list DefaultE uld Duplicate Select the build mode to be duplicated from the build mode list and click the Duplicate button The Character String Input dialog box opens Figure 2 98 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input String BuildMode In the dialog box enter the name of the build mode to be created and then click the OK button The build mode with that name will be duplicated The created build mode is added to the build modes of the main project and all the subprojects which belong to the project R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 73 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 99 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box After Adding Build Mode Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode Apply to All Build mode list Duplicate Delete Rename 2 Change the build mode Change the build mode to the newly created build mode see 2 15 6 Change the build mode 3 Change the setting of the build mode Select the build tool node on the project tree and change the build options and macro definition settings on the Property panel Remark Creating a build mode is regarded a project change When closing the project you will be asked to confirm whether or not to save the build mode R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev
467. operation of the list converter When specifying two or more list convert options separate the options with a blank space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the list convert options See B 6 4 Option for details about list convert options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks input file name Primary name of assemble list Enclose the file name of a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks a Use the extension prn Caution If only the primary name of the assemble list is specified in the command line the primary names of the object module file and load module file must be identical with the primary name of the assemble list file The file types must also be as shown below Object module type Load module file Example If the primary name is different between an assemble list file KOmain prn and a load module file sample Imf describe as follows so as to specify the input of a load module file Sample Imf C gt lcenv78k0 kOmain prn lsample 1lmf b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the list converter will not fit on the command line or when the same list convert option is specified repeatedly each time list conversion is performed To start up the list converter from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the list conv
468. or other than library projects only Execute Module Load Module File and Execute Module Hex File are displayed However only Execute Module Load Module File is displayed when Yes is selected in the Output hex file property in the Hex File category from the Object Convert Options tab For library projects only Library is displayed Default Execute Module Load Module File How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Execute Module Load The file to be generated during build is regarded Module File as the executable format load module file Execute Module Hex The file to be generated during build is regarded File as the executable format hex file Library The file to be generated during build is regarded as the library format library file Intermediate file output Specify the path to the folder to which intermediate files object module files rel cross folder reference list files xrf etc are to be output If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified Default BuildModeName How to change Directly e
469. orm Function The delete subcommand deletes a module from a library file Description An error occurs if the specified module does not exist in the library file If an error occurs processing is interrupted and the condition of the library file will not be changed Example of use To delete modules m1 and m3 from the library file kO lib describe as delete k0 lib mi rel m3 rel lt Before module deletion gt kO lib lt After module deletion gt kO lib R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 530 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE replace Description format replaceAlibrary file nameAtransaction rAlibrary file nameAtransaction Abbreviated form Function The replace subcommand replaces an existing module in a library file with the module in other object module files Description An abort error occurs if no module with the same name as the module to be replaced exists in the library file An abort error occurs if the module to be replaced carries the same public symbol as the public symbol in the library file The file name of the object module to be replaced must be the same as the file name under which it was registered in the library file If an error occurs processing is interrupted and the condition of the library file will not be changed Example of use To replace module m2 in the library file kO lib describe
470. ormation Table MEMORY 2 ROM BASE ADDRESS 3 0x00000 SIZE 4 32768 MEMORY 2 BANKOO BASE ADDRESS 3 0x08000 SIZE 4 16384 MEMORY 2 BANKO1 BASE ADDRESS 3 0x18000 SIZE 4 16384 MEMORY 2 BANKO2 BASE ADDRESS 3 0x28000 SIZE 4 16384 MEMORY 2 BANK03 BASE ADDRESS 3 0x38000 SIZE 4 16384 MEMORY 2 BANK04 BASE ADDRESS 3 0x48000 SIZE 4 16384 MEMORY 2 BANKO5 BASE ADDRESS 3 0x58000 SIZE 4 16384 5 COMMON 6 callt c 1 6 asm3 asm 1 6 asml asm 1 6 filel c 1 6 file2 c 2 6 file10_4 c 10 6 file10 3 c 10 6 file10 2 c 10 6 file10 c 10 6 f file1000_ 3 c 1000 6 file100 c 100 6 f1161000 2 c 1000 6 ile200 c 200 6 file201 c 201 6 ile1000 c 1000 Total Code Size 7 25707 Byte s Available Space 8 5015 Byte s 9 BANKO0 10 asm2 asm 1 10 file10000 2 10000 Total Code Size 11 10001 Byte s Available Space 12 6383 Byte s R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 123 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 9 BANKO1 10 asm3 asm 1 10 ile10000 c 10000 Total Code Size 11 10001 Byte s Available Space 12 6383 Byte s 9 BANKO2 10 asm3 asm 1 Total Code Size 11 1 Available Space 12 16383 i Source file list that was not able to arranged indicates that the source file includes function s which must be in the common area Example 1 When the space in both the common area and the bank area
471. ory node s property on the Property panel R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 154 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 5 When a file is selected Compile Compiles the selected C source file Note that this menu is only displayed when a C source file except for non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Assemble Assembles the selected assembler source file Note that this menu is only displayed when an assembler source file except for non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Opens the selected file with the application corresponds to the file extension see r Run the editor Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open with Internal Editor Opens the selected file with the Editor panel Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open with Selected Opens the Open with Program dialog box to open the selected file with the designated Application application Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the selected file with Explorer Add Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is a
472. ot displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected How to change to How to change Select from the drop down list Outputs local symbol list information to the link list file Does not output local symbol list information to the link list file Output with public Select whether to output public symbol list information to the link list file symbol list This corresponds to the kp option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Yes kp Outputs public symbol list information to the link list file Does not output public symbol list information to the link list file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 211 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output with map list Select whether to output map list information to the link list file This corresponds to the km option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs map list information to the link list file No nkm Does not output map list information to the link list file Output with form feed Select whether to output a form feed code into the end of the link list file control code This corresponds to the If option of the linker This property
473. other than General Build Debug 2 Settings This area is used to configure the various options for the selected category For details about configuration for a particular category see the section for the category in question Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restore all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 291 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Build Debug category Use this category to configure general setting relating to building and debugging 4 Function buttons El Others E nits AU Settings Option 7 L General Startup and Exit Display Text Editor Font and Color External Tools B uild F Debug Z Gy Update User Information 7 1 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Enable Rapid Build Figure A 38 Option Dialog Box General Build Debug Category General Build Debug Enable Rapid Build IF rapid build is made effective build i begun when edited source file is sawed ss a result bu
474. output file is made with the Variables information file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box ProjectName vfi is set by default ProjectName vfi is an embedded macro It is replaced to the project name If this property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree b Run a build of the project Run a build of the project A variables information file is generated It will be input into the compiler automatically and a rebuild will be executed again Remark The variables information file in a Set the generation of the variables information file is overwritten by running a build R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 47 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS If the build completes successfully a load module file is generated with the variables allocated If the message E7001 The link error was found is displayed at this time then an error has occurred during linking If this happens take the action below to disable the variable information file lt 1 gt Select No in the Output variables information file property on the Variables Relocation Options tab lt 2 gt Select No on the Set as build target property of the variables information file vfi displayed on the project tree Or select the variables inform
475. ow to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 memos can be specified R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 262 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Category Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on the category that the user added File node Build tool generated files node and Startup node categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Category Information 2 Notes Figure A 22 Property Panel Category Information Tab Property New category Property El Category Informabon Category name New category Hotes Category name This i the name of this category The category name can be between 7 and 200 characters Also the category name colored in gray is fied Description of each category 1 Category Information The detailed information on the category is displayed and the configuration can be changed Category name Specify the category name to categorize files This property of the File node Build tool generated files node and Startup node is displayed in gray and you cannot change the attribute Default Category name of files How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 1 to 200 characters 2 Notes The detailed in
476. ower 1 byte of complement 1 for the sum for each byte of the record length address and the hexadecimal data expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal Item Description Number p t Recordtype Recordtype KA Record length 3 Load address 24 bit address 4 Hexadecimal data Check sum 1 Record type Item Description Number R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 491 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ltem Description Number Record length This is the number of bytes in 3 plus the number of bytes in 4 Ce femme o own S2 record WWWWWW ltem Description Number ee Record type Record length This is the number of bytes in 3 plus the number of bytes in 4 plus the number of bytes in 5 Load address This is the 24 bit load address of the data in 4 within the range OH to FFFFFFH Data This is the loaded data itself Record type Record length This is the number of bytes in 3 plus the number of bytes in 4 plus the number of bytes in 5 Load address This is the 32 bit load address of the data in 4 within the range OH to FFFFFFFFH Data This is the loaded data itself R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 492 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ltem Description Number Record type Record length This is the number of bytes in 3 plus the number of bytes in 4 Entry address This is the
477. owing items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add File On the Project Tree panel select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or file and then select Add gt gt Add File from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the file to add to projects exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in Look in and Files of type is shown 3 File name area Designate the file name of the file to add to projects R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 294 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Designate the file type of the file to add to projects Function information file fin N t All Files All the format default Note Only devices with a memory bank installed Function buttons Adds the designated file to a project Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 295 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select a folder and retrieve it for the caller Figure A 40 Browse For Folder dialog box Browse For Folder Select the Folder to add File 5 Project
478. owing macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank the reference information file is not output This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default ProjectName _refinfo txt How to change Directly enter to the text box Up to 259 characters 2 Margin The detailed information on the margin is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed when No on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category is selected Margin for common area Specify a margin value of the common area for relocation when creating a function information file If a positive value is specified the common area is relocated and considered to become small by the specified value as a margin If a negative value is specified the common area is relo cated and considered to become large by the specified value as a margin Default 1000 Directly enter to the text box 65536 to 65536 decimal number Margin for bank XX area Specify a margin value of the bank XX area for relocation when creating a function information file If a positive value is specified the bank XX area is relocated and considered to become small by the specified value as a margin If a negative value is specified the bank XX area is relo cated and considered to become large by the speci
479. ows C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vfi Function information file fin N R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 268 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Text file txt Note Only devices with a memory bank installed 2 File name area Directly enter the name of the file to create The default file extension is txt Remark If extensions are not designated the one selected in the File type area are is added Also that if extensions different from the one selected in the File type area are designated the one selected in the File type area is added as an extension for example if you designate aaa txt as a file name and select C source file c as file type the file is named as aaa txt c 3 File location area Designate the location to create a file by directly entering its path or selecting from Refer button The default file location is the project folder path a Button Refer Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box When a folder is selected a path is added in the text box Remarks 1 When the text box is left blank the project folder is regarded to be designated 2 When the relative path is used the path is regarded to be from the project folder Remark The number of characters that can be entered in the File name area and the
480. ox which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the compile options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the compile options group Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 253 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Individual Assemble Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on an assemble source file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Assemble Options tab If the settings are changed from the Assemble Options tab the properties are displayed in boldface Remarks 1 This tab is displayed when Yes in the Set individual assemble option property in the Build category from the Build Settings tab is selected 2 This tab is also displayed when a C source file is selected and Yes is selected in the Output assemble file property in the Assembly File category from the Individual Compile Options tab 2 Preprocess 1 Debug Information 2 3 Output File 4
481. p in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Executes the list converter after the generation of an execution module No Does not execute the list converter after the generation of an execution module Output list converter error list file Select whether to output an error list file during list converter execution This corresponds to the e option of the list converter This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected and when No in the Execute list converter property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes e Outputs an error list file during list converter execution No Does not output an error list file during list converter execution Output with assemble list info Select whether to output the assemble list information into the assemble list file This corresponds to the ka option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the assemble list information into the assemble list file No nka Does not output the assemble list information into the as
482. p debug property the Debug monitor area size byte property are displayed Figure 2 75 Use on chip debug and Debug monitor area size byte Property Device Use on chip debug Debug monitor area size byte et user option byte Set flash start address Mo Boot area load module file name On the Debug monitor area size byte property specify the size of the debug monitor area in decimal The range that can be specified for the value is 256 to 1024 default 256 Set the user option byte By setting the user option byte settings for the watchdog timer low voltage detection circuit and system reserved area are made The settings for the user option byte are also made in the Device category on the Link Options tab If you select Yes gb on the Set user option byte property the User option byte value property is displayed Figure 2 76 Set user option byte and User option byte value Property O Device Use on chip debug Yes go Tes gb bite We 3000000002 Hon byte value Boot area load module file name On the User option byte value property specify the user option byte value in hexadecimal without Ox The range that can be specified for the value is 0 to FFFFFFFFFF If the setting is made as above the following value is set 0x30 to address 0x80 0x00 to address 0x81 0x00 to address 0x82 0x00 to address 0x83 0x02 to address 0x84 Setting the security ID The security ID
483. p specification The help option is as follows Description format Interpretation when omitted No display Function The option outputs a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the list convert options See these when executing the list converter Description When the option is specified all other options are invalid Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Example of use To output a help message on the display describe as C gt lcenv78k0 List Conversion Program for RA78KO Vx xx XX XXX xx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation usage LCNV78KO option input file option The option is as follows means omissible r file Specify object module file l file Specify load module file o file Specify output list file absolute assemble list file ffile Input option or input file name from specified file e file Create error list file Show this message R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 549 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 7 Variables Information File Generator The variables information file generator uses a number of object module files to be output by the C compiler or assem bler and outputs a variables information file that contains information for efficiently allocating variables If an er
484. pace the object converter generates a separate hex file for each space The file types of hex files generated for extended space are as follows Normal Space Extended Space re e ee fe pe fm e R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 500 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To output a hex file Sample hex describe as C gt 0c78k0 k0 lmf osample hex R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 501 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Symbol table file output specification The Symbol table file output specification options are as follows S ns S ns Description format s Loutput file name ns Interpretation when omitted Sinput file name sym The file type for extended space is S1 to S15 Function The s option specifies the output of a symbol table file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The ns option specifies that no symbol table file is output Application Use the s option to specify the location to which a symbol table file is output or to change its file name Specify the ns option when performing object conversion only to output a hex file This will shorten object conversion time Description If output file name is omitted when the s option is specified the symbol table file nput file name sym will be
485. pecified However when a list file is output to display it is assumed that 80 has been specified The specified number of characters does not include the terminator CR LF If the list subcommand is not specified the Iw option is ignored If two or more lw options are specified the option specified last is valid Example of use To specify 80 as the number of characters per line in a list file describe as C gt 1b78k0 1lw80 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 520 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format 11 number of lines Interpretation when omitted II66 No page breaks in the case of display output Function The Il option specifies the number of lines per page in a list file Application Use the Il option to change the number of lines per page in a list file Description The range number of lines that can be specified with the Il option is O and 20 to 32767 An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is speci fied If the number of lines is omitted it is assumed that 66 has been specified If the number of lines specified is 0 no page breaks will be made If the list subcommand is not specified the Il option is ignored If two or more lIl options are specified the option specified last is valid Example of use To
486. pecified at the same time R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 371 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use The characters after before the line feed code in the C source file prime c are interpreted as a comment Also nesting of comments is permitted C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c zpc R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 372 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device file search path specification The device file search path specification option is as follows ey Description format yfolder Interpretation when omitted Normal search path only Remark The normal search paths are as follows 1 lt dev gt Path by which the cc78k0 exe was started up 2 Path by which the cc78k0 exe was started up 3 Current folder 4 The environmental variable PATH Function The y option first searches the path specified as the search path for reading device files If it does not exist the normal paths are searched Application If the device file is not installed in the normal search path but in a special folder the path is specified by this option Cautions When using CubeSuite folders are determined by the microcontroller selected when the project was created Therefore it is not necessary to specify this option when setting options with this compiler Example o
487. pecified path Application Use the i option to search an include file from a certain path Description Two or more path names can be specified at once by separating them with A space cannot be entered before or after The include file specified by include is searched in the following sequence 1 If two or more path names are specified following the i option the include file is searched in the specified order 2 If two or more i options are specified the include file is searched with the option specified later taking priority 3 After the path specified by the i option is searched the include file is searched in the same order as interpretation when the option is omitted An abort error occurs if anything other than a path name is specified after i or if the path name is omitted An abort error occurs if 65 or more i options are specified Example of use To search and read an include file from folders C sample1 and C samplez2 in that order describe as R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 393 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To read an include file from folder D include files describe as R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 394 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assemble list file output specification The assemble list file output specification options are as follows
488. pecifies the drive and folder in which a temporary file is created Application Use the t option to specify the location for creation of a temporary file Description Even if a previously created temporary file exists if the file is not protected it will be overwritten the next time As long as the required memory size is available the temporary file will be expanded in memory If the required memory size is no longer available the temporary file is created in the specified folder and the memory contents are written to the file Accesses to subsequent temporary files are to files not in memory Temporary files are deleted when compilation is finished They are also deleted when compilation is aborted by pressing the CTRL C key Example of use To output a temporary file to folder C tmp describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c ttmp R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 369 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Function expansion specification The function expansion specification options are as follows Z NZ Z NZ Description format ztype two or more types can be specified Z Interpretation when omitted nZ Function The z option enables extended functions The nz option disables the z option type is cannot be omitted A fatal error F0012 occurs if the specification is omitted Application
489. pecifies the number of characters per line in each list file Specifies the number of lines per page in each list file Specifies the number of expansion characters of a tab in each list file Inserts a form feed code at the end of each list file Adds the C source in the include file to the assembler source file specification List format specification with C source comments I I I R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 327 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Warning output specification Specifies whether or not a warning message is output to the console Execution state display Specifies whether the execution status of compilation is output to specification the console Parameter file specification Inputs the input file name and options from a specified file Temporary file creation folder Creates a temporary file in the specified drive and folder specification Function expansion specification Enables the processing for extended functions Device file search path Specifies paths that search device files specification Static model specification Specifies that the object is a static model or normal model Common object specification Specifies the output of an object common to the 78KO ma Variables information file Specifies a variables information file specification Function information file mf Specifies that the functions are allocated to a code block larg
490. process types are interpreted as follows ec Assigns a bit field from the least significant bit LSB a Does not automatically assign any variable to the saddr area Does not automatically assign any variable to the saddr area Does not automatically assign any variable to the saddr area Does not perform packing structure Example of use To assign the external variable or external static variable and static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether sreg has been declared describe as C gt cec78k0 cF051144 rds R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 335 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE rd nr Description format Interpretation when omitted nr Function The rd option specifies to assign an external variable external static variable automatically to the saddr area The nr option disables the rd option Application Use the rd option to assign an external variable external static variable except for the const type variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether there is an sreg declaration or not Description Variables to be assigned change depending on the value of n and the specification of m Variable Types to Be Assigned to saddr Area When n 1 char unsigned char When n 2 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function p
491. products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics How to Use This Manual This manual describes the role of the CubeSuite integrated development environment for developing application systems for 78KO microcontrollers and provides an outline of its features CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE for 78KO microcontrollers integrating the necessary tools for the development phase of software e g design implementation and debugging into a single platform By providing an integrated environment it is possible to perform all development using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Readers This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the CubeSuite and design software and hardware application systems Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the CubeSuite to use for reference in developing the hardware or software of systems using these devices Organization This manual can be broadly divided into the following units CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS APPENDIX A WI
492. r 1 Compile 04 8F 0 2 Sscemble A4 raki 3 Yarables information file generator F 7 ak0 4 Compiler CAr78K0 m 5 Assemble AA raki 6 Linker LK 78K0 T Object converteOCrSkK0 Common 4 Compile 4 Assemble Link Opti 4 Object can 2 10 1 Efficiently allocate variables Use the variables information file generator to efficiently allocate variables This tool generates a variables information file a file containing allocation information for all variables to be referenced Variables will be allocated to the saddr area by performing compilation using that file The procedures for performing this operation are described below Generating a variables information file automatically and allocating variables and functions Editing and using an auto generated variables information file 1 Generating a variables information file automatically and allocating variables and functions Below is the procedure for generating a variables functions information file automatically and using that file to allocate variables and functions via one build a Set the generation of the variables information file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Variables Relocation Options tab on the Property panel Set the Output variables information file property to Yes to generate an empty variables information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree The o
493. r callee functions has been modified via the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file fea Fecwavenn a The stack usage tracer has not acquired any stack information for this function LJ Other than the above R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 88 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 3 Check the stack information You can check the stack information function name total stack size frame size additional margin and file name from the list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window Total stack size including stack size of callee functions Frame size not including stack size of callee functions Additional margin value mandatorily added to frame size Figure 2 122 List Display Area main 576 4 DsiprojiSte LJ stabi 4 4 DsorojSTE By sub 572 424 DsiprojiSTkh subii 4 4 DiiprojiSTEN H sub12e 5 4 DiiprojiSTE L sample c 4 4 DeiprojiSTey LJ subi4 4 4 Dsyoroj STK Remark If you make changes to the project that will affect the total stack size while the stack usage tracer is running e g you edit the files in your project so that the total stack size changes then after rebuilding the project click to update the display R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 89 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 4 Check unknown functions You can check functions for which the stack usage
494. r details about output lists Table B 8 I O Files of Linker Input files Object module file Binary file containing relocation information and symbol information regarding machine language information and machine language location addresses File output by the assembler Library file File in which two or more object module files are included File output by the librarian Link directive file File which contain link directives for the linker user created file Parameter file File containing the parameters for the executed programs user created file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 424 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output files Load module file Binary image file which contain all information created as a result of linking This file is input to the object converter Link list file List file which display the result of linking Error list file File containing error information generated during linking I O files Temporary file File created automatically by the linker for linking LKxxxxx n purposes n 1 to 3 Temporary files are deleted when linking ends B 3 2 Functions 1 Joining of input segments The linker determines and controls the location address of each segment The linker identifies identical segments and joins them into a single segment even if they are in separate object module files 2 Determination of input modules When
495. r that contains the subproject file of the selected subproject with Explorer Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects files and category nodes to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to the project The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to the project The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Set selected subproject as Sets the selected subproject to an active project Active Project Remove from Project Removes the selected subproject from the project The subproject file itself is not deleted from the file system with this operation When the selected subproject is the ac
496. re can be changed lt 1 gt Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder for function information file property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box BuildModeName is set by default BuildModeName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the build mode name lt 2 gt Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Function information file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box ProjectName fin is set by default ProjectName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the project name If this property is changed an empty function information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the Files node of the project tree b Set the output of auxiliary information files Set the output of auxiliary information files which provide support when the user edits the generated function information file The auxiliary information files are as follows Replacement information file Object information file Reference information file Remark See 3 8 Memory Bank Relocation Support Tool for details about each file The setting to output auxiliary files is made with the Output File category R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 53 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c
497. re not permitted for the start character Up to 64 bits 16 digit hexadecimal are possible Type Address or scalar a scalar indicates any numerical value other than an address Addresses are divided into code addresses instruction addresses and data addresses addresses of data items Global local specification Indicates whether a symbol is global external reference enabled or local R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 488 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Section membership A section may be considered a range to which a memory name is given Each address in a program belongs to at least one section A scalar does not belong to any section The format for the symbol block is shown below Table B 18 Symbol Block Format for Extended Tektronix Field Number of ASCII Description Characters Header Standard header field Block type 3 Section name 2 to 17 This is the name of the section which includes the symbols defined in the block Number of characters is variable Section definition This field must be displayed in one symbol block in each section This field may be placed before or after any number of symbol definition fields See Table B 19 Symbol Block Section Definition Fields for Extended Tektronix about this format Symbol definition 5 to 35 each This is a symbol definition field greater than 0 See Table B 20 Symbol Block Symbol Definition Fields for
498. rea project to the flash area project Select the Link Options tab Specify the boot area load module file on the Boot area load module file name property in the Device category Figure 2 90 Boot area load module file name Property in Flash Area O Device Use on chip debug Ho Set user option byte Ho Fa _ Aboot D efaultB uldi boot Imt Boot area load module file name d Set object convert options Select the Object Convert Options tab Select Yes zf on the Split hex file property in the Hex File category Figure 2 91 Split hex file Property in Flash Area E Hex File Output hes file Yes Output folder for hes file AB uildM ode anes Hex file name 24 rojecth amez hex 3 Run a build of the flash area project When you run a build of the flash area project a load module file which implements the relink function is created The boot area hex file the same content as the file created in 2 14 2 Set the boot area project and flash area hex file are also created R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 68 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 Figure 2 92 Created Files for Flash Area Project Tree 2 0 2 E sE Project a FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool D g File gi Build tool generated Files t flash Imf l map lash map tod flash heb 5 Flash hief Syn flash swm FA Startup as Flash c Be l
499. reate Library Options Tab Property A CASO Property El Output File Output folder 4B uildM ode amez Output file name FProjectN amet lib El List File Output ist file No Others Output folder Species the folder to which the generated libraries are sawed The following macro names are available as embedded macros ZBuildModeN ame Replaces with the build mode name Common O A Compile Op A Assemble J A Memory Ba Description of each category 1 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output folder Specify the folder for saving the library that is generated If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 220 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output file name Specify the library file
500. reby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but Renes
501. rel If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the output file name will be output file name rel Even if the o option is specified when a compilation error occurs the object module file cannot be output If the drive name is omitted when the o option is specified the object module file will be output to the current drive If both the o and no options are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Cautions To change the output destination when using CubeSuite on the Property panel from the Link Options tab in the Output File category specify the output destination When setting an individual compile option it is also possible to change the name of the output file From the Individual Compile Options tab in the Output File category specify the file name Example of use The no option that is specified first is ignored the o option that is specified last is valid so the object module file prime rel will be output C gt cec78k0 cF051144 prime c no o R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 333 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Memory assignment specification The memory assignment options are as follows r nr r nr rd nr rk nr rs nr Description format rprocess type two or more types can be specified nr Interpretation when omitt
502. rent newline code ka 3 f LI Reload the file Paani The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select file name Save Settings from the File menu Description of each area 1 Encode Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items of the drop down list are displayed according to the following sequence Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed Encoding of the current file default Default encoding of the current OS Encoding of code page 932 SJIS Encoding of code page 50222 JIS Encoding of code page 51932 EUC Encoding of code page 65001 UTF8 Encoding supported by the current OS other than those mentioned above 2 Newline code Select the newline code to be set from the drop down list You can select any of items below Keep current newline code Windows CR LF Macintosh CR R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 280 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Unix LF Keep current newline code is selected by default After the newline code is changed the set newline code is selected by default 3 Reload the file Use this check box to select whether to reload the file with the selected encoding and newline code when the OK button is
503. returns control to the host operating system Conversion complete If the list converter detects a fatal error during list conversion which makes it unable to continue list convert processing the list converter outputs a message to the display cancels list conversion and returns control to the host operating system R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 542 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example A non existent list convert option is specified List Conversion Program for RA78KO Vx xx XX XXX Xxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0O error F6018 Option is not recognized a Program aborted 3 Set options in CubeSuite CubeSuite includes list convert options in the assemble options See the Assemble Options tab in the Property panel for details about setting the assemble options B 6 4 Option 1 Types The list convert options are detailed instructions for the operation of the list converter The types and explanations for list convert options are shown below Table B 29 List Convert Options Object module file input specifi r Inputs an object module file cation Load module file input specifica i Inputs a load module file tion Error list file output specification Outputs an error list file Parameter file specification Inputs the input file name and options from a specified file Help specification C Outputs a help message on
504. ritten in the assembly language for 78KO microcontrollers converts them into machine language coding and outputs them as an object module file The assembler also outputs list files such as assemble list files and error list files If assembly errors occur an error message is output to the assemble list file and error list file to clarify the cause of the error Figure B 3 I O Files of Assembler Include file Assembler source file Parameter file Temporary file Assembler Assemble list file Object module file Error list file B 2 1 I O files The I O files of the assembler are shown below See 3 2 Assembler for details about output lists Table B 5 I O Files of Assembler Input files Assembler source file Source file written in assembly language for asm 78KO microcontrollers user created file Include file File referenced from assembler source files File written in assembly language for 78KO microcontrollers user created file Parameter file File containing the parameters for the executed pra programs user created file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 380 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output files Object module file Binary file containing relocation information and symbol information regarding machine language information and machine language location addresses Assemble list file File containing assembly information such as assem
505. rmation about changes is displayed in the Output panel If you change from an older version to a newer version the option settings will be inherited and converted only if necessary If you change from a newer version to an older version only identical option settings will be inherited Options that only exist in the older version will be set to the default values Figure 2 2 Output Image of Information about Changed Options Output CATSHO Wl 00 l 20 Changes CATSEO Available Compile Opticons OQutput common object file for various devices No CATSRO Available Compile Options Variables information file for boot area il CATSRO Available Compile Options Using variables information file re CATSEO Available Compile OUptions Optimize for debugging No CATSEO Available Link Options Set user option byte No CATSEO Available Link Options User option byte value dl CATSRO Available Variables Felocation ptions l CATSEO Available Individual Compile OUptions OQutput common object file for various de vices No CATSEO Available Individual Compile Options Optimize for debugging No All Messages A Rapid Build A Build Tool R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 16 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 Set Build Target Files Before running a build you must add the build target files such as C source file assembler source file t
506. rmation file fin N Map file map Symbol table file sym Hex file hex Axb hxf Text file txt Note Only devices with a memory bank installed Remarks 1 You can use one of the methods below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag a file and drop it onto the Editor panel Select a file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu 2 When the environment is set to use an external editor on the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS 2 3 3 Remove a file from a project To remove a file added to a project select the file to be removed from the project on the project tree and then select Remove from Project from the context menu In addition the file itself is not deleted from the file system Figure 2 11 Remove from Project Item Lil File g F 2 Compile Ly Open A Open with Internal Editor Foe Open with Selected Application Open Folder with Explorer Add Copy Ctrl C ale Rename R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 23 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 4 Remove a file from the build target You can remove a specific file from the build target out of all the files added to the project Select the file to be removed from the build target on the project tree and select t
507. rmation to the module being generated This corresponds to the g option of the compiler If Yes is selected on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab this property will be changed to Yes Add to both assembly and object file g2 Yes Add to both assembly and object file g2 Select from the drop down list Yes Add to both Adds debug information to the object module file assembly and object and assembler source module file being file g2 generated Does not add debug information to the object module file being generated 2 Optimization The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Restriction Yes Add to object file Adds debug information to the object module file only g1 being generated Perform optimization Select the type of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the qx option of the compiler Yes Standara ax2 Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Speed Performs optimization with the execution speed precedence qx1 precedence Yes Standard Performs optimization with both the execution speed qx2 and module size precedence Yes Code size Performs optimization with the module size qx3 precedence Best qx4 size Yes Code size Performs optimization with top precedence to module In addition qx3 common code is placed in sub
508. rop down list Restriction Yes Adds debug information to the object module file being generated No ng Does not add debug information to the object module file being generated 2 Input File The detailed information on input files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Using link directive file Display the link directive file to be used for linking This corresponds to the d option of the linker Default The link directive file name that is added to the project How to change Changes not allowed 3 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output folder Specify the folder for saving the module that is generated If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 206 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPEN
509. rop down list Restriction Yes With no C source info a Outputs the assembly file without C source information Yes With C source Outputs the assembly file with C source info unexpanded include file information include file contents are not contents sa expanded Yes With C source Outputs the assembly file with C source info expanded include file information include file contents are contents sa li expanded Does not output the assembly fie 12 Variables Information File The detailed information on the variables information file are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for library projects Using variables This is the variables information file to be used for allocating to the saddr area for variables information file The valid variables information file registered to the project is searched and the file name is displayed This corresponds to the ma option of the compiler Default The name of the variables information file that is added to the project How to change Changes not allowed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 189 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Variables information file Specify the variables information file which is used in the project of the boot area for boot area This corresponds to the ma option of the compiler If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the
510. roperty is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kc Does not output comments into the preprocess list file Outputs comments into the preprocess list file Select whether to expand the define directive into the preprocess list file Expand define preprocessor directive This corresponds to the kd option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kd Expands the define directive into the preprocess list file No Does not expand the define directive into the preprocess list file Expand if ifdef ifndef preprocessor directive Select whether to perform output by expanding if ifdef and ifndef directives into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kf option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Yes kf How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kf Performs output by expanding if ifdef and ifndef directives into the preprocess list file No Does not perform output by expanding if ifdef and ifndef directives into the preprocess list file Expand include preprocessor directive Select whether to perform output by expanding include directives into the preprocess list file This corresp
511. ror occurs an error message is Output to the display to clarify the cause of the error When an error occurs the variables information file will not be output Figure B 36 I O Files of Variables Information File Generator Object module file Library file Link directive file Parameter file Load module file Variables information file generator W Variables information file B 7 1 I O files The I O files of the variables information file generator are shown below See 3 7 Variables Information File Generator for details about output file Table B 30 I O Files of Variables Information File Generator Input files Object module file Binary file including machine language informa tion relocation information relating to machine language allocation addresses and symbol infor mation File output by the compiler or assembler Library file File in which two or more object module files are included File output by the librarian Link directive file File which contain link directives for the linker user created file Parameter file File containing the parameters for the executed programs user created file Load module file Load module file to be re input during self pro gramming R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 550 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output file Variables information file File specifying allocation to the saddr area and callt table area it is
512. routines and the library for the stack access is used Yes Detail setting The Optimization Details category is shown The option that is selected in the category has the precedence for the optimization When No nq is selected in all the properties in the Optimization Details category the optimization will not be done The optimization will not be done R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 175 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Optimization Details The detailed information on the optimization are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when Yes Detail setting in the Perform optimization property in the Optimization category is selected Swap order of formula operations Select whether to output an efficient code in order to achieve efficient register utilization by swapping the execution order of formula This corresponds to the qw option of the compiler Default Yes Swap order of formula operations qw1 How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Swap order of Swaps the order of formula operations formula operations qw1 Yes for soeed assumed In addition to the swapping the order of formula SADDR array is in 256 operations changes the execution order in an bytes qw2 expression and performs address calculation without a carry while assuming that the size of the array does not ex
513. rtup files to the project hereafter referred to as Startup node This node is always placed lower than the File node Category name Categories that the user created to categorize files see 2 3 5 Classify a hereafter referred to as category node file into a category This node is always placed lower than the File node R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 146 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Subproject name Subproject Subprojects added to the project hereafter referred to as Subproject node Note Only devices with a memory bank installed When each component the node or file is selected the detailed information property is displayed in the Property panel You can change the settings Remark When more than one components are selected only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed When multiple files are selected and the values of their common properties are different then the corresponding value fields are displayed blank This area has the following functions a Add files You can add files by one of the following procedure The files are added under the File node lt 1 gt Add existing files Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add File from the File menu The Add Existing File dialog box appears Select files to add Select either one of the Project node Subproj
514. rupt vector processing in the following manner Change the address value of ITBLTOP EQU 2000H in vect inc The default installation location for vect inc is as follows C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78KO0 Vx xx src cc78k0 src bat repvect bat bat mkstup bat on the DOS prompt and update the startup routine and library copy to lib78kO and use for linking R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 479 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE f Describing a link directive file The following points should be noted when using a link directive file If the address of a section placed in the RAM area overlaps in the boot area and flash area the linker outputs an error For the RAM area that must be referenced simultaneously in the boot area and flash area addresses must be specified so that they do not overlap A link directive file related to the branch table does not have to be described It is automatically allocated to an address specified by the link option g Library If a library function is called from the boot area or flash area the library is linked to the object on the calling side For example even if a library is linked to the flash area the same library is linked to the boot area if the same library function is called from the boot area When a library function is called therefore branching does not take place between the boot area and flash area
515. ry category and Commands executed before link processing Commands executed after link processing in the Others category From the Object Convert Options tab Commands executed before object convert processing Commands executed after object convert processing in the Others category From the Create Library Options tab Commands executed before making library Commands executed after making library in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options tab Macro definition Macro undefinition in the Preprocess cate gory and Commands executed before compile processing Commands executed after compile processing in the Others category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before assemble Commands executed after assemble in the Others category From the File Information tab Memo in the Notes category From the Category Information tab Memo in the Notes category R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 274 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Text area Input and edit texts in multiple lines By default this dialog box opens with its edit box reflecting the current value of the property selected to call the dia log box Remark Up to 65535 lines and 65535 characters are allowed When the input violates any restriction
516. ry Model Output File Assembly File Data Control List File Others Add debug informaton Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the q option H o File Information R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 236 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information Select whether to enable source level debugging by adding debug information to the module being generated This corresponds to the g option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Add to both Adds debug information to the object module file assembly and object and assembler source module file being file g2 generated No Does not add debug information to the object module file being generated 2 Optimization The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Restriction Yes Add to object file Adds debug information to the object module file only g1 being generated Perform optimization Select the type of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the qx option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from
517. s Syntax Execute constant computations gt a Analyzer during compilation True or false decision based on 0 amp amp a b partial evaluation of a logical 1 a amp b expression c Offset calculations of pointers Calculate the offsets during compilation arrays etc Code Register management Effectively use unused registers Generator oe e Use the special instructions of the 1 gt Use the inc instruction target CPU Use the move instruction to substitute array elements f Use short instructions If there is an instruction with the same operation use the instruction with fewer bytes mov a 0 or xor a a differs depending on the device g Change long jump instructions to The intermediate code that was output is reprocessed short jump instructions R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 321 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Optimizer h Delete common partial expressions Move outside an instruction loop Delete unused instructions gt Delete After a b a is not referenced gt Delete a is an automatic variable Delete copies C a d a is not referenced any more a is an automatic variable Change the calculation orderinan The results of operations are left in the register and valid expression operations are executed first Memory device allocation Variables used locally are allocated to registers temporary
518. s have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab 2 6 1 Add an include path Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel The include path setting is made with the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 39 Additional include paths Property Macro detinition Macro definition 0 If you click the button the Path Edit dialog box will open R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 38 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 40 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line F Browse Subfolders are automatically included Enter an include path per line in Path One path per one line You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 64 line Remark You can also specify the include path via the Browse button Select the Subfolders are automatically included check box before clicking the Browse button to add all paths under the specified one down to 5 levels to Path One path per one line If you click the OK button the entered include paths are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 41 Additional include paths Property After Adding Include Paths Additional include paths D To change the include paths you can use the button or enter the path directly in the
519. s node Public symbol list Remark See B 3 1 O files for details about input and output files of the linker 3 3 1 Link list file headers The header is always output at the beginning of a link list file 78KO Linker 1 Vx xx Date 2 xx xxx xxxx Page 3 xxxx Command 4 kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0O map dk0O dr Para file 5 Out file 6 k0 lmf Map File 7 kOmain map Direc File 8 Directive 9 xxx Tink information 10 3 output segment s 11 37H byte s real data 12 23 symbol s defined Item Description Format Number Displayed in x yz format a pna Date of link list file creation Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format o pasenme T Gis toned samal vave win zose sommesso e oommarswomese papare ne cones these R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 110 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number a ee 10 Number of segments output to Displays the number of segments output to the load module file load module file Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 11 Size of data output to load Displays the size of the data output to the load module file module file Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 12 Number of symbols output to Displays the number of symbols output to the load module file load module file Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed
520. s number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified If the number of items specified in the System library paths property and in the Using standard libraries property in the Library category on the Compile Options tab together total more than 64 then an error will occur under build execution System library paths The folder to search the system library file is displayed The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder If a relative path is displayed the reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the linker The library path name is displayed as the subproperty System library paths number of defined items How to change Changes not allowed 5 Device The detailed information on the device are displayed and the configuration can be changed Use on chip debug Select whether to set the on chip debug Change the size of the debug monitor area This corresponds to the go option of the linker This property is not displayed when the device does not have an on chip debug f
521. s recommend to save frequently by pressing the Ctrl S key 2 _Enabling disabling a rapid build is set for the entire project main project and subprojects 3 If you disable a rapid build while it is running it will be stopped at that time Caution This function is valid only when editing source files with the Editor panel R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 82 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes You can run builds rebuilds and cleans in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has hereafter referred to as batch build Remark See the sections below for a build rebuild and clean Build See 2 16 1 Run a build of updated files Rebuild See 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Clean See 2 16 8 Delete intermediate files and generated files Select Batch Build from the Build menu The Batch Build dialog box opens Figure 2 114 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Build mode Defined macros DefautBuild Buildhlodez DefautBuild Buildhlodez Project In the dialog box the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project and their build modes and macro definitions is displayed Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and build modes that you wish to run a batch build a
522. s the file dependencies in the compile option settings or assemble option settings you must update the dependencies of the relevant files Updating file dependencies is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project 1 For the entire project From the Build menu select Update Dependencies Figure 2 16 Update Dependencies Item Build fi Build Project F7 fe Rebuild Project Shift F7 id Clean Project R anig Builo ow Update Dependencies Build sample Rebuild sample Clean sample Update Dependencies of sample E t r mg m i ia Build Mode Settings Batch Build m Build option List 2 For the active project From the Build menu select Update Dependencies of active project R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 26 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark saved Cautions 1 Figure 2 17 Build a Build Project E Rebuild Project id Clean Project T Rapid Build Update Dependencies oh E E Build sample t Rebuild sample a Clean sample A P riia Le Build Mode Settings EL Batch Build L Build Option List Update Dependencies of sample Fi Shift F7 Update Dependencies of active project Item If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when updating file dependencies then all these files are During checking of dependence relationships of i
523. s the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property Remark See B 2 1 I O files for details about input and output files of the assembler 3 2 1 Assemble list file headers The header is always output at the beginning of an assemble list file 78K0 Assembler 1 Vx xx 2 SAMPLE TITLE Date 3 XxX XXX Xxxx Page 4 xXxxx 5 SAMPLE SUBTITLE Command 6 kOmain asm cF051144 P ra file 7 kS ke oa ole 8 kOmain asm Obj file 9 kOmain rel Prn file 10 kOmain prn Item Description Format Number Displayed in x yz format 3 Date of assemble list creation Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format 0 Stier ene oupas te crater sing pst oy SUBTITLE corro neincion 5 6 Command line Outputs the command line contents Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 11 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character 8 line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character Input source file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted asm is attached as the file type extension Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 11 on the next line R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 103 of 570 Apr 01 2011 7 Parameter file contents Outputs the parameter file contents Contents that exc
524. s to global functions number of locations calling them defined in separate files Reference from same file Outputs the number of references to global functions number of locations calling them defined in the same file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 127 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS This chapter introduces the lists of sample programs attached to CA78KO build tool in CubeSuite 4 1 C Compiler This section introduces the lists of sample programs attached to the C compiler 4 1 1 C source file define TRUE 1 define FALSE 0 define SIZE 200 char mark SIZE 1 main int i prime k count count 0 for i 0 i lt SIZE i mark i TRUE for i 0 i lt SIZE i if mark i 4 prime i i 3 printf 6d prime count if count 8 0 putchar a for k i prime k lt SIZE k prime mark k FALSE printf n sd primes found count printf char s int i l int j char SS Jari putchar char c R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 128 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS prime c 18 CC78KO warning W0745 Expected function prototype prime c 20 CC78K0 warning W0745 Expected function prototype prime c 26 CC78K0 warning W0622 No return val
525. scious of this bank number CPU address When performing self programming or on board programming to the flash memory however programming must be performed based on the flash memory real address Therefore the object converter outputs the hex file with the flash memory real address thereby address translation from bank number CPU address to the flash memory real address during self programming or by the writer is no longer required The hex output based on the flash memory real address is supported in the object converter With the bank supported products codes are output in the Intel extended hex format and flash memory real address by default but other output formats can also be selected by specifying the k option With a 64 KB or larger flash memory the code does not operate if it is output in the Intel standard format In this case be sure to specify the Intel extended format or the Motorola S type 24 bit standard address or 32 bit address for output In the following program lab_bk1 is allocated to address 18000H Assemble list OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT main c AT 100H 00100 13F201 BANK BANKNUM lab bki 00103 R9A0080 lab_bk1 BANK1 18000 gt 0C000H lab bk1 The example of output in Intel extended hex format flash memory real address is as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 136 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS gt LOOOFOOOFFFPFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFP
526. scription An abort error occurs if something other than a path name is specified after the y option An abort error occurs if the path name is omitted after the y option The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the y option 2 Path registered in the device file installer 3 Path by which the OC78KO was started up 4 Current folder 5 The environmental variable PATH R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 509 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To specify the path for the device file as folder C 78kO dev describe as C gt o0c78k0O k0 lmf yC 78k0 dev To specify the path for the device file as folder D device files describe as C gt 0c78k0 kO 1lmf y D device files R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 510 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE File separate output specification for built in flash memory product The file separate output specification option for built in flash memory product is as follows Zf Zf Description format Z Interpretation when omitted Not separately output Function The zf option splits the file into separate files one for the boot area and one for other areas Description When specifying boot area ROM program linking for a product with built in
527. se the e option to specify the location to which an error list file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the e option is specified the output file name will be input file name ecc If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the e option is specified the output file name will be outpout file name ecc If the drive name is omitted when the e option is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive If the w0 option is specified warning messages cannot be output Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To output the error list file orime ecc describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c e Output example is shown below R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 355 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE prime CC78KO warning W0745 Expected function prototype prime CC78KO warning W0745 Expected function prototype prime CC78KO warning W0622 No return value prime CC78KO warning W0622 No return value prime CC78KO warning W0622 No return value Target chip uPD78F0511_44 Device file VxX xx Compilation complete 0 error s and 5 warning s found R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 356 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Descr
528. sed When the multiplier and divider are used lt modeb None When the memory model is the normal model When the memory model is the static model lt float gt None When the standard I O library supported floating point data is not used When the standard I O library supported floating point data is used lt pascal gt None When the pascal function interface is not used When the pascal function interface is used lt flash gt When the object for the standard or for the boot area is generated When the object for the flash area is generated 7 Message The detailed information on messages are displayed and the configuration can be changed Verbose mode Select whether to display the execution status of the compiler to the Output panel during build This corresponds to the v option of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Displays the execution status of the compiler during build No Does not display the execution status of the compiler during build R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 184 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Warning level Select the warning display level under compiling This corresponds to the w option of the compiler Default Normal output How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction No output w0 Does not output warning messages Normal output Outputs normal warning messages Particular ou
529. selected The folder is added below the File node Note that on the project tree the folder is the category Remark When the category node created by the user exists you can add a file below the node by dropping the file onto the node see 2 3 5 Classify a file into a category for a category node 2 Creating and adding an empty file On the project tree select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box opens R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 20 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 8 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vt Function information file fir Test file txt In the dialog box specify the file to be created and then click the OK button The file is added below the File node The project tree after adding the file will look like the one below Figure 2 9 Project Tree Panel After Adding File main c Project Tree gt amp E sample Project UPDVSFOS88_ 48 Microcontroller E3 A Fin Configurator Design Tool H H Code Generator Design Tool A CAFSKO Build Tool che FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS
530. semble list file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 257 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output with symbol list Select whether to output the symbol list information into the assemble list file This corresponds to the ks option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes ks Outputs the symbol list information into the assemble list file No Does not output the symbol list information into the assemble list file Output with cross reference list Select whether to output the cross reference list information into the assemble list file This corresponds to the kx option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kx Outputs the cross reference list information into the assemble list file No Does not output the cross reference list information into the assemble list file Output with form feed control code Select whether to output a form feed code into list files This corresponds to the lf option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list
531. set to Yes s and cannot be changed How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes s Generates a stack solution symbol Does not generate a stack solution symbol R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 210 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Area name Specifies the name of the memory area that generates the stack solution symbol If the area name is omitted it is assumed that RAM has been specified This corresponds to the s option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Generate stack solution symbol property is selected How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 256 characters 8 Link List The detailed information on the link list are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output link list file Select whether to output the link list file This corresponds to the p option of the linker Output with link directive Select whether to output link directive information to the link list file info This corresponds to the kd option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected Output with local symbol Select whether to output local symbol list information to the link list file list This corresponds to the kl option of the linker This property is n
532. sh area RAM for flash RAM RAM for boot Flash area 2000H Branch table area ROM lt Flash start address ITBLTOP Boot area 0000H R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 468 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Image of relink function A function is called as shown below when the relink function is used a To call function in the boot area from the boot area The function can be called without problem because addresses have been resolved before they are programmed to the boot area Figure B 7 In Boot Area void func_rom1 void void func_rom2 void func_rom1 The function can be called without problem b To call function in the flash area from the flash area The function can be called without problem because addresses have been resolved in the flash area Figure B 8 In Flash Area void func_flash1 void void func_flash2 void func _flash1 The function can be called without problem R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 469 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE c d To call function in the flash area from the boot area When a function in the flash area is called from the boot area the address of the function cannot be known from the boot area because the function size etc have been changed in the flash area In other words a function in the flash are
533. sh area or external ROM and if it was not necessary to reorganize the project The boot area is fixed to the internal ROM If a function is called between the flash area to be rewritten and the boot area and if the start address of the function is changed as a result of modifying the function in the flash area the function cannot be called correctly The boot flash relink function hereafter referred to as the relink function is used to prevent this and enable functions to be called correctly This function is realized as follows a A branch table where instructions to branch to the functions in the flash area are written is prepared in the flash area b When a function in the flash area is called from the boot area execution jumps to the branch table in the flash area and then the instruction used to branch to the intended function is executed and jump occurs This mechanism can be realized by the user If the relink function is used this can be done relatively easily To use this function however the functions to be called in the flash area must be determined when the boot area is created This mechanism is used to call a function from the boot area even if the function is modified in the flash area Operation during a reset is as follows RESET interrupt vector boot area gt cstart boot area gt boot_main function boot area gt ITBLTOP address flash area gt cstart flash area gt _main function fla
534. sh to know such information as which line of the assemble list a certain symbol is referenced on Description If the nka nks and nkx options are all specified the assemble list file cannot be output If the ks and kx options are specified at the same time ks is ignored If both the kx and nkx options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the np option is specified the kx option is invalid Cautions A control instruction XREF NOXREF or XR NOXR with the same function as the kx and nkx options can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASAXREF ASAXR abbreviated form AS ANOXREF ASANOXR abbreviated form Example of use To output a cross reference list followed by an assemble list file into an assemble list file KOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm kx The contents of kOmain prn is as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 399 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Cross Reference List VALUE R ATTR RTYP SEGNAME XREFS CSEG CODE CONVAH DATA HDTSA MAIN SAMPM START STASC R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 400 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assemble list file format specification The assemble list file format specification options are as follows
535. specify 20 as the number of lines per page in a list file describe as C gt 1b78k0 1120 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 521 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If nlif Description format nlf Interpretation when omitted nlf Function The lf option inserts a form feed FF code at the end of a list file The nlf option disables the lf option Application Use the If option to insert a form feed code if you wish to add a page break after the contents of a list file are printed Description If the list subcommand is not specified the lf option is ignored If both the If and nlf options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use Inserts a form feed code at the end of a list file C gt l1b78k0 1f R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 522 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Temporary file creation path specification The temporary file creation path specification option is as follows ef t Description format tpath name Interpretation when omitted Path specified by environmental variable TMP Current path if environmental variable TMP is not specified Function The t option specifies a path in which a temporary file is created Application Use the t option to specify the location for creation
536. splayed in x yz format ei System date Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format Number of pages Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Command line Outputs the command line contents following CC78KO Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character C source file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted c is attached as the file type extension Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line 6 Cross reference list file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted xrf is attached Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line Parameter file contents Outputs the parameter file contents Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 101 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number E Include file Symbol attribute Symbol qualifier attributes Symbol type Symbol definition line number Symbol reference line number Target device for this compiler Displays the target device as specified via command line opti
537. ssage is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Favorite Projects Displays a cascading menu to use to open or save your favorite project 1 path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 1 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displayed 2 path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 2 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displayed 3 path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 3 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displayed 4 path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 4 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displayed 1 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 1 path in Favorite Projects 2 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 2 path in Favorite Projects 3 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 3 path in Favorite Projects 4 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 4 path in Favorite Projects Add Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add an existing subproject to the project Add
538. ssembly and object file g2 3 Assemble Options tab gt Assemble List category gt Output assemble list file property value changes to yes 4 Assemble Options tab gt Assemble List category gt Output with cross reference list property Walle changes to Yes Common 2 11 1 Relocate C source files to the optimum area Use the memory bank relocation support tool to relocate C source files to the optimum area This tool generates a function information file a file containing relocation information for each file C source files will be relocated to the common area or bank area by performing compilation using that file Caution This function is valid only when a device with a memory bank installed is specified as the microcontroller The procedures for performing this operation are described below Generating a function information file automatically and relocating C source files Changing the relocation destination of the auto generated function information file 1 Generating a function information file automatically and relocating C source files Below is the procedure for generating a function information file automatically and using that file to relocate C source files via one build a Set the output of the function information file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab on the Property panel To use the memory bank relocation support tool
539. sses in relocatable addresses and symbols in input files Error list file File containing error information generated dur ing converting lists B 6 2 Functions 1 Resolving disadvantages of the assembler relocatable assembler The list converter offers a solution to disadvantages of relocatable assembler by embedding the location and object codes in the assemble list file The absolute assemble list output by the list converter agrees completely with the addresses used in actual program operation The actual values of external symbols are embedded in the list Relocatable values are embedded in the list as actual values For the symbol values in symbol tables or cross reference lists the actual values are embedded in the list Examples of the absolute assemble list file that can be acquired by the list converter are shown below R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 538 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example Relocation data is embedded as shown below Assemble list chip initialize 11201A HDTSA 1AH 1620FE HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor R9A0000 CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code 1421FE DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 63 A B 95 DEl A 84 DE 62 A 95 DE A Absolute assemble list chip initialize 11201A HDTSA 1AH 1620FE HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data
540. ssing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the compile options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the compile options group How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 197 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Assemble Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the assembler categorized by the following and the configurat
541. sts Description An abort error occurs if something other than a path name is specified after the y option An abort error occurs if the path name is omitted after the y option The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the y option 2 Path registered in the device file installer 3 Path by which the LK78K0O was started up 4 Current folder 5 The environmental variable PATH R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 457 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To specify the path for the device file as folder C 78kO dev describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel yC 78k0 dev To specify the path for the device file as folder D device files describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel y D device files R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 458 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Warning message output specification The warning message output specification option is as follows W Description format w level Interpretation when omitted w1 Function The w option specifies whether or not a warning message is output to the console Application Use the w option to specify the level at which a warning message will be output Description An abort error occurs if somethin
542. subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the link options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the link options group How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 213 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Object Convert Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the object converter categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Hex File 2 Hex File Filling 3 Symbol Table 4 Error List 5 Others Caution This tab is not displayed for library projects Figure A 8 Property Panel Object Convert Options Tab Property A CA SERO Property El Hex File Output hes file es Output folder for hes file Bb UildModeN amez Hex file name 2Projecthl ame hex Hex file format Intel expanded hes format kie Split hes file No Hex File Filling Fill free memor space fes u Filing value HEX FF Filing start address HEX Filing size byte HEX Symbol T able Error List Others Output hex file Select this option to generate a hex file This option corresponds to the o option Common pA Compile A Asse
543. t The start address offset of the code displayed in the record is shown as a 4 digit hexadecimal Record type Fixed at OOH Code Max 32 digits The object code is shown one byte at a time with the higher 4 bits and lower 4 bits separated A maximum of 16 bytes can be expressed in th e code Check sum 2 digits A value is input subtracting in order from 0 which counts down the data from the code number to the code Start address record ltem Description Number Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number Fixed at 04 Fixed at 0000 Record type Fixed at 03 Fixed at 0000 Fixed at 0000 Check sum Fixed at F9 End record R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 485 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ltem Description Number Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number Fixed at 00 a Fixed at 0000 Record type Fixed at 01 Fixed at FF c Extended tektronix hex file format Hex files are composed of the following three types of block Data block Symbol block This is an unused block Symbol information uses the symbol table file Termination block Each block starts with a header field composed of a common 6 characters and ends with the string end of line Maximum length of each block is 255 not including the start character and end of line The format for the common header field is shown below
544. t folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 200 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 171 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before build processing before build processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before build processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after build processing after build processing Use the call instruct
545. t an additional margin Adjust Stack Size Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the function selected in the tree display area list display area This dialog box is used to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function Functions in the same manner as the button Reset Function Resets the information additional margin recursion depth and callee func tions for the selected function to the default values This button will be grayed out if all the information for the selected function has the default values Reset All Functions Resets the information additional margin recursion depth and callee func tions for all functions to the default values This button will be grayed out if all the information for all functions has the default values R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 307 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d Help menu sk78k0 Help Displays the help of this window Functions in the same manner as the button About sk78k0 Opens the Version Information dialog box of the stack usage tracer 2 Toolbar This area consists of the following buttons Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the call chain with the greatest total stack size including the stack size of callee functions of the function selecte
546. t column 13 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 One or more white space tabs are replaced by a inal white space character 3 1 4 Cross reference list file Cross reference list files contain lists of identifiers such as declarations definitions referenced functions and variables They also include other information such as attributes and line numbers These are output in the order they are found To configure the cross reference list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Compile Options tab Select Yes x on the Output cross reference list file property in the List File category The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property If PAGEWIDTH is 80 the result is as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 100 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 78KO0 C Compiler V 1 x xx Cross reference List Date 2 xx xxx xxxx Page 3 xxxx Command 4 cF051144 prime c x lw80 In file 5 prime c Xref file 6 prime xrf Para file Inc file 9 ATTRIB 10 MODIFY 11 TYPE 12 SYMBOL 13 DEFINE 14 REFERENCE EXTERN EXTERN AUTO1 15 Target chip uPD78F0511 44 16 Device file Vx xx st Item Description Number a Version number Di
547. t embeds absolute values in the assemble list and outputs the list The output format is same as for the assemble list output by the assembler 3 6 2 Error list Error messages output when the list converter is started up are stored in an error list The output format is same as for the error list output by the assembler R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 117 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 7 Variables Information File Generator The variables information file generator outputs the following file Variables information file Remark See B 7 1 O files for details about input and output files of the variables information file generator 3 7 1 Variables information file The variables information file contains information for efficiently allocating variables To configure the variables information file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Variables Relocation Options tab In the Output File category set the Output variables information file property to Yes Specify the output destination in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node VF78KO0 1 Ve xx Attention The semicolon at the head of line means the line is a comment Please
548. t list file property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes If Outputs a form feed code into the end of the list files No Does not output a form feed code into the end of the list files Number of characters in Specify the number of characters in each line of the list file 1 line This corresponds to the Iw option of the librarian This property is not displayed when No in the Output list file property is selected Default 132 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 72 to 260 decimal number R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 221 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Number of lines on 1 Specifies the number of lines on 1 page of the list file page If O is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the librarian This property is not displayed when No in the Output list file property is selected Default How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 and 20 to 32767 decimal number 3 Others Other detailed information on libraries are displayed and the configuration can be changed Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before library generation processing before making library Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFold
549. t ra78k0 kOmain asm cF051144 dSYM 2 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 419 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Common object specification The common object specification option is as follows common common Description format common Interpretation when omitted The object file for the specified device is output Function The common option specifies the output of an object module file common to the 78KO Application Use the common option to generates an object code that can be used commonly in the 78KO regardless of the device type specification option c The output object module file can be linked with an object file for which a different device in the 78KO is specified Description Specify this option to generate an object code that can be used commonly in the 78KO Cautions Even when the common option is specified the device type specification option c or control instruction of the same function must not be omitted An abort error occurs if the common object specification option common is specified for all the input object module files to be linked Example of use To generate an object code that can be used commonly in the 78KO describe as C gt ra78k0 kOsub c cF051144 common R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 420 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Self
550. t replace the fixed code with the library ql1 Yes Replace only process before after function ql2 Yes Replace load store and indirect referencing instruction and equivalent of ql2 ql3 Yes Replace whole instructions ql4 Yes subroutinize same codes use stack access libraries ql5 Performs optimization with the execution speed precedence Select whether to generate the code using HL B addressing when the index used for the reference of the char unsigned char type arrays and char unsigned char type pointers is an unsigned char type variable Output object using HL B instruction This corresponds to the qe option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No on the Use static model property in the Memory Model category from the Compile Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Yes qe Generates the code using HL B addressing No Does not specify generating the code using HL B addressing Output object using HL bit instruction Select whether to output an object using HL bit This corresponds to the qh option of the compiler R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 240 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Optimize for debugging Select whether to perform the optimization for debugging This corresponds to the qg option of the compiler Defau
551. t the file with read only attribute The read only file added to the project is displayed in italic R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 149 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE m Highlight the file that does not exist The file that is added to the project but does not exist is grayed out and its icon is dimmed The file that exists The file that does not exist d main c n Highlight the build target file lt 1 gt The file which the error occurred during building rapid building rebuilding compiling or assembling is highlighted as the example below The file with warning Remarks 1 The file with both the error and the warning is highlighted in red 2 The highlight is canceled when the build option general option or individual option or the build mode is changed lt 2 gt The names of the following files are displayed in boldface The source files that have not been compiled after edited The source files after cleaning has been executed The source files after build tool options have been changed The source files after any build mode has been changed Remark The file names are all displayed in boldface right after the project is opened The boldface display is canceled after building is executed o Highlight non build target file The file that is set as non build target is highlighted as shown in the example below Build target file Non build target f
552. t tool No Use memory bank relocation support tool Selects whether to execute the memory bank relocation support tool afrer build processing IF Yes is selected in this field the following properties changes automatically 1 Compiler Options tab gt Assembly File category gt Output assemble file property value changes to yes With no C source mtoll al Compiler Options tab Debug Information category gt Add debug information property value changes Yes 4dd to both assembly and object file g2 3 Assemble Options tab gt Assemble List category gt Output assemble list file property value changes to res 4 Assemble Options tab gt Assemble List category gt Output with cross reference list property value changes to Yes Common 4 Compile i Assemble A Link Opti Object COA Variables Description of each category 1 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Use memory bank relo Select whether to start the memory bank relocation support tool after link processing cation support tool PP Default No How to change to How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Starts the memory bank relocation support tool after link processing The function information file will be removed from the rapid build target O Does not start the memory bank relocation support tool
553. tack Usage Tracer File View Option Help P E main Total Stack Size Additional Margin 4 i L stabi main CeprojiSTe sub E stabi 4 DAproji5TK4 TE sub2 E subi CeiprojiSTel Bisubii D projiSTEh Bo an _ LA subi28 D prajisTki E subii H sample c D projiSTk subi2e amp A subi4 Diiproj STE E subz1 Reading completed O sample c subi3 C 4Program Files Aenesas Electronics CubeS uite Plugins Stk dat ak0 twt I subi4 Reading l l l C Program FilestAenesas Electronics Cubes uite Plugins Stk Adat ak 0D bet Reading completed For Help press Fl To exit the stack usage tracer from the Stack Usage Tracer window select File menu gt gt Exit sk78kO R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 87 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 2 Check the call relationship You can check the function call relationship in the tree display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window Figure 2 121 Tree Display Area E main C stabi subi sub2 Ge subs LJ sub31 subii Wy subii LJ subizk amp Ge subzi C sample c subis C subi Remark The table below shows the meaning of the icon displayed to the left of the string representing the function name The display priority for icons is from High E to Low LH The function directly called by a given function with the largest total stack size Information additional margin recursion depth o
554. ter in this variable field is a hexadecimal which indicates the length of the field The first character in this variable field is a hexadecimal which indicates the length of the field The length of the character string is therefore 1 to 16 characters and the length of the variable length field including the character string length indicator is 2 to 17 Header Header character Check sum 1CH Number of digits in load address Load address 100H Object code 6 bytes R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 487 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Termination block The format for the termination block is shown below Table B 16 Termination Block Format for Extended Tektronix Field Number of ASCII Description Characters Standard header field Block type 8 Load address Start address for program execution Number of characters is variable Item Description Number Header character Block length 8H Block type Check sum 1AH Number of digits in load address of Number of digits in load address in load address Load address 80H Symbol block unused The extended Tech symbol block is data used for symbolic debugging It may be assumed to have the following characteristics Table B 17 Symbol Block Characteristics for Extended Tektronix Items Characteristics Symbol 1 to 16 uppercase and lowercase alphabets numerals period and underscore Numerals a
555. that module to the input module The purpose of a library file is to register two or more modules in a single file By creating library files that can be used in common with many programs file management and operation become easier and more efficient Use the b option to input the library file to the linker Description The file name is cannot be omitted If a file name which includes a path name is specified a library file will be input from that path An error occurs if no library file exists in the specified path If a file name which does not include a path name is specified a library file will be input from the path specified by the i option or from the default search path If two or more b options are specified library files will be input in a specified sequence Up to 10 b options can be specified See B 5 Librarian for details about the method of creating library files Example of use To input a library file kO lib describe as kOsub rel is registered in the library file C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel bk0O 1lib R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 451 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Library file read path specification The library file read path specification option is as follows Description format ipath name path name two or more path names can be specified Interpretation when omitted Path specified by environmental v
556. the Output hex file property is selected Default ProjectName hex How to change Directly enter to the text box Up to 259 characters R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 168 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Hex file format Select the format of the hex file to be generated This corresponds to the k option of the object converter This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property is selected Default Intel expanded hex format kie How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Intel standard hex Specify the Intel standard hex format as the format ki format of the hex file to be generated Intel expanded hex Specify the Intel expanded hex format as the format kie format of the hex file to be generated Motorola S type Specify the Motorola S type format standard format standard address as the format of the hex file to be address km generated Motorola S type Specify the Motorola S type format 32 bit format 32 bit address address as the format of the hex file to be kme generated Expanded Tektronix hex Specify the expanded Tektronix hex format as format kt the format of the hex file to be generated 7 Device The detailed information on the device is displayed and the configuration can be changed Security ID Specify the security ID of an on chip flash memory device This corresponds to the gi
557. the display Absolute assemble list file output Outputs an absolute assemble list file specification R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 543 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Object module file input specification The object module file input specification option is as follows f Description format r input file name Interpretation when omitted rassemble list file name rel Function The r option specifies the input of an object module file Application Use the r option when the primary name of an object module file is different from the primary name of the assem ble list file or if its file type is not rel Description When a fatal error occurs the absolute assemble list file cannot be output If only the primary name of the input file name is specified the list converter will add rel to the file name as the file type and input the file Example of use If the primary name is different between an assemble list file kKOmain prn and an object module file Sample rel describe as follows so as to specify the input of a load module file sample rel C gt lcenv78k0 kOmain prn lsample rel R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 544 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Load module file input specification The load module file input specification option is as follows
558. the end of the function name 3 Ifthe adjusted function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe adjusted function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name 5 Ifthe only action performed in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box was adding callee functions then the display format of this area will be as follows function name total stack size frame size 3 System Library Functions Display a list of automatically configured system library functions for which the frame size is unknown and the stack usage tracer has forcibly set an additional margin This area generally displays modified system library func tions in the following format function name total stack size additional margin Remarks 1 The underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 An appropriate frame size is added to corresponding system library functions in the stack usage tracer s database as additional margin Function buttons Adjust Size Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recur sion depth and callee functions for the function selected in the Unknown Functions Adjusted Functions System Library Functions Hep Displays the help of this dialog bo
559. the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Swap order of Swaps the order of formula operations formula operations qw1 Yes for soeed assumed In addition to the swapping the order of formula SADDR array is in 256 operations changes the execution order in an bytes qw2 expression and performs address calculation without a carry while assuming that the size of the array does not exceed 256 bytes when a char short unsigned short int or unsigned int array that is allocated to the saddr area is referenced with an unsigned char variable Does not specify swapping the order of formula operations Select whether to automatically assign automatic variables to a register and the saddr area Assign automatic variables to register or This corresponds to the qv option of the compiler saddr area Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qv Assigns automatic variables to a register and the saddr area automatically No Does not specify assigning automatic variables to a register and the saddr area automatically Select whether to assign register variables to registers and assign them also to the saddr area Assign register variables to register and saddr This corresponds to the qr option of the compiler area Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list
560. the number of errors and warnigs to the display and returns control to the host operating system prime CC78K0 warning W0745 Expected function prototype prime CC78K0 warning W0745 Expected function prototype prime CC78K0 warning W0622 No return value prime CC78K0 warning W0622 No return value prime CC78K0 warning W0622 No return value Target chip uPD780xx Device file VX XX Compilation complete 0 error s and 5 warning s found If the C compiler detects a fatal error during compilation which makes it unable to continue compiling processing the C compiler outputs a message to the display cancels compilation and returns control to the host operating system Example A non existent compile option is specified C gt cc78k0 kOmain c m 78K0 C Compiler Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation CC78K0 error F0018 Option is not recognized m Please enter CC78K0O if you want help messages Program aborted R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Apr 01 2011 Page 325 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE In the above example a non existent compile option is specified An error occurs and the C compiler aborts the compilation 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set compile options from CubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the
561. the subproject which the currently opening project has Select the combination of the main project and subproject to build and the build modes When this dialog box is opened for the first time after the project is created all the check boxes are unchecked From the second time the previous setting is retained R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 286 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Build mode Show build modes which the main project and subproject have c Defined macros Show defined macros separated with configured for the combination of the main project and the subproject and their build modes in the Compile Options tab and the Assemble Options tab in the Property panel Note that the defined macro in Compile Option comes before the one in Assemble Option and they are sepa rated with Function buttons Button Build Rebuild Clean Close Help Closes this dialog box and executes a batch build of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the build are displayed on the Output panel After the batch build is complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened Note that this buttons is disabled when any project is not selected Closes this dialog box and executes a batch rebuild of the selected projects in the respec tive build modes The execution result of the re
562. ther than the above Remark The display priority for icons is from High E to Low _ a Context menu Select a function in this area and then right click with the mouse The context menu described below appears Adjust Stack Size Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 308 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 List display area Display the stack information for a single function function name total stack size frame size additional margin and file name in list format Function Displays the function name Note that this area will only display functions from level 1 the selected function and level 2 functions called directly by the selected function Total Stack Size Displays the total stack size including the stack size of callee functions in bytes Displays the frame size not including the stack size of callee functions in bytes Additional Margin Displays the value to mandatorily added to frame size in bytes The table below shows the meaning of the icon displayed to the left of the string representing the function name The function directly called by a given function with the largest total stack size Information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modi fied via the Adjust Stack
563. this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools If the number of items specified in the System include paths property and in the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category on the Individual Compile Options tab together total more than 64 then an error will occur under build execution The include paths which the system set during compiling are displayed System include paths The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name Micom ToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the compiler The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Macro definition Specify the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of th
564. this reason device files not located in executable format startup path dev cannot be found Executable format startup path dev is the path where the device file was installed during the installation of the C compiler R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 138 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This appendix explains windows panels dialog boxes used in build process A 1 Description The following lists the windows panels dialog boxes used in build process Table A 1 List of Windows Panels Dialog Boxes Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description This is the first window to be open when CubeSuite is launched Project Tree panel This panel is used to display the project components in tree view Property panel This panel is used to display the detailed information on the build tool file or category that is selected on the Project Tree panel and change the settings of the information Editor panel This panel is used to display edit text files source files Output panel This panel is used to display the message that is output from the build tool Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and e
565. ting contents of the project to the project file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 15 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about saving the project 2 2 Change the Build Tool Version You can change the version of the build tool compiler package used in the project main project or subproject Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select Always latest version which was installed or the version on the Using compiler package version property in the Version Select category Figure 2 1 Version Select Category O Yersion Select Remarks 1 When the build tool used in the main project and subprojects is the same you can collectively change the build tool version by selecting all of the Build tool nodes and setting the property 2 If you have selected a compiler package that has not been installed e g if you open a project created in another execution environment then that version is also displayed 3 Ifthe options change depending on the compiler package then the display of the build tool s properties will change according to the selected version Properties that are hidden when the version is changed are saved in the project file s settings and the values will be reproduced when the properties are displayed again Options are changed in accordance with the following rules Info
566. tive project it cannot be removed from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation This menu is always disabled You can rename the selected subproject Property Displays the selected subproject s property on the Property panel R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 153 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 When the Build tool node is selected Build Project Builds the selected project main project or subproject The subproject is also built when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Rebuilds the selected project main project or subproject The subproject is also rebuilt when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Cleans the selected project main project or subproject The subproject is also cleaned when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set to Default Build Option for Sets the current build option to the standard option for the selected project When the Project subproject is added it is not set When the build option that is different from the standard option is set its property is displayed in boldface Set Link Order Opens the Link Order dialog box to display object module files and library files and to setup their link
567. ton For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified If the number of items specified in the System libraries property and in the Using standard libraries property in the Library category on the Compile Options tab together total more than 64 then an error will occur under build execution System libraries The name of the library file which the system uses is displayed The system library file is searched with lower priority than the library file to be used The library file name is displayed as the subproperty Default System libraries number of defined items How to change Changes not allowed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 207 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Additional library paths Specify the search folder to be used other than the standard libraries The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder The library files are searched from the library path If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the linker The specified library path name is displayed as the subproperty Additional library path
568. tool property in the Preprocess category from the Assemble Options tab of the build tool to be used This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The paths are added to the i option according to the following sequence Paths specified in the System include paths property in the Preprocess category from the Assemble Options tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category from the Assemble Options tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category How to change Select from the drop down list Macro definition Specify the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The def part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of the assembler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the general option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified 3 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Object file name Specify the name of the object file generated after assembling If this field is blank the file is saved
569. tput w2 Outputs detailed warning messages 8 Extension The detailed information on extensions are displayed and the configuration can be changed Allow C format Select whether to allow the use of C format comments comments This corresponds to the zp option of the compiler a Sc oraaa Allow nested comments Select whether to allow the nest use of comments This corresponds to the zc option of the compiler Kanji character code of Select the Kanji character code of the source source This corresponds to the zs ze and zn option of the compiler Select from the drop down list Restriction Shift_JIS zs Interprets the kanji code of the source as Shift_JIS EUC JP ze Interprets the kanji code of the source as EUC JP Unspecified zn Interprets the source as not containing kanji codes Follow ANSI Standard Select whether to disable non ANSI standard functions and enable some of the functions of the ANSI standard This corresponds to the za option of the compiler How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Za Disables non ANSI standard functions and enables some of the functions of the ANSI standard Enables non ANSI standard functions R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 185 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Interpret int short as char Select whether to compile by interpreting int and short descriptions as
570. ts a help message on the display R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 499 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Hex file output specification The hex file output specification options are as follows 0 NO 0 NO Description format o output file name no Interpretation when omitted oinput file name hex The file type for extended space is H1 to H15 Function The o option specifies the output of a hex file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The no option specifies that no hex file is output Application Use the o option to specify the location to which a hex file is output or to change its file name Specify the no option when performing an object conversion only to output a symbol table file This will shorten object conversion time Description If output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the hex file nput file name hex will be output to the current folder If only the path name is specified in outout file name input file name hex will be output to the specified path If both the o and no options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the zf option is specified the file type is as follows ld Output file at program side other than boot area ROM When a code is output to a segment allocated in extended s
571. ubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Optimization specification The optimization specification options are as follows q nq q nq Description format qloptimization type two or more types can be specified Interpretation when omitted qcjlvw Function The q option specifies to call the optimization phase to generate efficient objects The ng option disables the q option Application Use the q option to improve the execution speed of the objects and reduce the code size If you want to perform multiple optimizations simultaneously when the q option is specified specify the optimization types consecutively See Description for details Description The optimization types that can be specified by the q option are shown below Optimization Type Process Description No specification It is assumed that the qcjlvw has been specified Regards the char with no qualifier as a unsigned char to improve code efficiency Performs calculations including char without sign extension Calculation Target Calculation Result unsigned char type variable and unsigned char type variable unsigned char type Constants from 0 to 255 with suffix U and signed char type unsigned char type variable R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 340 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Optimization Type Process Description r n Adds a register v
572. uction This corresponds to the qj option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qj Optimizes branch instructions Does not specify optimizing branch instructions R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 239 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Replace fixed code to library Size precedence optimization Select whether to replace the fixed code with the library This corresponds to the ql option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Performs optimization with the module size precedence Replaces only the processing routines before and after the function with a library Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code with a library Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code in one instruction unit with a library Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code in one instruction unit with a library In addition common code is placed in subroutines and the library for the stack access is used Does not specify replacing the fixed code with the library Restriction Yes Do not replace Does no
573. ude statement in the C source file prime c from folder D and D sample describe as R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 350 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assembler source file creation specification The assembler source file creation specification options are as follows a Sa Description format aloutput file name Interpretation when omitted No assembler source file is output Function The a option specifies the output of the assembler source file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application Use the a option to specify the location to which an assembler source file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the a option is specified the output file name will be nput file name asm If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the a option is specified the output file name will be output file name asm If the drive name is omitted when the a option is specified the assemble source file will be output to the current drive If both the a and sa options are specified at the same time the sa option is ignored Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To output the assembler source file sample asm describe as C gt cc78k0 cF0511
574. ue prime c 35 CC78KO warning W0622 No return value prime c 41 CC78KO warning W0622 No return value R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 129 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS 4 2 Assembler This section introduces the lists of sample programs attached to the assembler 4 2 1 kOmain asm NAME SAMPM kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkk HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program main routine kkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk PUBLIC EXTRN EXTRN DATA HDTSA STASC CODE MAIN START MAIN CONVAH _ STBEG DSEG DS DS CSEG DW CSEG START saddr AT OH START chip initialize MOVW MOV MOVW CALL MOVW MOV MOV INCW MOV MOV BR END SP _ STBEG HDTSA 1AH HL HDTSA CONVAH DE STASC i A B DE A DE ApC DE A set hex 2 code data in HL registor convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code set DE lt store ASCII code table R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 130 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS 4 2 2 kOsub asm NAME SAMPS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk gt HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program sub routine input condition HL lt hex 2 code output condition BC register lt ASCII 2 code kkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
575. uild tool name Build tool The build tool compiler assembler etc used in the project hereafter referred to as Build tool node File The following files that are added to the project are displayed under the hereafter referred to as File node root of this node C source file c Assembler source file asm Header file h inc Object file rel Library file lib Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vfi Function information file fin N Other file doc xml etc Build tool generated files The following files generated by the build tool appear directly below the hereafter referred to as Build tool generated node generated during the build files node For other than library projects Load module file Imf Link list file map Error list file elk eoc Hex file hex hxb hxf Symbol table file sym Replacement information file txt Object information file txt Reference information file txt For library projects Library file lib List file Ist Replacement information file txt Object information file txt Reference information file txt Files displayed under this node cannot be renamed deleted or moved This node is always placed lower than the File node This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after building Startup This is a node for adding other than standard sta
576. ule file are not output the q options other than qu are invalid If both the q and nq options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If two or more q options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If both the qr and sm options are specified the compiler outputs the warning message and the qr option is ignored The real time OS does not support the qr option Example of use To regard the char with no qualifier as a unsigned char to improve code efficiency describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c qu The qc option that is specified first is ignored the qr option that is specified last is valid and arguments of norec auto variables and register variables are allocated to the saddr area C gt cc78k0O cF051144 prime c qc qr To validate both the qc and qr options describe as C gt cc78k0O cF051144 prime c qcr R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 342 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Debug information output specification The debug information output specification options are as follows g ng g ng Description format Interpretation when omitted g2 Function The g option specifies that debug information is to be added into an object module file The ng option disables the g option Application If the g option is not specified the l
577. unction How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qo Sets the on chip debug Does not set the on chip debug R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 208 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Debug monitor area Specify the size of the debug monitor area in decimal size byte This corresponds to the go option of the linker If this is blank an error will occur This property is not displayed when the Use on chip debug property is not displayed or when No is selected in the property Default 256 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 256 to 1024 decimal number Select whether to set the user option byte Set user option byte This corresponds to the gb option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes gb Sets the user option byte However if the User option byte value property is blank the user option byte is not set Does not set the user option byte Specify the user option byte value in hexadecimal without Ox User option byte value This corresponds to the gb option of the linker Values saved in versions of CubeSuite below 1 20 may be outside the allowed setting range If the values set outside the allowed range are restored this property is blank This property is not displayed when No in the Set user option byte property is selected
578. unctions are not eligible for allocation whether they are inside a file or a function However that references to them are counted and output to the file as comments Functions not defined in Functions not defined in the C source are not eligible for allocation e g definitions the C source in the assembler source or runtime libraries They are also not output to the output file Unreferenced functions They are also not output to the output file 4 Symbols not output to the variables information file The following symbols are not output to the variables information file Unreferenced symbols Symbols defined in libraries EXTERN symbols in other than load modules Symbols defined in assembler source The relocation attribute of the location segment is AT Interrupt handlers for RTOS tasks or RTOS Firm ROM functions Vector interrupt functions Symbols which type is T NULL R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 554 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 B 7 4 Method for manipulating APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 1 Variables information file generator startup The following two methods can be used to start up the variables information file generator a Startup from the command line X path name gt v 78k0 Aoption object module file name Aobject module file name Aoption Current drive name path name Current folder name vf78k0 Command name of the variables informatio
579. und color Error message Ashber Character color Red Fatal error or operation disabled because of an error in operation Background color Light gray R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 265 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This area has the following functions a Tag jump When the output message is double clicked or the Enter key is pressed with the caret over the message the Editor panel appears and the destination line number of the file is displayed You can jump to the line of the source file that generated the error from the error message output when build ing b Display help help with regard to the message in the line is shown by selecting Help for Message in the context menu or pressing the F1 key while the caret is in the line where the warning message or the error message is dis played c Save log The contents displayed on the currently selected tab can be saved in a text file txt by selecting Save Output tab name As from the File menu and opens the Save As dialog box messages on the tab that is not selected will not be saved 2 Tab selection area Select tabs that messages are output from Tabs that are displayed are as follows All Messages Shows all the messages by order of output Except while executing a rapid build Rapid Build Shows the message output from the build tool by running a rapid build Build Tool Shows the message output
580. upport the input and output of floating point data No Does not use the standard library which support the input and output of floating point data Use multiplier and divider Select whether to use the standard library which supports a multiplier and divider Whether there is a multiplier and divider depends on the microcontroller that is used This property is not displayed when the microcontroller does not have a multiplier and divider and No in the Use standard library property is selected Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the standard library which supports a multiplier and divider No Does not use the standard library which supports a multiplier and divider Using standard libraries Display the file name and numbers of the standard libraries used during linking in the current settings Note The linking library file name is displayed as the subproperty This property is not displayed when No in the Use standard library property is selected Default Using standard libraries number of using standard libraries How to change Changes not allowed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 183 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note Naming rules of library files are as follows cl0 lt mul gt lt model gt lt float gt lt pascal gt lt flash gt 1lib lt mul gt When the multiplier and divider are not u
581. ure 2 23 Link List Category For Map Information i il I a Output link list file Yez Jutput with ink directive into Tes Output with local symboal list No a E LA A E ai O O 1E 1 ENNIE Number of lines on 1 page bE If you select Yes default on the Output link list file property the Output with map list property is displayed To output map information to the link list file select Yes default Remark See 3 3 2 Map list for map information 2 4 4 Output symbol information Symbol information local symbols and public symbols defined in the input module is output to the link list file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output symbol information is made with the Link List category 1 When outputting the local symbol list Figure 2 24 Link List Category For Local Symbol Information Output link list file CURL euth hnk directe ato Output with local symbol list Jutput with public symbol list Output with map list Yeg Output with form feed control code Ho Number of lines on 1 page BE If you select Yes default on the Output link list file property the Output with local symbol list property is displayed To output local symbol list to the link list file select Yes kl No is selected by default Remark See 3 3 4 Local symbol list for the local symbol list R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CEN
582. ure B 18 Flash Area Project Project Tree JPE uPDSFOS88_4 8 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool A CAFSKO Build Tool ci FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File ax Startup c flash c fe link_flash dr lt 9 gt Set the build options for the flash area project Select the build tool node on the project tree and set each of the build options on the Property panel lt 10 gt Set variables relocation options Set the variables relocation options to generate a variables information file and use it to allocate variables and functions Select the Variables Relocation Options tab In the Output File category set the Output variables information file property to Yes to generate an empty variables information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property Remark If a variables information file with the same name already exists the build will be configured to use it Figure B 19 Output folder for variables information file Property in Flash Area Jutput folder for vanables information tile 20 UNM Oden ame Variables information file name 2 rojecthl ame vii Set the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property to change
583. using CubeSuite avoid using temporary files in a network environment 10 Using the variables information file generator a If a pragma section directive is specified with an AT start address In a section defined by a pragma section directive specified with an AT start address allocating variables to the saddr area may cause incorrect behavior C source pragma section DATA CDATA AT OCFOOH define dnil int oxcfo0o0 int nil sreg in vfi _ sreg int x1 x2 void func void main nil 0x10 func Variables information file variable information sreg X2 1 2 0 X1 1 2 0 R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 134 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS b c In the C source above the values of variables x1 and x2 are both expected to be 0x10 But if variable ni1 is allocated to the saddr area from Oxfe20 in the variables information file then the program will not behave as intended variable x1 will have the value of ni1 which is 0x10 and variable x2 will have the value of address Oxcf00 The variables information file generator does not specify sreg for variables in sections defined by pragma section directives with AT start addresses specified If you edit the variables information file do not specify allocation to the saddr area for the above variables Output of local symbols generated by the compiler The local sym
584. ut common object file for various devices No Output error list file No Assemble List Others Add debug informabon Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option comesponds to the g and ga options Common A Compile A B 2 4 Option 1 Types The assemble options are detailed instructions for the operation of the assembler The types and explanations for assemble options are shown below Table B 6 Assemble Options Classification Description Device type specification Specifies the type of the target device Object module file output Specifies the output of an object module file specification Forced object module file output Forces the output of an object module file specification Debug information output Specifies that debug information local symbol information is to specification be added to an object module file Specifies that assembler source debug information is to be added to an object module file Include file read path Reads an include file from a specified path specification R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 384 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Specifies the output of an assemble list file Assemble list file output specification a 3 so Assemble list file information Outputs an assemble list into an assemble list file specification g x je I x Outputs a s
585. utput Function The Il option specifies the number of lines per page in a link list file Application Use the lIl option to change the number of lines per page in a link list file Description The range number of lines that can be specified with the Il option is 20 to 32767 An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified If the number of lines is omitted it is assumed that 66 has been specified If the number of lines specified is 0 no page breaks will be made If the np option is specified the Il option is invalid Example of use To specify 20 as the number of lines per page in a link list file kO map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel pk0O map 1120 The contents of kO map is as follows 78K0 Linker Vx xx Date XX XXX XXXxX Page Command kOmain rel kOsub rel pk0 map 1120 Para file Out file kOmain 1lmf Map file kO map Direc file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 447 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Directive xxx Tink information 3 output segment s 2FH byte s real data 78KO Linker Vx xx Date xx Xxx XXXX Page 2 23 symbol s defined xxx Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000H SIZE 2000H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SIZE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS 78KO Linker Vx xx Date XxX XXX XXXX
586. utput destination is the file set in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property Remark Ifa variables information file with the same name already exists the build will be configured to use it R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 46 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 54 Output variables information file Property Jutput folder for vanables information file Ab dlld ode ames Yanables information file name FrojectN ame vii Figure 2 55 Project Tree Panel After Generating Variables Information File Project Tree ra 3 C478K0 Build Tool ces FEKO Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 5 0 File Fi Startup E vil sample vi The settings of the output folder and file of the variables information file are can be changed lt 1 gt Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder for variables information file property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box BuildModeName is set by default BuildModeName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the build mode name If this property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree lt 2 gt Set the output file name Setting the
587. utput folder and file name of the variables information file If the Variables information file property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree b Set compile options Select the Compile Options tab Select No on the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category Figure 2 80 Output objects for flash Property in Boot Area fects for flash ascal unction attribute to tunctons Use prologueepilogue library Ho Next select Yes For boot area on the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category Figure 2 81 Use standard startup routine Property in Boot Area Yes For boot area c Set link options Select the Link Options tab In the Device category if you select Yes zb on the Set flash start address property the Flash start address property is displayed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 64 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Specifies the start address of the flash memory area here The range that can be specified for the value is 0 to FFFF Figure 2 82 Set flash start address and Flash start address Property in Boot Area O Device Use on chip debug Heo Set flash start address hogt area load module tle name d Set object convert options Select the Object Convert Options tab Select No
588. variables n Peephole optimization Replacement of special patterns Example a 1 gt a a 0 gt a Decrease the strength of the Example a 2 gt a a a lt lt 1 calculation Memory device allocation register Data is allocated to rapidly accessible memory variables Example Registers saddr only when the qr option is specified Jump optimization the qj option Consecutive jump instructions are combined into one instruction Register allocation the qv qr rd Variables are automatically allocated to registers rk rs options Remark a to g n and 0 are performed regardless of the optimization option specifications The optimizations in h to m q and r are performed when optimization options are specified Future support is planned for the optimizations in h to m p is performed when there are register declarations in the C source However the saddr area is only allocated when the qr option is specified See Optimization specification about the optimization options R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 322 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 ROMization function ROMization is processing that locates in ROM the initial values for external variables that have initial values and copies them to RAM when the system is executed The CA78KO provides startup routines with the ROMization processes of programs Using the startup routines eli
589. variables information file generator from a parameter file as follows X gt v 78k0 Aobject module file A fparameter file name Parameter file specification option parameter file name A file which includes the data required to start up the variables information file generator Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Apr 01 2011 Page 555 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE A option Aoption If the source file name is omitted from the command line only 1 source file name can be specified in the parameter file The source file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all variables relocation options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file sample plk using an editor and then start up the variables information file generator parameter file main rel sub rel osample lmf psample map e tc tmp C gt v 78k0 fsapmle plk voinfo vfi 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the variables information file generator is started up an execution startup message appears on the dis play 78KO Var Func Inf Vx xx XX XXX XxXxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation b Execution end message If it detects no errors resulting fro
590. x R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 314 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Adjust Stack Size dialog box This dialog box is used to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function Figure A 47 Adjust Stack Size Dialog Box Adjust Stack Size 1 Function Hame publ 2 g Frame Size Boo Cancel 3 y Additional Margir o 4 4 Recursion Depth o Help Callee Function List for Indirect Call Function buttons Callee Functions All Functions suib1 1 4 4 main5 6 4 stab 4 4 sub bia 424 sub1 1 4 4 5 sub 28 6 4 sample cHsubl alt t sub 4 4 4 sube 1 42 1 40 sub 1 4 4 sub3 8 3 subs 4 4 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window select a function and then select Adjust Stack Size from the Option menu On the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window select a function and then click the E4 button from toolbar On the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window select a function and then select Adjust Stack Size from the context menu On the Unknown Functions Adjusted Functions System Library Functions of the Stack Size Unknown
591. xceeds 15 characters and one line the excess is output from column 23 on the next line and items 13 and 14 are output from column 39 on the next line This outputs the line number and file name defined for the symbol and is displayed as line number 5 digit include file number 2 digit This outputs the line number and file name that reference the symbol and is displayed as line number 5 digit include file number 2 digit If the line contents exceed the line length the remaining contents are output beginning at column 47 of the next line Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file Displays the version number of the input device file R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2011 CENESAS Page 102 of 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 2 Assembler The assembler outputs the following list Output List File Name Output List Name Assemble list file Assemble list file headers Assemble list Symbol list Cross reference list To configure the assemble list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Assemble Options tab Select Yes p on the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category To output the error list file in the Output File category set the Output error list file property to Yes e The output destination i
592. xx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation sample prime CC78K0 warning Duplicated chip specifier sample prime CC78K0 warning Expected function prototype sample prime CC78K0 warning Expected function prototype sample prime CC78K0 warning No return value sample prime CC78K0 warning No return value sample prime CC78K0 warning No return value Target chip uPD78014 Device file VX XX Compilation complete 0 error s and 6 warning s found R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 332 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Object module file creation specification The object module file creation specification options are as follows 0 NO 0 NO Description format o output file name no Interpretation when omitted oinput file name rel Function The o option specifies the output of an object module file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The no option specifies not to output an object module file Application Use the o option to specify the location to which an object module file is output or to change its file name Specify the no option when performing compilation only to output an assembler source file This will shorten compilation time Description If the output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the output file name will be nput file name
593. y the recursion depth either as a decimal number or as a hexadecimal number starting with Ox or OX Remark If the selected function is not a recursive function then this item will be grayed out 5 Callee Function List for Indirect Call area a Callee Functions Display a list of callee functions called by the selected function functions called indirectly using a function pointer or the like This area generally displays callee functions in the following format function name total stack size frame size additional margin Remarks 1 If the callee function is written in assembly language or it is a system library function then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe callee function is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name 3 Ifthe callee function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe callee function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the func tion name 5 Functions added intentionally from All Functions by clicking the Add button are shown with a plus sign appended to the end of the function name R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 316 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WIND
594. ymbol list into an assemble list file nks l K x lt Outputs a cross reference list into an assemble list file nkx Assemble list file format Changes the number of characters printed per line in an assemble specification list file Changes the number of lines printed per page in an assemble list file Outputs the specified character strings in the header of an assemble list file Specifies the number of expansion characters of a tab Inserts a form feed code at the end of an assemble list file nlf I I I I Error list file output specification Outputs an error list file Inputs the input file name and options from a specified file Creates a temporary file in the specified path D lt h Parameter file specification Temporary file creation path specification Kanji code 2 byte code Interprets Kanji described in the comment as Shift JIS code Interprets Kanji described in the comment as EUC code Characters described in the comment are not interpreted as kanji Reads a device file from a specified path specification Device file search path specification R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 385 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Precedence For the assemble options shown in the following table the precedence is explained in a case where two or more options along the vertical axis and options along the horizont
595. you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified However this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools If the number of items specified in the System include paths property and in the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category on the Individual Assemble Options tab together total more than 64 then an error will occur under build execution System include paths The include paths which the system set during assembling are displayed The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The include path is displayed as the subproperty System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 199 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite Ver 1 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Macro definition Specify the macr
596. ys the names of the segments output to the load module file load module file Segment names read from Displays the names of the segments read from the object module file object module file 8 Input module name Displays the module name of an input file that existed the input segment displayed in 7 If a module name exceeds 8 characters that name is output as it is Items 9 and 11 are output from column 39 on the next line Segment start address Displays the start address that output segments are allocated Output segment size Displays the size of the output segments Segment type and Displays the segment type and the reallocation attributes reallocation attributes Target device for this Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source assembler file Displays the version number of the input device file 3 3 3 Public symbol list A public symbol list outputs data on public symbols defined in an input module To configure the public symbol list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Link Options tab Select Yes kp on the Output with public symbol list property in the Link List category Public symbol list 1 MODULE 2 ATTR 3 VALUE 4 NAME ADDR 0000H MAIN ADDR 0080H START ADDR 0095H CONVAH R20UT0555EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 112 of 570 Apr 01 2011 CubeSuite
597. yte common area sm1 Yes 2 bytes common area sm2 Yes 3 bytes common area sm3 Yes 4 bytes common area sm4 Yes 5 bytes common area sm5 Yes 6 bytes common area sm6 Yes 7 bytes common area sm7 Yes 8 bytes common area sm8 Yes 9 bytes common area sm9 Yes 10 bytes common area sm10 Yes 11 bytes common area sm11 Yes 12 bytes common area sm12 Yes 13 bytes common area sm13 Yes 14 bytes common area sm14 Yes 15 bytes common area sm15 Yes 16 bytes common area sm16 Specify the number of bytes in the common area when the static model is used Specifies 0 byte as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 1 byte as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 2 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 3 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 4 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 5 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 6 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 7 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 8 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 9 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 10 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 11 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies 12 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Specifies

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

C200HX/HG/HE Manuel d`utilisation - Support  Câmara de Vídeo Digital Manual do Utilizador  EVH-1152D/66 - Electro  StormPro BA Series Operation Manual  広報なか 平成26年8月号  LES AFFAIBLISSEURS  Lettre n° 056 septembre-octobre 2007  取扱説明書[NP-TR8] (15.04 MB/PDF)  MANUAL DO OPERADOR E MANUTENÇÃO  Bruksanvisning Instructions for use Mode d`emploi  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file